100% found this document useful (1 vote)

117 views289 pages

Cambridge STEP 3 Past Papers Overview

Q: What is the impact of applying the conservation of momentum and energy principles on a railgun system, and how does this shape expectations for projectile launch velocities?

In a railgun system, applying the conservation of momentum and energy principles provides a framework to predict the projectile's launch velocities. When the gun fires, both linear momentum and kinetic energy are exchanged between the gun, platform, and projectiles. Conservation of momentum dictates that the net sum of the momenta must remain zero before and after firing, hence V_truck decreases as the projectile velocity increases. Energy considerations clarify efficiency and system loss; they inform us that energy not converted to velocity contributes to thermal losses, recoil generation, and potential nonlinearities in current-induced electromagnetic forces. This understanding shapes launch velocity expectations by reinforcing designs that minimize energy loss while maximizing projectile acceleration via force optimizations .

Q: How does simple harmonic motion relate to differential equations, and what are the solutions for damped motion with different damping coefficients?

Simple harmonic motion (SHM) is modeled by the differential equation d2x/dt2 + ω^2x = 0 for undamped motion. For damped motion, the equation becomes d2x/dt2 + 2kdx/dt + ω^2x = 0, where k is the damping coefficient. Solutions differ based on k: (i) Overdamped (k>ω): Solutions are exponentially decreasing without oscillation. (ii) Critically damped (k=ω): Solutions rapidly decline to zero, avoiding oscillation. (iii) Underdamped (k<ω): Solutions display oscillations with exponentially decreasing amplitude, following a cosine function of time while enveloped by e^-kt. In all scenarios, the initial conditions dictate specific solution constants .

Q: What conditions must be satisfied for two parametric curves to intersect at two distinct points, and how does this compare to when they are tangent?

For two parametric curves to intersect at two distinct points, the parametric equations must satisfy both equality of coordinates at those distinct times and differential independence—meaning the slope conditions do not cause overlapping tangency at neither point. Conversely, for two curves to be tangent, not only must they share a point in common, but also their first derivatives at that intersection point must be equal, providing a potential slope of zero indicating that the curves momentarily have the same direction but diverge thereafter .

Q: How can a system of linear equations be evaluated to determine if it lacks solutions or possesses infinitely many solutions?

A system of linear equations can be evaluated using Gaussian elimination to convert it to row echelon form, determining a lack of solutions in the presence of contradiction (e.g., 0=1). Infinitely many solutions exist if the system has one or more free variables (i.e., more variables than pivot columns), implying the system is underdetermined. Furthermore, checking the rank of the coefficient matrix and augmenting with intended result vectors can validate these solution characteristics by comparing expressions that outline consistency .

Q: What is the probability-generating function of a sum of independent geometric random variables, and how can it be used to compute expected value and variance in the context of repeated coin tosses?

The probability-generating function (PGF) of a geometric random variable, say Y, which is defined by the number of heads before the first tail when tossing a fair coin, is P_Y(s) = (q / (1 - ps)), where p is the probability of heads and q = 1 - p. To find the PGF of the sum of several independent geometric variables, one simply takes the product of their individual PGFs: (P_Y(s))^k. For calculations of expected values and variances, since PGFs can be differentiated, E(Y) is found by differentiating the PGF and evaluating at s = 1, and similar techniques allow for the derivation of variance. These methods simplify computing statistical properties of the entire random variable by allowing use of algebraic operations rather than directly summing probabilities .

Q: How can the concept of differentiable functions help solve problems involving particle trajectories defined by parametric equations?

Differentiable functions play a crucial role in solving problems related to particle trajectories defined by parametric equations by providing the necessary tools for calculating instantaneous rates of change, such as velocity and acceleration. By taking derivatives of the parametric equations with respect to the parameter (often time, t), one can obtain expressions for the components of velocity as dy/dt and dx/dt, and subsequently, the acceleration components as d^2y/dt^2 and d^2x/dt^2. These derivatives allow for analyzing the motion and predicting future trajectory characteristics, surface crossings, and curve tangents at any given point .

Q: In a physical system of bullets fired from a stationary truck, why is the kinetic energy gained smaller if the guns are fired one at a time rather than simultaneously?

The kinetic energy gained is smaller when guns are fired one at a time due to the conservation of momentum and subsequent energy dissipation across multiple stages. When guns are fired simultaneously, the system takes full advantage of the initial rest state, leading to a maximal conversion of the chemical potential energy into kinetic. However, with sequential firing, although momentum conservation still holds, each firing imparts less energy relative to the next, since each projectile adds a diminishing amount of velocity due to the already increased speed of the platform. This results in lower overall system kinetic energy when compared to simultaneous firing .

Q: In the context of angular motion, how is the reaction force between a rotating body and the ground affected by changes in angular momentum?

When angular momentum of a rotating body changes, the rate of change directly influences the reaction force at the point of contact with the ground. According to Newton's laws, any change in the rotational speed or axis orientation impacts the normal and frictional forces at the support. Specifically, an increase in angular momentum necessitates a greater counteracting normal force due to the pseudo-centrifugal effects in the body's center of mass. These principles are evident when analyzing gyroscopic effects or rotating wheels .

Q: What does the coefficient of restitution signify in mechanical impacts, and how can it determine post-impact velocities in colliding bodies?

The coefficient of restitution (e) measures the relative elasticity of a collision, defined as the ratio of relative velocities post- and pre-impact between two colliding bodies. It's value, between 0 (perfectly inelastic) and 1 (perfectly elastic), dictates how much kinetic energy is conserved post-collision. By applying conservation of momentum alongside the restitution condition, one can determine the individual velocities of the impacting bodies following collision. In the example of spheres colliding, if e is known, the post-impact velocities are determined by equating the kinetic energy fractions with the system's initial and transferred momenta .

Q: How can Euler's identity be derived from a geometric representation using complex numbers?

Euler's identity e^(iθ) = cosθ + i*sinθ can be derived through the representation of complex numbers on the unit circle in the complex plane. Consider the geometric representation where any complex number can be expressed in exponential form z = r*e^(iθ), with θ as the argument, describing a point on the unit circle. From the exponential definition of trigonometric functions, cos(θ) and sin(θ) define the projections on the real and imaginary axes, respectively. Hence, interpreting e^(iθ) as a rotation in the complex plane results in Euler's identity, which beautifully connects trigonometry to exponential growth .

The document is a collection of past papers for the Cambridge Sixth Term Exam Paper (STEP) from 1987 to 2021, focusing on mathematics and various related subjects. It includes instructions for candidates, information about the exam format, and a series of mathematical problems from different years. The content is aimed at students preparing for advanced mathematics exams, particularly for admission to prestigious universities like Cambridge and Oxford.

Uploaded by

zsy1104537534

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

117 views289 pages

Cambridge STEP 3 Past Papers Overview

Uploaded by

zsy1104537534

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

UE Oxbridge-Prep

STEP 3
Cambridge Sixth Term Exam Paper

剑桥大学数学入学考试

历年真题集
UE Oxbridge-Prep UE Olympiad-Prep

· 剑桥STEP · 美国数学竞赛AMC 8 · 数学篇

· 牛津MAT · 美国数学竞赛AMC 10 · 物理篇

· 牛津PAT数学 · 美国数学竞赛AMC 12 · 工程篇

· 牛津PAT物理 · 美国数学邀请赛AIME · 经济篇

· 剑桥ENGAA数学 · 美国高中数学建模竞赛HiMCM · 计算机篇

· 剑桥ENGAA物理 · 英国数学奥赛BMO 1 · 生化篇

· 剑桥NSAA数学 · 美国物理碗PhysicsBowl · 人文篇

· 剑桥NSAA物理 · 英国高级物理挑战赛

· 剑桥NSAA化学 · 英国物理奥赛BPhO 1

· 剑桥NSAA生物 · 英国化学奥赛UKChO · 数学篇

· 剑桥TMUA · 英国生物奥赛BBO · 物理篇

· 剑桥CSAT · 美国生物奥赛USABO · 化学篇

· 剑桥ECAA经济数学 · 美国计算机奥赛USACO · 生物篇

· 剑桥ECAA批判写作 · 加拿大计算机竞赛CCC · 计算机篇

· 牛剑TSA批判思维 · 全美经济学挑战赛NEC · 经济篇

· 牛剑TSA问题解决 · 国际经济奥林匹克IEO

· 牛剑TSA批判写作

优易国际教育

[Link]

扫码关注获取更多资源
13691095140
Table of Contents
STEP 3 1987 STEP 3 2005

STEP 3 1988 STEP 3 2006

STEP 3 1989 STEP 3 2007

STEP 3 1990 STEP 3 2008

STEP 3 1991 STEP 3 2009

STEP 3 1992 STEP 3 2010

STEP 3 1993 STEP 3 2011

STEP 3 1994 STEP 3 2012

STEP 3 1995 STEP 3 2013

STEP 3 1996 STEP 3 2014

STEP 3 1997 STEP 3 2015

STEP 3 1998 STEP 3 2016

STEP 3 1999 STEP 3 2017

STEP 3 2000 STEP 3 2018

STEP 3 2001 STEP 3 2019

STEP 3 2002 STEP 3 2020

STEP 3 2003 STEP 3 2021

STEP 3 2004
STEP 3 1987
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1987
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1987 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q1]
Find the set of positive integers 𝑛𝑛 for which 𝑛𝑛 does not divide (𝑛𝑛 − 1)!. Justify your answer.
[Note that small values of 𝑛𝑛 may require special consideration.]

[STEP 3, 1987Q2]
Let 𝐼𝐼𝑚𝑚,𝑛𝑛 = ∫ cos𝑚𝑚 𝑥𝑥 sin 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥, where 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑛𝑛 are non-negative integers. Prove that for 𝑚𝑚, 𝑛𝑛 ≥
1,
(𝑚𝑚 + 𝑛𝑛)𝐼𝐼𝑚𝑚,𝑛𝑛 = − cos𝑚𝑚 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝑚𝑚𝐼𝐼𝑚𝑚−1,𝑛𝑛−1 .
π
(i) Show that ∫0 cos𝑚𝑚 𝑥𝑥 sin 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥 = 0 whenever 𝑚𝑚, 𝑛𝑛 are both even or both odd.
1
π
(ii) Evaluate ∫02 sin2 𝑥𝑥 sin 3𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥.

[STEP 3, 1987Q3]
(i) If 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝐢𝐢𝑦𝑦, with 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 real, show that
|𝑥𝑥| cos 𝛼𝛼 + |𝑦𝑦| sin 𝛼𝛼 ≤ |𝑧𝑧| ≤ |𝑥𝑥| + |𝑦𝑦|
for all real 𝛼𝛼.
(ii) By considering (5 − 𝐢𝐢)4 (1 + 𝐢𝐢), show that
1987
1 1 1
π = 4 tan−1 � � − tan−1 � �. [Link]

4 5 239 2
Prove similarly that
1 1 1 1
π = 3 tan−1 � � + tan−1 � � + tan−1 � �.
4 4 20 1985

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1987

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q4]

Two funnels 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 have surfaces formed by rotating the curves 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 2 and 𝑦𝑦 = 2 sinh−1 𝑥𝑥
(𝑥𝑥 > 0) about the 𝑦𝑦-axis. The bottom of 𝐵𝐵 is one unit lower than the bottom of 𝐴𝐴 and they are
connected by a thin rubber tube with a tap in it. The tap is closed and 𝐴𝐴 is filled with water to
a depth of 4 units. The tap is then opened. When the water comes to rest, both surfaces are at
a height ℎ above the bottom of 𝐵𝐵, as shown in the diagram. Show that ℎ satisfies the equation
ℎ2 − 3ℎ + sinh ℎ = 15.

1987
[STEP 3, 1987Q5] [Link]

3
A secret message consists of the numbers 1, 3, 7, 23, 24, 37, 39, 43, 43, 43, 45, 47 arranged in
some order as 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , … , 𝑎𝑎12 . The message is encoded as 𝑏𝑏1 , 𝑏𝑏2 , … , 𝑏𝑏12, with 0 ≤ 𝑏𝑏𝑗𝑗 ≤ 49 and

𝑏𝑏2𝑗𝑗 ≡ 𝑎𝑎2𝑗𝑗 + 𝑛𝑛0 + 𝑗𝑗 (mod 50),

𝑏𝑏2𝑗𝑗+1 ≡ 𝑎𝑎2𝑗𝑗+1 + 𝑛𝑛1 + 𝑗𝑗 (mod 50),

for some integers 𝑛𝑛0 and 𝑛𝑛1 . If the coded message is 35, 27, 2, 36, 15, 35, 8, 40, 40, 37, 24, 48,
find the original message, explaining your method carefully.

[STEP 3, 1987Q6]
The functions 𝑥𝑥(𝑡𝑡) and 𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡) satisfy the simultaneous differential equations
d𝑥𝑥
+ 2𝑥𝑥 − 5𝑦𝑦 = 0,
d𝑡𝑡
d𝑦𝑦
+ 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 2𝑦𝑦 = 2 cos 𝑡𝑡,
d𝑡𝑡
d𝑦𝑦
subject to 𝑥𝑥 = 0, = 0 at 𝑡𝑡 = 0.
d𝑡𝑡

Solve these equations for 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 in the case when 𝑎𝑎 = 1.

Without solving the equations explicitly, state briefly how the form of the solutions for 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦
if 𝑎𝑎 > 1 would differ from the form when 𝑎𝑎 = 1.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1987 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q7]
Prove that
𝑡𝑡 3 𝑡𝑡 5 (−1)𝑛𝑛 𝑡𝑡 2𝑛𝑛+1 𝑡𝑡 2𝑛𝑛+2
𝑥𝑥
tan−1 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑡𝑡 − + −⋯+ + (−1)𝑛𝑛+1 � d𝑥𝑥.
3 5 2𝑛𝑛 + 1 0 1 + 𝑥𝑥 2
Hence show that, if 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 1, then
𝑛𝑛
𝑡𝑡 2𝑛𝑛+3 (−1)𝑟𝑟 𝑡𝑡 2𝑟𝑟+1 𝑡𝑡 2𝑛𝑛+3
≤ �tan−1 𝑡𝑡 − � �≤ .
2(2𝑛𝑛 + 3) 2𝑟𝑟 + 1 2𝑛𝑛 + 3
𝑟𝑟=0

Show that, as 𝑛𝑛 → ∞,
𝑛𝑛
(−1)𝑟𝑟
4� → π,
2𝑟𝑟 + 1
𝑟𝑟=0
(−1)𝑟𝑟
but that the error in approximating π by 4 ∑𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟=0 is at least 10−2 if 𝑛𝑛 is less than or equal to
2𝑟𝑟+1
98.

[STEP 3, 1987Q8]
Show that, if the lengths of the diagonals of a parallelogram are specified, then the
parallelogram has maximum area when the diagonals are perpendicular. Show also that the
area of a parallelogram is less than or equal to half the square of the length of its longer diagonal.
1987
The set 𝐴𝐴 of points (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) is given by [Link]

|𝑎𝑎1 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏1 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑐𝑐1 | ≤ 𝛿𝛿, 4

|𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏2 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑐𝑐2 | ≤ 𝛿𝛿,

with 𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏2 ≠ 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏1 . Sketch this set and show that it is possible to find (𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑦𝑦1 ), (𝑥𝑥2 , 𝑦𝑦2 ) ∈ 𝐴𝐴 with
8δ2
(𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑥𝑥2 )2 + (𝑦𝑦1 − 𝑦𝑦2 )2 ≥ .
|𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏2 − 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏1 |

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1987

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q9]
Let (𝐺𝐺, ∗) and (𝐻𝐻, ∘) be two groups and 𝐺𝐺 × 𝐻𝐻 the set of ordered pairs (𝑔𝑔, ℎ) with 𝑔𝑔 ∈ 𝐺𝐺 and
ℎ ∈ 𝐻𝐻. A multiplication on 𝐺𝐺 × 𝐻𝐻 is defined by
(𝑔𝑔1 , ℎ1 )(𝑔𝑔2 , ℎ2 ) = (𝑔𝑔1 ∗ 𝑔𝑔2 , ℎ1 ∘ ℎ2 )
for all 𝑔𝑔1 , 𝑔𝑔2 ∈ 𝐺𝐺 and ℎ1 , ℎ2 ∈ 𝐻𝐻.
Show that, with this multiplication, 𝐺𝐺 × 𝐻𝐻 is a group.
State whether the following are true or false and prove your answers.
(i) 𝐺𝐺 × 𝐻𝐻 is abelian if and only if both 𝐺𝐺 and 𝐻𝐻 are abelian.
(ii) 𝐺𝐺 × 𝐻𝐻 contains a subgroup isomorphic to 𝐺𝐺.
(iii) ℤ1 × ℤ2 is isomorphic to ℤ4 .
(iv) 𝑆𝑆2 × 𝑆𝑆3 is isomorphic to 𝑆𝑆6 .
[ℤ𝑛𝑛 is the cyclic group of order 𝑛𝑛, and 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is the permutation group on 𝑛𝑛 objects.]

[STEP 3, 1987Q10]
The Bernoulli polynomials 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥), where 𝑛𝑛 is a non-negative integer, are defined by 𝑃𝑃0 (𝑥𝑥) = 1
and, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,
1
d𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛
= 𝑛𝑛𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛−1 (𝑥𝑥), � 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥 0 1987
[Link]

Show, by using induction or otherwise, that 5

𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥 + 1) − 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑛𝑛𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−1 , for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.

Deduce that
𝑘𝑘

𝑛𝑛 � 𝑚𝑚𝑛𝑛−1 = 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑘𝑘 + 1) − 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (0).

𝑚𝑚=0

Hence show that ∑1000 3 2

𝑚𝑚=0 𝑚𝑚 = (500 500) .

STEP 3 Past Paper 1987 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q11]
A woman stands in a field at a distance of 𝑎𝑎 m from the straight bank of a river which flows
with negligible speed. She sees her frightened child clinging to a tree stump standing in the
river 𝑏𝑏 m downstream from where she stands and 𝑐𝑐 m from the bank. She runs at a speed of 𝑢𝑢
m s-1 and swims at 𝑣𝑣 m s-1 in straight lines. Find an equation to be satisfied by 𝑥𝑥, where 𝑥𝑥 m is
the distance upstream from the stump at which she should enter the river if she is to reach the
child in the shortest possible time.
Suppose now that the river flows with speed 𝑣𝑣 m s-1 and the stump remains fixed. Show that,
in this case, 𝑥𝑥 must satisfy the equation
1
2𝑣𝑣𝑥𝑥 2 (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑥𝑥) = 𝑢𝑢(𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑐𝑐 2 )[𝑎𝑎2 + (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑥𝑥)2 ]2 .
For this second case, draw sketches of the woman's path for the three possibilities 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑐𝑐, 𝑏𝑏 = 𝑐𝑐
and 𝑏𝑏 < 𝑐𝑐.

[STEP 3, 1987Q12]
A firework consists of a uniform rod of mass 𝑀𝑀 and length 2𝑎𝑎, pivoted smoothly at one end so
that it can rotate in a fixed horizontal plane, and a rocket attached to the other end. The rocket
is a uniform rod of mass 𝑚𝑚(𝑡𝑡) and length 2𝑙𝑙(𝑡𝑡) , with 𝑚𝑚(𝑡𝑡) = 2𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼(𝑡𝑡) and 𝛼𝛼 constant. lt is
attached to the rod by its front end and it lies at right angles to the rod in the rod's plane of
d𝑚𝑚
rotation. The rocket burns fuel in such a way that = −𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼, with 𝛽𝛽 constant. The burnt fuel is
d𝑡𝑡
ejected from the back of the rocket, with speed 𝑢𝑢 and directly backwards relative to the rocket.
1987
Show that, until the fuel is exhausted, the firework's angular velocity 𝜔𝜔 at time 𝑡𝑡 satisfies [Link]
6
d𝜔𝜔 3𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼
= .
d𝑡𝑡 2[𝑀𝑀𝑎𝑎 + 2𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼{3𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑙𝑙 2 }]
2

[STEP 3, 1987Q13]
A uniform rod, of mass 3𝑚𝑚 and length 2𝑎𝑎, is freely hinged at one end and held by the other end
in a horizontal position. A rough particle, of mass 𝑚𝑚, is placed on the rod at its mid-point. If the
free end is then released, prove that, until the particle begins to slide on the rod, the inclination
𝜃𝜃 of the rod to the horizontal satisfies the equation
5𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 = 8𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃.
1
The coefficient of friction between the particle and the rod is . Show that, when the particle
2
1
begins to slide, tan 𝜃𝜃 = .
26

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1987

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q14]
It is given that the gravitational force between a disc, of radius 𝑎𝑎, thickness 𝛿𝛿𝛿𝛿 and uniform
density 𝜌𝜌, and a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 at a distance 𝑏𝑏 (≥ 0) from the disc on its axis is

𝑏𝑏
2π𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �1 − 1 �,
(𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 )2

where 𝑘𝑘 is a constant. Show that the gravitational force on a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 at the surface
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
of a uniform sphere of mass 𝑀𝑀 and radius 𝑟𝑟 is . Deduce that in a spherical cloud of particles
𝑟𝑟 2
of uniform density, which all attract one another gravitationally, the radius 𝑟𝑟 and inward
d𝑟𝑟
velocity 𝑣𝑣 (= − ) of a particle at the surface satisfy the equation
d𝑡𝑡

d𝑣𝑣 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑣𝑣 =− 2 ,
d𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟
where 𝑀𝑀 is the mass of the cloud.
At time 𝑡𝑡 = 0, the cloud is instantaneously at rest and has radius 𝑅𝑅. Show that 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑅𝑅 cos2 𝛼𝛼
after a time
1
𝑅𝑅 3 2 1
� � �𝛼𝛼 + sin 2𝛼𝛼�.
2𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 2

[STEP 3, 1987Q15] 1987

[Link]

A patient arrives with blue thumbs at the doctor's surgery. With probability 𝑝𝑝 the patient 7is
suffering from Fenland fever and requires treatment costing £100. With probability 1 − 𝑝𝑝 he
is suffering only from Steppe syndrome and will get better anyway. A test exists which infallibly
gives positive results if the patient is suffering from Fenland fever but also has probability 𝑞𝑞 of
giving positive results if the patient is not. The test costs £10. The doctor decides to proceed as
follows. She will give the test repeatedly until either the last test is negative, in which case she
dismisses the patient with kind words, or she has given the test 𝑛𝑛 times with positive results
each time, in which case she gives the treatment. In the case 𝑛𝑛 = 0, she treats the patient at
once. She wishes to minimise the expected cost £𝐸𝐸𝑛𝑛 , to the National Health Service.
(i) Show that
𝐸𝐸𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝐸𝐸𝑛𝑛 = 10𝑝𝑝 − 10(1 − 𝑝𝑝)𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛 (9 − 10𝑞𝑞),
and deduce that if 𝑝𝑝 = 10−4, 𝑞𝑞 = 10−2, she should choose 𝑛𝑛 = 3.
(ii) Show that if 𝑞𝑞 is larger than some fixed value 𝑞𝑞0 , to be determined explicitly, then,
whatever the value of 𝑝𝑝, she should choose 𝑛𝑛 = 0.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1987 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1987Q16]
(i) 𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2 , … , 𝑋𝑋𝑛𝑛 are independent identically distributed random variables drawn from a
uniform distribution on [0, 1] The random variables 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are defined by
𝐴𝐴 = min(𝑋𝑋1 , … , 𝑋𝑋𝑛𝑛 ), 𝐵𝐵 = max(𝑋𝑋1 , … , 𝑋𝑋𝑛𝑛 ).
1
For any fixed 𝑘𝑘, such that 0 < 𝑘𝑘 < , let
2

𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 = P(𝐴𝐴 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 and 𝐵𝐵 ≥ 1 − 𝑘𝑘).

What happens to 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 as 𝑛𝑛 → ∞? Comment briefly on this result.
(ii) Lord Copper, the celebrated and imperious newspaper proprietor, has decided to run a
lottery in which each of the 4 000 000 readers of his newspaper will have an equal
probability 𝑝𝑝 of winning £1 000 000 and their chances of winning will be independent. He
has fixed all the details leaving to you, his subordinate, only the task of choosing 𝑝𝑝. If
nobody wins £1 000 000, you will be sacked, and if more than two readers win £1 000 000,
you will also be sacked. Explaining your reasoning, show that however you choose 𝑝𝑝, you
will have less than a 60% chance of keeping your job.

1987
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1987

STEP 3 1988
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1988
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1988 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q1]
Sketch the graph of
𝑥𝑥 2 e−𝑥𝑥
𝑦𝑦 = ,
1 + 𝑥𝑥
for −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞.
Show that the value of
∞
𝑥𝑥 2 e−𝑥𝑥
� d𝑥𝑥
0 1 + 𝑥𝑥
lies between 0 and 1.

[STEP 3, 1988Q2]
The real numbers 𝑢𝑢0 , 𝑢𝑢1 , 𝑢𝑢2 , … satisfy the difference equation
𝑎𝑎𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1 + 𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 = 0 (𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, … ),
where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are real numbers such that the quadratic equation
𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0
has two distinct real roots 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽. Show that the above difference equation is satisfied by the
numbers 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 defined by
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 = 𝐴𝐴𝛼𝛼 𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵𝛽𝛽 𝑛𝑛 , 1988
[Link]
where 2
𝑢𝑢1 − 𝛽𝛽𝑢𝑢0 𝑢𝑢1 − 𝛼𝛼𝑢𝑢0
𝐴𝐴 = and 𝐵𝐵 = .
𝛼𝛼 − 𝛽𝛽 𝛽𝛽 − 𝛼𝛼
Show also, by induction, that these numbers provide the only solution.
Find the numbers 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 (𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, …) which satisfy
8(𝑛𝑛 + 2)(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛+2 − 2(𝑛𝑛 + 3)(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛+1 − (𝑛𝑛 + 3)(𝑛𝑛 + 2)𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 = 0
with 𝑣𝑣0 = 0 and 𝑣𝑣1 = 1.

[STEP 3, 1988Q3]
Give a parametric form for the curve in the Argand diagram determined by |𝑧𝑧 − 𝐢𝐢| = 2.
𝑧𝑧+𝐢𝐢
Let 𝑤𝑤 = . Find and sketch the locus, in the Argand diagram, of the point which represents
𝑧𝑧−𝐢𝐢
the complex number 𝑤𝑤 when
(i) |𝑧𝑧 − 𝐢𝐢| = 2.
(ii) 𝑧𝑧 is real.
(iii) 𝑧𝑧 is imaginary.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1988

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q4]
A kingdom consists of a vast plane with a central parabolic hill. In a vertical cross-section
through the centre of the hill, with the 𝑥𝑥-axis horizontal and the 𝑧𝑧-axis vertical, the surface of
the plane and hill is given by
1 2
(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥 2 ) for |𝑥𝑥| ≤ 𝑎𝑎,
𝑧𝑧 = �2𝑎𝑎
0 for |𝑥𝑥| > 𝑎𝑎.
The whole surface is formed by rotating this cross-section about the 𝑧𝑧-axis. In the (𝑥𝑥, 𝑧𝑧) plane
through the centre of the hill, the king has a summer residence at (−𝑅𝑅, 0) and a winter
residence at (𝑅𝑅, 0), where 𝑅𝑅 > 𝑎𝑎 . He wishes to connect them by a road, consisting of the
following segments:
𝑎𝑎 2 −𝑏𝑏2
(i) a path in the (𝑥𝑥, 𝑧𝑧) plane joining (−𝑅𝑅, 0) to �−𝑏𝑏, �, where 0 ≤ 𝑏𝑏 ≤ 𝑎𝑎.
2𝑎𝑎

𝑎𝑎 2 −𝑏𝑏2
(ii) a horizontal semicircular path joining the two points �±𝑏𝑏, 2𝑎𝑎
�, if 𝑏𝑏 ≠ 0.

𝑎𝑎 2 −𝑏𝑏2
(iii) a path in the (𝑥𝑥, 𝑧𝑧) plane joining �𝑏𝑏, 2𝑎𝑎
� to (𝑅𝑅, 0).

The king wants the road to be as short as possible. Advise him on his choice of 𝑏𝑏.

[STEP 3, 1988Q5]
A firm of engineers obtains the right to dig and exploit an undersea tunnel. Each day the firm
1988
borrows enough money to pay for the day’s digging, which costs £𝑐𝑐, and to pay the daily [Link]

interest of 100𝑘𝑘% on the sum already borrowed. The tunnel takes 𝑇𝑇 days to build, and, once 3
finished, earns £𝑑𝑑 a day, all of which goes to pay the daily interest and repay the debt until it is
fully paid. The financial transactions take place at the end of each day’s work. Show that 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 , the
total amount borrowed by the end of day 𝑛𝑛, is given by
𝑐𝑐[(1 + 𝑘𝑘)𝑛𝑛 − 1]
𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 =
𝑘𝑘
for 𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑇𝑇.
Given that 𝑆𝑆𝑇𝑇+𝑚𝑚 > 0, where 𝑚𝑚 > 0, express 𝑆𝑆𝑇𝑇+𝑚𝑚 in terms of 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑, 𝑘𝑘, 𝑇𝑇 and 𝑚𝑚.
𝑑𝑑
Show that, if > (1 + 𝑘𝑘)𝑇𝑇 − 1, the firm will eventually pay off the debt.
𝑐𝑐

[STEP 3, 1988Q6]
Let 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = sin 2𝑥𝑥 cos 𝑥𝑥. Find the 1988th derivative of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥).
π
Show that the smallest positive value of 𝑥𝑥 for which this derivative is zero is + ϵ, where ϵ is
3
approximately equal to

3−1989 √3
.
2

STEP 3 Past Paper 1988 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q7]
For 𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, …, the functions 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) satisfy the differential equation
d2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛
− 𝜔𝜔2 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 = −(2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝜔𝜔𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 ,
d𝑥𝑥 2
d𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛
where 𝜔𝜔 is a positive constant, and 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 → 0 and → 0 as 𝑥𝑥 → +∞ and as 𝑥𝑥 → −∞. Verify that
d𝑥𝑥
these conditions are satisfied, for 𝑛𝑛 = 0 and 𝑛𝑛 = 1, by
2 2
𝑦𝑦0 (𝑥𝑥) = e−𝜆𝜆𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦1 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥e−𝜆𝜆𝑥𝑥
for some constant 𝜆𝜆, to be determined.
Show that
d d𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 d𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚
�𝑦𝑦 − 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 � = 2(𝑚𝑚 − 𝑛𝑛)𝜔𝜔𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 ,
d𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
and deduce that, if 𝑚𝑚 ≠ 𝑛𝑛,
∞
� 𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚 (𝑥𝑥)𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 = 0.
−∞

[STEP 3, 1988Q8]
Find the equations of the tangent and normal to the parabola 𝑦𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 at the point (𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎).
For 𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, and 3, let 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 be the point �𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑖2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑖 �, where 𝑡𝑡1 , 𝑡𝑡2 and 𝑡𝑡3 are all distinct. Let 𝐴𝐴11988
be
[Link]
the area of the triangle formed by the tangents at 𝑃𝑃1 , 𝑃𝑃2 and 𝑃𝑃3 , and let 𝐴𝐴2 be the area of the
4
triangle formed by the normals at 𝑃𝑃1 , 𝑃𝑃2 and 𝑃𝑃3 . Using the fact that the area of the triangle with
vertices at (𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑦𝑦1 ), (𝑥𝑥2 , 𝑦𝑦2 ) and (𝑥𝑥3 , 𝑦𝑦3 ) is the absolute value of
𝑥𝑥1 𝑦𝑦1 1
1
det �𝑥𝑥2 𝑦𝑦2 1�,
2 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦3 1
3

show that 𝐴𝐴2 = (𝑡𝑡1 + 𝑡𝑡2 + 𝑡𝑡3 )2 𝐴𝐴1 .

Deduce a necessary and sufficient condition in terms of 𝑡𝑡1 , 𝑡𝑡2 and 𝑡𝑡3 for the normal at 𝑃𝑃1 , 𝑃𝑃2 and
𝑃𝑃3 to be concurrent.

[STEP 3, 1988Q9]
Let 𝐺𝐺 be a finite group with identity 𝑒𝑒. For each element 𝑔𝑔 in 𝐺𝐺, the order of 𝑔𝑔, 𝑜𝑜(𝑔𝑔), is defined
to be the smallest positive integer 𝑛𝑛 for which 𝑔𝑔𝑛𝑛 = 𝑒𝑒.
(i) Show that, if 𝑜𝑜(𝑔𝑔) = 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑔𝑔𝑁𝑁 = 𝑒𝑒, then 𝑛𝑛 divides 𝑁𝑁.
(ii) Let 𝑔𝑔 and ℎ be elements of 𝐺𝐺. Prove that, for any integer 𝑚𝑚,
𝑔𝑔ℎ𝑚𝑚 𝑔𝑔−1 = (𝑔𝑔ℎ𝑔𝑔−1 )𝑚𝑚 .
(iii) Let 𝑔𝑔 and ℎ be elements of 𝐺𝐺 , such that 𝑔𝑔5 = 𝑒𝑒 , ℎ ≠ 𝑒𝑒 and 𝑔𝑔ℎ𝑔𝑔−1 = ℎ2 . Prove that
𝑔𝑔2 ℎ𝑔𝑔−2 = ℎ4 and find 𝑜𝑜(ℎ).

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1988

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q10]
Four greyhounds, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷, are held at positions such that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is a large square. At a
given instant, the dogs are released and 𝐴𝐴 runs directly towards 𝐵𝐵 at constant speed 𝑣𝑣, 𝐵𝐵 runs
directly towards 𝐶𝐶 at constant speed 𝑣𝑣 , and so on. Show that 𝐴𝐴 ’s path is given in polar
coordinates (referred to an origin at the centre of the field and a suitable initial line) by 𝑟𝑟 =
𝜆𝜆e−𝜃𝜃 , where 𝜆𝜆 is a constant.
Generalise this result to the case of 𝑛𝑛 dogs held at the vertices of a regular 𝑛𝑛-gon (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 3).

[STEP 3, 1988Q11]

A uniform ladder of length 𝑙𝑙 and mass 𝑚𝑚 rests with one end in contact with a smooth ramp
π
inclined at an angle of to the vertical. The foot of the ladder rests, on horizontal ground, at a
6 1988
𝑙𝑙
distance 3 from the foot of the ramp, and the coefficient of friction between the ladder [Link]
the
√ 5
π
ground is 𝜇𝜇 . The ladder is inclined at an angle to the horizontal, in the vertical plane
6
containing a line of greatest slope of the ramp. A labourer of mass 𝑚𝑚 intends to climb slowly to
the top of the ladder.
(i) Find the value of 𝜇𝜇 if the ladder slips as soon as the labourer reaches the midpoint.
(ii) Find the minimum value of 𝜇𝜇 which will ensure that the labourer can reach the top of the
ladder.

[STEP 3, 1988Q12]
A smooth billiard ball moving on a smooth horizontal table strikes another identical ball which
is at rest. The coefficient of restitution between the balls is 𝑒𝑒 (< 1). Show that after the collision
1
the angle between the velocities of the balls is less than π.
2

Show also that the maximum angle of deflection of the first ball is
1 + 𝑒𝑒
sin−1 � �.
3 − 𝑒𝑒

STEP 3 Past Paper 1988 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q13]
A goalkeeper stands on the goal-line and kicks the football directly into the wind, at an angle 𝛼𝛼
to the horizontal. The ball has mass 𝑚𝑚 and is kicked with velocity 𝑣𝑣0 . The wind blows
horizontally with constant velocity 𝑤𝑤 and the air resistance on the ball is 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 times its velocity
relative to the wind velocity, where 𝑘𝑘 is a positive constant. Show that the equation of motion
of the ball can be written in the form
d𝑣𝑣
+ 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = 𝑔𝑔 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘,
d𝑡𝑡
where 𝑣𝑣 is the ball’s velocity relative to the ground, and 𝑔𝑔 is the acceleration due to gravity.
By writing down horizontal and vertical equations of motion for the ball, or otherwise, find its
position at time 𝑡𝑡 after it was kicked.
|𝑔𝑔|
On the assumption that the goalkeeper moves out of the way, show that if tan 𝛼𝛼 = 𝑘𝑘|𝑤𝑤|, then the
goalkeeper scores an own goal.

[STEP 3, 1988Q14]
A small heavy bead can slide smoothly in a vertical plane on a fixed wire with equation
𝑥𝑥 2
𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 − ,
4𝑎𝑎
where the 𝑦𝑦-axis points vertically upwards and 𝑎𝑎 is a positive constant. The bead is projected
1988
from the origin with initial speed 𝑉𝑉 along the wire. [Link]

6
(i) Show that for a suitable value of 𝑉𝑉, to be determined, a motion is possible throughout
which the bead exerts no pressure on the wire.
(ii) Show that 𝜃𝜃, the angle between the particle's velocity at time 𝑡𝑡 and the 𝑥𝑥-axis, satisfies
4𝑎𝑎2 𝜃𝜃̇ 2
+ 2𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔(1 − tan2 𝜃𝜃) = 𝑉𝑉 2 .
cos6 𝜃𝜃

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1988

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1988Q15]
Each day, books returned to a library are placed on a shelf in order of arrival, and left there.
When a book arrives for which there is no room on the shelf, that book and all books
subsequently returned are put on a trolley. At the end of each day, the shelf and trolley are
cleared. There are just two-sizes of book: thick, requiring two units of shelf space; and thin,
requiring one unit. The probability that a returned book is thick is 𝑝𝑝, and the probability that it
is thin is 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝. Let 𝑀𝑀(𝑛𝑛) be the expected number of books that will be put on the shelf,
when the length of the shelf is 𝑛𝑛 units and 𝑛𝑛 is an integer, on the assumption that more books
will be returned each day than can be placed on the shelf. Show, giving reasoning, that:
(i) 𝑀𝑀(0) = 0.
(ii) 𝑀𝑀(1) = 𝑞𝑞.
(iii) 𝑀𝑀(𝑛𝑛) − 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞(𝑛𝑛 − 1) − 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝(𝑛𝑛 − 2) = 1, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.
Verify that a possible solution to these equations is
𝑀𝑀(𝑛𝑛) = 𝐴𝐴(−𝑝𝑝)𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶,
where 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are numbers independent of 𝑛𝑛 which you should express in terms of 𝑝𝑝.

[STEP 3, 1988Q16]
Balls are chosen at random without replacement from an urn originally containing 𝑚𝑚 red balls
and 𝑀𝑀 − 𝑚𝑚 green balls. Find the probability that exactly 𝑘𝑘 red balls will be chosen in 𝑛𝑛 choices
(0 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 𝑚𝑚, 0 ≤ 𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑀𝑀). 1988
[Link]

The random variables 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛𝑛) are defined for 𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑀𝑀 by 7

0 if the 𝑖𝑖th ball chosen is green

𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 = �
1 if the 𝑖𝑖th ball chosen is red
Show that
𝑚𝑚
(i) P{𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 = 1} = 𝑀𝑀 ,
𝑚𝑚(𝑚𝑚−1)
(ii) P�𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 = 1 and 𝑋𝑋𝑗𝑗 = 1� = 𝑀𝑀(𝑀𝑀−1)
, for 𝑖𝑖 ≠ 𝑗𝑗.

Find the mean and variance of the random variable 𝑋𝑋 defined by

𝑛𝑛

𝑋𝑋 = � 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 .
𝑖𝑖=1

STEP 3 Past Paper 1988 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1988
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1988

STEP 3 1989
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1989
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1989 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q1]
Prove that the area of the zone of the surface of a sphere between two parallel planes cutting
the sphere is given by
2π × (radius of sphere) × (perpendicular distance between the planes).
A tangent from the origin 𝑂𝑂 to the curve with cartesian equation
(𝑥𝑥 − 𝑐𝑐)2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 𝑎𝑎2 ,
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑐𝑐 are positive constants with 𝑐𝑐 > 𝑎𝑎, touches the curve at 𝑃𝑃. The 𝑥𝑥-axis cuts the
curve at 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅, the points lying in the order 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 on the axis. The line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the arc 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 are
rotated through 2π radians about the line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 to form a surface. Find the area of this surface.

[STEP 3, 1989Q2]
The points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 lie on the surface of the ground, which is an inclined plane. The point 𝐵𝐵
is 100m due north of 𝐴𝐴, and 𝐶𝐶 is 60m due east of 𝐵𝐵. The vertical displacements from 𝐴𝐴 to 𝐵𝐵,
and from 𝐵𝐵 to 𝐶𝐶, are each 5m downwards. A plane coal seam lies below the surface and is to be
located by making vertical bore-holes at 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, and 𝐶𝐶. The bore-holes strike the coal seam at
95m, 45m and 76m below 𝐴𝐴 , 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 repectively. Show that the coal seam is inclined at
4
cos −1 �5� to the horizontal.

The coal seam comes to the surface along a line. Find the bearing of this line.

1989
[Link]
[STEP 3, 1989Q3] 2

The matrix 𝐌𝐌 is given by

2π 2π
cos − sin
𝐌𝐌 = � 𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 �,
2π 2π
sin cos
𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚
where 𝑚𝑚 is an integer greater than 1. Prove that
𝐌𝐌 𝑚𝑚−1 + 𝐌𝐌 𝑚𝑚−2 + ⋯ + 𝐌𝐌 2 + 𝐌𝐌 + 𝐈𝐈 = 𝐎𝐎,
1 0 0 0
where 𝐈𝐈 = � � and 𝐎𝐎 = � �.
0 1 0 0
The sequence 𝐗𝐗 0 , 𝐗𝐗1 , 𝐗𝐗 2 … is defined by
𝐗𝐗 𝑘𝑘+1 = 𝐏𝐏𝐗𝐗 𝑘𝑘 + 𝐐𝐐,
where 𝐏𝐏, 𝐐𝐐 and 𝐗𝐗 0 are given 2 × 2 matrices. Suggest a suitable expression for 𝐗𝐗 𝑘𝑘 in terms of 𝐏𝐏,
𝐐𝐐 and 𝐗𝐗 0 , and justify it by induction.
The binary operation ∗ is defined as follows:
𝐗𝐗 𝑖𝑖 ∗ 𝐗𝐗 𝑖𝑖 is the result of substituting 𝐗𝐗𝑗𝑗 for 𝐗𝐗 0 in the expression for 𝐗𝐗 𝑖𝑖 .

Show that if 𝐏𝐏 = 𝐌𝐌, the set {𝐗𝐗1 , 𝐗𝐗 2 , 𝐗𝐗 3 , … } forms a finite group under the operation ∗.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1989

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q4]
Sketch the curve whose cartesian equation is
2𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 − 5)
𝑦𝑦 = ,
𝑥𝑥 2 − 4
and give the equations of the asymptotes and of the tangent to the curve at the origin.
Hence, or otherwise, determine (giving reasons) the number of real roots of the following
equations:
(i) 4𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 − 5) = (5𝑥𝑥 − 2)(𝑥𝑥 2 − 4).
(ii) 4𝑥𝑥 4 (𝑥𝑥 2 − 5)2 = (𝑥𝑥 2 − 4)2 (𝑥𝑥 2 + 1).
(iii) 4𝑧𝑧 2 (𝑧𝑧 − 5)2 = (𝑧𝑧 − 4)2 (𝑧𝑧 + 1).

[STEP 3, 1989Q5]
Given that 𝑦𝑦 = cosh(𝑛𝑛 cosh−1 𝑥𝑥), for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 1, prove that
1 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
𝑦𝑦 = ��𝑥𝑥 + �𝑥𝑥 2 − 1� + �𝑥𝑥 − �𝑥𝑥 2 − 1� �.
2
Explain why, when 𝑛𝑛 = 2𝑘𝑘 + 1 and 𝑘𝑘 ∈ ℤ+ , 𝑦𝑦 can also be expressed as the polynomial
𝑎𝑎0 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎1 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 5 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑘𝑘 𝑥𝑥 2𝑘𝑘+1 .
Find 𝑎𝑎0 , and show that: 1989
[Link]
2𝑘𝑘(𝑘𝑘+1)(2𝑘𝑘+1)
(i) 𝑎𝑎1 = (−1)𝑘𝑘−1 . 3
3
2(𝑘𝑘−1)𝑘𝑘(𝑘𝑘+1)(𝑘𝑘+2)(2𝑘𝑘+1)
(ii) 𝑎𝑎2 = (−1)𝑘𝑘 15
.

Find also the value of ∑𝑘𝑘𝑟𝑟=0 𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 .

[STEP 3, 1989Q6]
Show that, for a given constant 𝛾𝛾 (sin 𝛾𝛾 ≠ 0) and with suitable choice of the constants 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵,
the line with cartesian equation 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 1 has polar equation
1
= 𝐴𝐴 cos 𝜃𝜃 + 𝐵𝐵 cos(𝜃𝜃 − 𝛾𝛾).
𝑟𝑟
The distinct points 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 on the conic with polar equation
𝑎𝑎
= 1 + e cos 𝜃𝜃
𝑟𝑟
correspond to 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛾𝛾 − 𝛿𝛿 and 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛾𝛾 + 𝛿𝛿 respectively, and cos 𝛿𝛿 ≠ 0. Obtain the polar equation
of the chord 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃. Hence, or otherwise, obtain the equation of the tangent at the point where 𝜃𝜃 =
𝛾𝛾.
The tangents at 𝐿𝐿 and 𝑀𝑀 to a conic with focus 𝑆𝑆 meet at 𝑇𝑇. Show that 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 bisects the angle 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
and find the position of the intersection of 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 and 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 in terms of your chosen parameters for
𝐿𝐿 and 𝑀𝑀.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1989 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q7]
The linear transformation 𝑇𝑇 is a shear which transforms a point 𝑃𝑃 to the point 𝑃𝑃′ defined by:
��⃗ makes an acute non-zero angle 𝛼𝛼 (anticlockwise) with the 𝑥𝑥-axis,
(i) 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃′
(ii) ∠𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃′ is clockwise (i.e. the rotation from 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 to 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂′ clockwise is less than π),
(iii) 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃′ = 𝑘𝑘 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, where 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is the perpendicular onto the line 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 tan 𝛼𝛼, where 𝑘𝑘 is a
given non-zero constant.
𝑥𝑥′
If 𝑇𝑇 is represented in matrix form by �𝑦𝑦′ � = 𝐌𝐌 �𝑦𝑦𝑥𝑥 �, show that

𝑘𝑘 cos2 𝛼𝛼
𝐌𝐌 = �1 − 𝑘𝑘 sin 𝛼𝛼2 cos 𝛼𝛼 �.
−𝑘𝑘 sin 𝛼𝛼
1 + 𝑘𝑘 sin 𝛼𝛼 cos 𝛼𝛼
𝑝𝑝 𝑞𝑞
Show that the necessary and sufficient condition for � � to commute with 𝐌𝐌 is
𝑟𝑟 𝑡𝑡
𝑡𝑡 − 𝑝𝑝 = 2𝑞𝑞 tan 𝛼𝛼 = −2𝑟𝑟 cot 𝛼𝛼.

[STEP 3, 1989Q8]
Given that
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑦𝑦
= 4(𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦) and = 𝑥𝑥 − 12(e2𝑡𝑡 + e−2𝑡𝑡 ),
d𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡
obtain a differential equation for 𝑥𝑥 which does not contain 𝑦𝑦. Hence, or otherwise, find 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦
in terms of 𝑡𝑡 given that 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑦𝑦 = 0 when 𝑡𝑡 = 0. 1989
[Link]

[STEP 3, 1989Q9]
Obtain the sum to infinity of each of the following series.
2 3 4 𝑟𝑟
(i) 1 + + + + ⋯+ + ⋯.
2 22 23 2𝑟𝑟−1
1 1 1 1 1 1
(ii) 1 + × + × + ⋯+ × + ⋯.
2 2 3 22 𝑟𝑟 2𝑟𝑟−1
1×3 1 1×3×5 1 1×3×⋯×(2𝑘𝑘−1) 1
(iii) × + × 2 + ⋯+ × + ⋯.
2! 3 3! 3 𝑘𝑘! 3𝑘𝑘−1

[Questions of convergence need not be considered.]

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1989

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q10]
(i) Prove that
𝑛𝑛
1
� 𝑟𝑟(𝑟𝑟 + 1)(𝑟𝑟 + 2)(𝑟𝑟 + 3)(𝑟𝑟 + 4) = 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1)(𝑛𝑛 + 2)(𝑛𝑛 + 3)(𝑛𝑛 + 4)(𝑛𝑛 + 5)
6
𝑟𝑟=1

and deduce that

𝑛𝑛
1
� 𝑟𝑟 5 < 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1)(𝑛𝑛 + 2)(𝑛𝑛 + 3)(𝑛𝑛 + 4)(𝑛𝑛 + 5).
6
𝑟𝑟=1

(ii) Prove that, if 𝑛𝑛 > 1,

𝑛𝑛−1
1
� 𝑟𝑟 5 > (𝑛𝑛 − 5)(𝑛𝑛 − 4)(𝑛𝑛 − 3)(𝑛𝑛 − 2)(𝑛𝑛 − 1) 𝑛𝑛.
6
𝑟𝑟=0

(iii) Let 𝑓𝑓 be an increasing function. If the limits

𝑛𝑛−1 𝑛𝑛
𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
lim � 𝑓𝑓 � � and lim � 𝑓𝑓 � �
𝑛𝑛→∞ 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛→∞ 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
𝑟𝑟=0 𝑟𝑟=1
𝑎𝑎
both exist and are equal, the definite integral ∫0 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 is defined to be their common
value. Using this definition, prove that
𝑎𝑎
𝑎𝑎6
� 𝑥𝑥 5 d𝑥𝑥 = .
0 6 1989
[Link]

[STEP 3, 1989Q11]
A smooth uniform sphere, with centre 𝐴𝐴, radius 2𝑎𝑎 and mass 3𝑚𝑚, is suspended from a fixed
point 𝑂𝑂 by means of a light inextensible string, of length 3𝑎𝑎, attached to its surface at 𝐶𝐶. A
second smooth uniform sphere, with centre 𝐵𝐵, radius 3𝑎𝑎 and mass 25𝑚𝑚, is held with its surface
touching 𝑂𝑂 and with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 horizontal. The second sphere is released from rest, falls and strikes
3
the first sphere. The coefficient of restitution between the spheres is . Find the speed 𝑈𝑈 of 𝐴𝐴
4
immediately after the impact in terms of the speed 𝑉𝑉 of 𝐵𝐵 immediately before impact.
The same system is now set up with a light rigid rod replacing the string and rigidly attached
to the sphere so that 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is a straight line. The rod can turn freely about 𝑂𝑂. The sphere with
125𝑈𝑈
centre 𝐵𝐵 is dropped as before. Show that the speed of 𝐴𝐴 immediately after impact is .
127

STEP 3 Past Paper 1989 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q12]
A smooth horizontal plane rotates with constant angular velocity Ω about a fixed vertical axis
through a fixed point 𝑂𝑂 of the plane. The point 𝐴𝐴 is fixed in the plane and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 𝑎𝑎. A particle 𝑃𝑃
lies on the plane and is joined to 𝐴𝐴 by a light rod of length 𝑏𝑏 (𝑏𝑏 < 𝑎𝑎) freely pivoted at 𝐴𝐴. Initially
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is a straight line and 𝑃𝑃 is moving with speed �𝑎𝑎 + 2√𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎�Ω perpendicular to 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 in the
same sense as Ω. At time 𝑡𝑡, 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 makes an angle 𝜙𝜙 with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 produced. Obtain an expression for
d2 𝜙𝜙
the component of the acceleration of 𝑃𝑃 perpendicular to 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 in terms of d𝑡𝑡 2
, 𝜙𝜙, 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and Ω.
d𝜙𝜙
Hence find , in terms of 𝜙𝜙, 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and Ω, and show that 𝑃𝑃 never crosses 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂.
d𝑡𝑡

[STEP 3, 1989Q13]
The points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶, 𝐷𝐷 and 𝐸𝐸 lie on a thin smooth horizontal table and are equally spaced on a
circle with centre 𝑂𝑂 and radius 𝑎𝑎. At each of these points there is a small smooth hole in the
table. Five elastic strings are threaded through the holes, one end of each being attached at 𝑂𝑂
under the table and the other end of each being attached to a particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 on top of the
table. Each of the strings has natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆. If 𝑃𝑃 is displaced from
𝑂𝑂 to any point 𝐹𝐹 on the table and released from rest, show that 𝑃𝑃 moves with simple harmonic
motion of period 𝑇𝑇, where
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇 = 2π� .
5𝜆𝜆
The string 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is replaced by one of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘. 𝑃𝑃 is displaced along1989
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
[Link]
from its equilibrium position and released. Show that 𝑃𝑃 still moves in a straight line with
6
𝑇𝑇
simple harmonic motion, and, given that the period is 2, find 𝑘𝑘.

[STEP 3, 1989Q14]
(i) A solid circular disc has radius 𝑎𝑎 and mass 𝑚𝑚. The density is proportional to the distance
from the centre 𝑂𝑂. Show that the moment of inertia about an axis through 𝑂𝑂 perpendicular
3
to the plane of the disc is 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎2 .
5

(ii) A light inelastic string has one end fixed at 𝐴𝐴. It passes under and supports a smooth pulley
𝐵𝐵 of mass 𝑚𝑚. It then passe over a rough pulley 𝐶𝐶 which is a disc of the type described in (i),
free to turn about its axis which is fixed and horizontal. The string carries a particle 𝐷𝐷 of
mass 𝑀𝑀 at its other end. The sections of the string which are not in contact with the pulleys
are vertical. The system is released from rest and moves under gravity for 𝑡𝑡 seconds. At
the end of this interval the pulley 𝐵𝐵 is suddenly stopped. Given that 𝑚𝑚 < 2𝑀𝑀, find the
resulting impulse on 𝐷𝐷 in terms of 𝑚𝑚, 𝑀𝑀, 𝑔𝑔 and 𝑡𝑡.
[You may assume that the string is long enough for there to be no collisions between the
elements of the system, and that the pulley 𝐶𝐶 is rough enough to prevent slipping
throughout.]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1989

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1989Q15]
The continuous random variable 𝑋𝑋 is uniformly distributed over the interval [−𝑐𝑐, 𝑐𝑐]. Write
down expressions for the probabilities that:
(i) 𝑛𝑛 independently selected values of 𝑋𝑋 are all greater than 𝑘𝑘,
(ii) 𝑛𝑛 independently selected values of 𝑋𝑋 are all less than 𝑘𝑘,
where 𝑘𝑘 lies in [−𝑐𝑐, 𝑐𝑐].
A sample of 2𝑛𝑛 + 1 values of 𝑋𝑋 is selected at random and 𝑍𝑍 is the median of the sample. Show
that 𝑍𝑍 is distributed over [−𝑐𝑐, 𝑐𝑐] with probability density function
(2𝑛𝑛 + 1)!
(𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑧𝑧 2 )𝑛𝑛 .
(𝑛𝑛!)2 (2𝑐𝑐)2𝑛𝑛+1
𝑐𝑐
Deduce the value of ∫−𝑐𝑐(𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑧𝑧 2 )𝑛𝑛 d𝑧𝑧.

Evaluate E(𝑍𝑍) and Var(𝑍𝑍).

[STEP 3, 1989Q16]
It is believed that the population of Ruritania can be described as follows:
(i) 25% are fair-haired and the rest are dark-haired.
(ii) 20% are green-eyed and the rest hazel-eyed.
(iii) the population can also be divided into narrow-headed and broad-headed. 1989
[Link]

(iv) no narrow-headed person has green eyes and fair hair. 7

(v) those who are green-eyed are as likely to be narrow-headed as broad-headed.

(vi) those who are green-eyed and broad-headed are as likely to be fair-haired as dark-
haired.
(vii)half the population is broad-headed and dark-haired.
(viii)a hazel-eyed person is as likely to be fair-haired and broad-headed as dark-haired
and narrow-headed.
Find the proportion believed to be narrow-headed.
I am acquainted with only six Ruritanians, all of whom are broad-headed. Comment on this
observation as evidence for or against the given model.
A random sample of 200 Ruritanians is taken and is found to contain 50 narrow-heads. On the
basis of the given model, calculate (to a reasonable approximation) the probability of getting
50 or fewer narrow-heads. Comment on the result.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1989 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1989
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1989

STEP 3 1990
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1990
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1990 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1990Q1]
Show, using de Moivre’s Theorem, or otherwise, that
𝑡𝑡(𝑡𝑡 2 − 3)(𝑡𝑡 6 − 33𝑡𝑡 4 + 27𝑡𝑡 2 − 3)
tan 9𝜃𝜃 = ,
(3𝑡𝑡 2 − 1)(3𝑡𝑡 6 − 27𝑡𝑡 4 + 33𝑡𝑡 2 − 1)
where 𝑡𝑡 = tan 𝜃𝜃.
By considering the equation tan 9𝜃𝜃 = 0, or otherwise, obtain a cubic equation with integer
coefficients whose roots are
π 2π 4π
tan2 � � , tan2 � � and tan2 � �.
9 9 9
Deduce the value of
π 2π 4π
tan � � tan � � tan � �.
9 9 9
Show that
π 2π 4π
tan6 � � + tan6 � � + tan6 � � = 33273.
9 9 9

[STEP 3, 1990Q2]
The distinct points 𝑂𝑂(0, 0, 0), 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎3 , 𝑎𝑎2 , 𝑎𝑎), 𝐵𝐵(𝑏𝑏 3 , 𝑏𝑏 2 , 𝑏𝑏) and 𝐶𝐶(𝑐𝑐 3 , 𝑐𝑐 2 , 𝑐𝑐) lie in three-dimensional
space.
1990
[Link]
(i) Prove that the lines 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 do not intersect.
2
� can take any value in the interval
(ii) Given that 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 can vary with 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 1, show that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
π
� < , but no others.
0 < 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
2

[STEP 3, 1990Q3]
The elements 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 belong to the group 𝒢𝒢 with binary operation ∗. Show that
(i) if 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑎𝑎 ∗ 𝑏𝑏 are of order 2, then 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 commute.
(ii) 𝑐𝑐 ∗ 𝑑𝑑 and 𝑑𝑑 ∗ 𝑐𝑐 have the same order.
𝑛𝑛
(iii) if 𝑐𝑐 −1 ∗ 𝑏𝑏 ∗ 𝑐𝑐 = 𝑏𝑏 𝑟𝑟 , then 𝑐𝑐 −1 ∗ 𝑏𝑏 𝑠𝑠 ∗ 𝑐𝑐 = 𝑏𝑏 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 and 𝑐𝑐 −𝑛𝑛 ∗ 𝑏𝑏 𝑠𝑠 ∗ 𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛 = 𝑏𝑏 𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟 .

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1990

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1990Q4]
Given that sin 𝛽𝛽 ≠ 0, sum the series
cos 𝛼𝛼 + cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝛽𝛽) + ⋯ + cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) + ⋯ + cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛)
and
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
cos 𝛼𝛼 + � � cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝛽𝛽) + ⋯ + � � cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) + ⋯ + cos(𝛼𝛼 + 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛).
1 𝑟𝑟
Given that sin 𝜃𝜃 ≠ 0. Prove that
sin(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝜃𝜃 sec 𝑛𝑛 𝜃𝜃
1 + cos 𝜃𝜃 sec 𝜃𝜃 + cos 2𝜃𝜃 sec 2 𝜃𝜃 + ⋯ + cos 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 sec 𝑟𝑟 𝜃𝜃 + ⋯ + cos 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 sec 𝑛𝑛 𝜃𝜃 = .
sin 𝜃𝜃

[STEP 3, 1990Q5]
Prove that, for any integers 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑟𝑟, with 1 ≤ 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 𝑛𝑛,
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 + 1
� �+� �=� �.
𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟 − 1 𝑟𝑟
Hence or otherwise, prove that
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
(𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢)𝑛𝑛 = 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 𝑣𝑣 + � � 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 𝑣𝑣 1 + � � 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−2 𝑣𝑣 2 + ⋯ + 𝑢𝑢𝑣𝑣 𝑛𝑛 ,
1 2
d𝑟𝑟 𝑧𝑧
where 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 are functions of 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑧𝑧 𝑟𝑟 means .
d𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟

Prove that, if 𝑦𝑦 = sin−1 𝑥𝑥, then (1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+2 − (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝑛𝑛2 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 = 0. 1990
[Link]

[STEP 3, 1990Q6]

The transformation 𝑇𝑇 from �𝑦𝑦𝑥𝑥 � to �𝑋𝑋𝑌𝑌� is given by

𝑋𝑋 2 9 −2 𝑥𝑥
� �= � � �𝑦𝑦�.
𝑌𝑌 5 −2 6
Show that 𝑇𝑇 leaves the vector �12� unchanged in direction but multiplied by a scalar, and that
2
�−1 � is similarly transformed.

The circle 𝐶𝐶 whose equation is 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 1 transforms under 𝑇𝑇 to a curve 𝐸𝐸. Show that 𝐸𝐸 has
equation
8𝑋𝑋 2 + 12𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋 + 17𝑌𝑌 2 = 80,
and state the area of the region bounded by 𝐸𝐸. Show also that the greatest value of 𝑋𝑋 on 𝐸𝐸 is
17
2� .
5

3 4
Find the equation of the tangent to 𝐸𝐸 at the point which corresponds to the point � , � on 𝐶𝐶.
5 5

STEP 3 Past Paper 1990 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1990Q7]
The points 𝑃𝑃(0, 𝑎𝑎), 𝑄𝑄(𝑎𝑎, 0) and 𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎, −𝑎𝑎) lie on the curve 𝐶𝐶 with cartesian equation
𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑎𝑎3 = 0, where 𝑎𝑎 > 0.
At each of 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅, express 𝑦𝑦 as a Taylor series in ℎ, where ℎ is a small increment in 𝑥𝑥, as far
as the term in ℎ2 . Hence, or otherwise, sketch the shape of 𝐶𝐶 near each of these points.
Show that, if (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) lies on 𝐶𝐶, then
4𝑥𝑥 4 − 4𝑎𝑎3 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎4 ≤ 0.
Sketch the graph of 𝑦𝑦 = 4𝑥𝑥 4 − 4𝑎𝑎3 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎4 .
Given that the 𝑦𝑦-axis is an asymptote to 𝐶𝐶, sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶.

[STEP 3, 1990Q8]
Let 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 be functios of 𝑥𝑥. Prove that, for any function 𝑦𝑦 of 𝑥𝑥, the function 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃′′ + 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄′ + 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
d
can be written in the form (𝑝𝑝𝑦𝑦 ′ + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞), where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are finctions of 𝑥𝑥, if and only if 𝑃𝑃′′ −
d𝑥𝑥
𝑄𝑄 ′ + 𝑅𝑅 ≡ 0.
Solve the differential equation
(𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 4 )𝑦𝑦 ′′ + (1 − 7𝑥𝑥 3 )𝑦𝑦 ′ − 9𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 = (𝑥𝑥 3 + 3𝑥𝑥 2 )e𝑥𝑥 ,
given that when 𝑥𝑥 = 2, 𝑦𝑦 = 2e2 and 𝑦𝑦′ = 0.
1990
[Link]

4
[STEP 3, 1990Q9]
π
The real variables 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑢𝑢 are related by the equation tan 𝜃𝜃 = sinh 𝑢𝑢 and 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃 < Let 𝑣𝑣 =
2
sech 𝑢𝑢. Prove that
(i) 𝑣𝑣 = cos 𝜃𝜃.
d𝜃𝜃
(ii) d𝑢𝑢
= 𝑣𝑣.

d𝑣𝑣 d2 𝑣𝑣
(iii) sin 2𝜃𝜃 = −2 and cos 2𝜃𝜃 = − cosh 𝑢𝑢 .
d𝑢𝑢 d𝑢𝑢2

d𝑢𝑢 d2 𝑣𝑣 d𝑣𝑣 d2 𝑢𝑢 d𝑢𝑢 2

(iv) + + � � = 0.
d𝜃𝜃 d𝜃𝜃2 d𝜃𝜃 d𝜃𝜃2 d𝜃𝜃

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1990

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1990Q10]
By considering the graphs of 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 and 𝑦𝑦 = sin 𝑥𝑥, show that the equation 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = sin 𝑥𝑥, where
π π
𝑘𝑘 > 0, may have 0, 1, 2 or 3 roots in the interval (4𝑛𝑛 + 1) < 𝑥𝑥 < (4𝑛𝑛 + 5) , where 𝑛𝑛 is a
2 2
positive integer.
For a certain given value of 𝑛𝑛, the equation has exactly one root in this interval. Show that 𝑘𝑘
2 π
lies in an interval which may be written sin 𝛿𝛿 < 𝑘𝑘 < (4𝑛𝑛+1)π, where 0 < 𝛿𝛿 < and
2

π
cos 𝛿𝛿 = �(4𝑛𝑛 + 5) − 𝛿𝛿� sin 𝛿𝛿.
2
2
Show that, if 𝑛𝑛 is large, then 𝛿𝛿 ≈ (4𝑛𝑛+5)π and obtain a second, improved, approximation.

[STEP 3, 1990Q11]
The points 𝑂𝑂, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are the vertices of a uniform square lamina of mass 𝑀𝑀. The lamina can
turn freely under gravity about a horizontal axis perpendicular to the plane of the lamina
through 𝑂𝑂. The sides of the lamina are of length 2𝑎𝑎. When the lamina is hanging at rest with
the diagonal 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 vertically downwards it is struck at the mid-point of 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 by a particle of mass
6𝑀𝑀 moving horizontally in the plane of the lamina with speed 𝑉𝑉. The particle adheres to the
lamina. Find, in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑀𝑀 and 𝑔𝑔, the value which 𝑉𝑉 2 must exceed for the lamina and particle
to make complete revolutions about the axis.

1990
[Link]

[STEP 3, 1990Q12] 5

A uniform smooth wedge of mass 𝑚𝑚 has congruent triangular end faces 𝐴𝐴1 𝐵𝐵1 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐴𝐴2 𝐵𝐵2 𝐶𝐶2 ,
and 𝐴𝐴1 𝐴𝐴2 , 𝐵𝐵1 𝐵𝐵2 and 𝐶𝐶1 𝐶𝐶2 are perpendicular to these faces. The points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are the mid-
points of 𝐴𝐴1 𝐴𝐴2 , 𝐵𝐵1 𝐵𝐵2 and 𝐶𝐶1 𝐶𝐶2 respectively. The sides of the triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 have lengths 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 =
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 5𝑎𝑎 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 6𝑎𝑎. The wedge is placed with 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 on a smooth horizontal table, a particle of
mass 2𝑚𝑚 is placed at 𝐴𝐴 on 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, and the system is released from rest. The particle slides down
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, strikes the table, bounces perfectly elastically and lands again on the table at 𝐷𝐷. At this time
192𝑎𝑎
the point 𝐶𝐶 of the wedge has reached the point 𝐸𝐸; show that 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 19
.

[STEP 3, 1990Q13]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 is projected, from the lowest point, along the smooth inside surface of a fixed
sphere with centre 𝑂𝑂. It leaves the surface when 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 makes an angle 𝜃𝜃 with the upward vertical.
Find the smallest angle that must be exceeded by 𝜃𝜃 to ensure that 𝑃𝑃 will next strike the surface
below the level of 𝑂𝑂.
[You may find it helpful to find the time at which the particle strikes the sphere.]

STEP 3 Past Paper 1990 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1990Q14]
The edges 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 of a rigid cube are taken as coordinate axes and 𝑂𝑂′ , 𝐴𝐴′ , 𝐵𝐵′ , 𝐶𝐶′are the
𝛼𝛼
vertices diagonally opposite 𝑂𝑂, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶, respectively. The four forces acting on the cube are �𝛽𝛽𝛾𝛾�
𝜆𝜆 −1 1
at 𝑂𝑂(0, 0, 0) , �01� at 𝑂𝑂′ (𝑎𝑎, 𝑎𝑎, 𝑎𝑎) , � 0 � at 𝐵𝐵(0, 𝑎𝑎, 0) and �𝜇𝜇𝜈𝜈� at 𝐵𝐵′ (𝑎𝑎, 0, 𝑎𝑎) . The moment of the
2
system about 𝑂𝑂 is zero: find 𝜆𝜆, 𝜇𝜇 and 𝜈𝜈.
(i) Given that 𝛼𝛼 = 𝛽𝛽 = 𝛾𝛾 = 0, find the system consisting of a single force at 𝐵𝐵 together with a
couple which is equivalent to the given system.
(ii) Given that 𝛼𝛼 = 2, 𝛽𝛽 = 3 and 𝛾𝛾 = 2, find the equation of the locus about each point of which
the moment of the system is zero. Find the number of units of work done on the cube when
it moves (without rotation) a unit distance in the direction of this line under the action of
the given forces only.

[STEP 3, 1990Q15]
An unbiased twelve-sided die has its faces marked 𝐴𝐴, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵. In a series of
throws of the die the first 𝑀𝑀 throws show 𝐴𝐴, the next 𝑁𝑁 throws show 𝐵𝐵 and the (𝑀𝑀 + 𝑁𝑁 + 1)th
throw shows 𝐴𝐴. Write down the probability that 𝑀𝑀 = 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑛𝑛, where 𝑚𝑚 ≥ 0 and 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
Find (i) the marginal distributions of 𝑀𝑀 and 𝑁𝑁,
(ii) the mean values of 𝑀𝑀 and 𝑁𝑁.
1990
Investigate whether 𝑀𝑀 and 𝑁𝑁 are independent. [Link]

6
Find the probability that 𝑁𝑁 is greater than a given integer 𝑘𝑘, where 𝑘𝑘 ≥ 1, and find P(𝑁𝑁 > 𝑀𝑀).
1
Find also P(𝑁𝑁 = 𝑀𝑀) and show that P(𝑁𝑁 < 𝑀𝑀) = .
52

[STEP 3, 1990Q16]
(i) A rod of unit length is cut into pieces of length 𝑋𝑋 and 1 − 𝑋𝑋; the latter is then cut in half.
The random variable 𝑋𝑋 is uniformly distributed over [0, 1]. For some values of 𝑋𝑋 a triangle
can be formed from the three pieces of the rod. Show that the conditional probability that,
if a triangle can be formed, it will be obtuse-angled is 3 − 2√2.
(ii) The bivariate distribution of the random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 is uniform over the triangle
with vertices (1, 0), (1, 1) and (0, 1). A pair of values 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 is chosen at random from this
distribution and a (perhaps degenerate) triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is constructed with 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑥𝑥 and
�
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝑦𝑦 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 2 − 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦. Show that the construction is always possible and that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
is obtuse if and only if
𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑥𝑥 + 2
𝑦𝑦 > .
2 − 𝑥𝑥
� is obtuse is 3 − 4 ln 2.
Deduce that the probability that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1990

STEP 3 1991
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1991
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1991 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q1]
(i) Evaluate
𝑛𝑛
6
� .
𝑟𝑟(𝑟𝑟 + 1)(𝑟𝑟 + 3)
𝑟𝑟=1
2 3)
(ii) Expand ln(1 + 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 as a series in powers of 𝑥𝑥, where |𝑥𝑥| < 1, giving the first five
non-zero terms and the general term.

(iii) Expand e𝑥𝑥 ln(1+𝑥𝑥) as a series in powers of 𝑥𝑥, where −1 < 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1, as far as the term in 𝑥𝑥 4 .

[STEP 3, 1991Q2]
The distinct points 𝑃𝑃1 , 𝑃𝑃2 , 𝑃𝑃3 , 𝑄𝑄1 , 𝑄𝑄2 and 𝑄𝑄3 in the Argand diagram are represented by the
complex numbers 𝑧𝑧1 , 𝑧𝑧2 , 𝑧𝑧3 , 𝑤𝑤1 , 𝑤𝑤2 and 𝑤𝑤3 respectively. Show that the triangles 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 and
𝑄𝑄1 𝑄𝑄2 𝑄𝑄3 are similar, with 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 corresponding to 𝑄𝑄𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3) and the rotation from 1 to 2 to 3
being in the same sense for both triangles, if and only if
𝑧𝑧1 − 𝑧𝑧2 𝑤𝑤1 − 𝑤𝑤2
= .
𝑧𝑧1 − 𝑧𝑧3 𝑤𝑤1 − 𝑤𝑤3
Verify that this condition may be written
𝑧𝑧1 𝑧𝑧2 𝑧𝑧3
𝑤𝑤
det � 1 𝑤𝑤2 𝑤𝑤3 � = 0.
1 1 1
1991
(i) Show that 𝑤𝑤𝑖𝑖 = 𝑧𝑧𝑖𝑖2 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3) then triangle 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 is not similar to triangle 𝑄𝑄1 𝑄𝑄2 𝑄𝑄3. [Link]

2
(ii) Show that if 𝑤𝑤𝑖𝑖 = 𝑧𝑧𝑖𝑖3 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3) then triangle 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 is similar to triangle 𝑄𝑄1 𝑄𝑄2 𝑄𝑄3 if and
only if the centroid of triangle 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 is the origin. [The centroid of triangle 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 is
1
represented by the complex number (𝑧𝑧1 + 𝑧𝑧2 + 𝑧𝑧3 ).]
3

(iii) Show that the triangle 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃3 is equilateral if and only if
𝑧𝑧2 𝑧𝑧3 + 𝑧𝑧3 𝑧𝑧1 + 𝑧𝑧1 𝑧𝑧2 = 𝑧𝑧12 + 𝑧𝑧22 + 𝑧𝑧32 .

[STEP 3, 1991Q3]
The function 𝑓𝑓 is defined for 𝑥𝑥 < 2 by
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 2|𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑥𝑥| + |𝑥𝑥 2 − 1| − 2|𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥|.
Find the maximum and minimum points and the points of inflection of the graph of 𝑓𝑓 and
sketch this graph. Is 𝑓𝑓 continuous everywhere? Is 𝑓𝑓 differentiable everywhere?
Find the inverse of the function 𝑓𝑓 , i.e. expressions for 𝑓𝑓 −1 (𝑥𝑥) , defined in the various
appropriate intervals.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1991

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q4]
The point 𝑃𝑃 moves on a straight line in three-dimensional space. The position of 𝑃𝑃 is observed
from the points 𝑂𝑂1 (0, 0, 0) and 𝑂𝑂2 (8𝑎𝑎, 0, 0). At times 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑡𝑡1 and 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑡𝑡1′ , the lines of sight from
𝑥𝑥 𝑧𝑧 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧
𝑂𝑂1 are along the lines = , 𝑦𝑦 = 0 and 𝑥𝑥 = 0, = respectively. At time 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑡𝑡2 and 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑡𝑡2′ , the
2 3 3 4
𝑥𝑥−8𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧 𝑥𝑥−8𝑎𝑎 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧
lines of sight from 𝑂𝑂2 are = = and = = respectively. Find an equation or
−3 1 3 −4 2 5
equations for the path of 𝑃𝑃.

[STEP 3, 1991Q5]
The curve 𝐶𝐶 has the differential equation in polar coordinates
d2 𝑟𝑟 π 3π
+ 4𝑟𝑟 = 5 sin 3𝜃𝜃 , for ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ ,
d𝜃𝜃 2 5 5
π d𝑟𝑟
and, when 𝜃𝜃 = , 𝑟𝑟 = 1 and = −2. Show that 𝐶𝐶 forms a closed loop and that the area of the
2 d𝜃𝜃
region enclosed by 𝐶𝐶 is
π 25 π 2π
+ �sin � � − sin � ��.
5 48 5 5

[STEP 3, 1991Q6]
′
The transformation 𝑇𝑇 from �𝑦𝑦𝑥𝑥 � to �𝑦𝑦𝑥𝑥 ′ � in two-dimensional space is given by
1991
[Link]
′
𝑥𝑥 cosh 𝑢𝑢 sinh 𝑢𝑢 𝑥𝑥 3
� ′� = � � � �,
𝑦𝑦 sinh 𝑢𝑢 cosh 𝑢𝑢 𝑦𝑦

where 𝑢𝑢 is a positive real constant. Show that the curve with equation 𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 = 1 is
transformed into itself. Find the equations of two straight lines through the origin which
transform into themselves.
A line, not necessarily through the origin, which has gradient tanh 𝑣𝑣 transforms under 𝑇𝑇 into a
line with gradient tanh 𝑣𝑣 ′ . Show that 𝑣𝑣 ′ = 𝑣𝑣 + 𝑢𝑢.
The lines 𝑙𝑙1 and 𝑙𝑙2 with gradients tanh 𝑣𝑣1 and tanh 𝑣𝑣2 transform under 𝑇𝑇 into lines with
gradients tanh 𝑣𝑣1′ and tanh 𝑣𝑣2′ respectively. Find the relation satisfied by 𝑣𝑣1 and 𝑣𝑣2 that is the
necessary and sufficient for 𝑙𝑙1 and 𝑙𝑙2 to intersect at the same angle as their transforms.
In the case when 𝑙𝑙1 and 𝑙𝑙2 meet at the origin, illustrate in a diagram the relation between 𝑙𝑙1 , 𝑙𝑙2
and their transforms.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1991 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q7]
(i) Prove that
π π π
2 2 1 2 1
� ln sin 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = � ln cos 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = � ln sin 2𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 − π ln 2.
0 0 2 0 4
and
π π
2 1 π 2
� ln sin 2𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = � ln sin 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = � ln sin 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥.
0 2 0 0
π
Hence, or otherwise, evaluate ∫02 ln sin 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥.

[You may assume that all the integrals converge.]

(ii) Given that ln 𝑢𝑢 < 𝑢𝑢 for 𝑢𝑢 ≥ 1 deduce that
1
ln 𝑥𝑥 < √𝑥𝑥 for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 1.
2
ln 𝑥𝑥
Deduce that → 0 as 𝑥𝑥 → ∞ and that 𝑥𝑥 ln 𝑥𝑥 → 0 as 𝑥𝑥 → 0 through positive values.
𝑥𝑥
π
(iii) Using the results of parts (i) and (ii), or otherwise, evaluate ∫02 𝑥𝑥 cot 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥.

[STEP 3, 1991Q8]
1991
(i) The integral 𝐼𝐼𝑘𝑘 is defined by [Link]

𝜃𝜃 4
𝑘𝑘
𝐼𝐼𝑘𝑘 = � cos 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 d𝑥𝑥.
0
𝑘𝑘
Prove that 2𝑘𝑘𝐼𝐼𝑘𝑘 = 𝑘𝑘𝐼𝐼𝑘𝑘−1 + cos 𝜃𝜃 sin 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘.
(ii) Prove that
𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚
1 + 𝑚𝑚 cos 2𝜃𝜃 + � � cos 4𝜃𝜃 + ⋯ + � � cos 2𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + ⋯ + cos 2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2𝑚𝑚 cos 𝑚𝑚 𝜃𝜃 cos 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚.
2 𝑟𝑟
(iii) Using the results of parts (i) and (ii), show that
sin 2𝜃𝜃 𝑚𝑚 sin 4𝜃𝜃 𝑚𝑚 sin 2𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 sin 2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 +� � + ⋯+ � � + ⋯+
2 2 4 𝑟𝑟 2𝑟𝑟 2𝑚𝑚
1 1
= cos 𝜃𝜃 sin 𝜃𝜃 + cos2 𝜃𝜃 sin 2𝜃𝜃 + ⋯ + 2𝑟𝑟−1 cos𝑟𝑟 𝜃𝜃 sin 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + ⋯ + 2𝑚𝑚−1 cos𝑚𝑚 𝜃𝜃 sin 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚.
𝑟𝑟 𝑚𝑚

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1991

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q9]
The parametric equations 𝐸𝐸1 and 𝐸𝐸2 define the same ellipse, in terms of the parameters 𝜃𝜃1 and
𝜃𝜃2 , (though not referred to the same coordinate axes).
𝐸𝐸1 : 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜃𝜃1 , 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑏𝑏 sin 𝜃𝜃1 ,
𝑘𝑘 cos 𝜃𝜃2 𝑘𝑘 sin 𝜃𝜃2
𝐸𝐸2 : 𝑥𝑥 = , 𝑦𝑦 = ,
1 + 𝑒𝑒 cos 𝜃𝜃2 1 + 𝑒𝑒 cos 𝜃𝜃2
where 0 < 𝑏𝑏 < 𝑎𝑎, 0 < 𝑒𝑒 < 1 and 0 < 𝑘𝑘. Find the position of the axes for 𝐸𝐸2 relative to the axes
for 𝐸𝐸1 and show that 𝑘𝑘 = 𝑎𝑎(1 − 𝑒𝑒 2 ) and 𝑏𝑏 2 = 𝑎𝑎2 (1 − 𝑒𝑒 2 ).
𝑙𝑙
[The standard polar equation of an ellipse is 𝑟𝑟 = 1+𝑒𝑒 cos 𝜃𝜃.]

By considering expressions for the length of the perimeter of the ellipse, or otherwise, prove
that
π π
1 − 𝑒𝑒 2
� �1 − 𝑒𝑒 2 cos 2 𝜃𝜃 d𝜃𝜃 = � �1 + 𝑒𝑒 2 + 2𝑒𝑒 cos 𝜃𝜃 d𝜃𝜃.
0 0 (1 + 𝑒𝑒 cos 𝜃𝜃)2

Given that 𝑒𝑒 is so small that 𝑒𝑒 6 may be neglected, show that the value of either integral is
1
π(64 − 16𝑒𝑒 2 − 3𝑒𝑒 4 ).
64

[STEP 3, 1991Q10]
The equation 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 − 𝑞𝑞𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝑟𝑟 = 0 , where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 5 and 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 are real constants, has roots 1991
[Link]
𝛼𝛼1 , 𝛼𝛼2 , … , 𝛼𝛼𝑛𝑛 . The sum of the products of 𝑚𝑚 distinct roots is denoted by ∑𝑚𝑚 (so that, for
5
example, ∑3 = ∑𝛼𝛼𝑖𝑖 𝛼𝛼𝑗𝑗 𝛼𝛼𝑘𝑘 where the sum runs over all values of 𝑖𝑖, 𝑗𝑗 and 𝑘𝑘 with 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 𝑖𝑖 > 𝑗𝑗 > 𝑘𝑘 ≥
1). The sum of the 𝑚𝑚th powers of the roots is denoted by 𝑆𝑆𝑚𝑚 (so that, for example, 𝑆𝑆3 =
∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝛼𝛼𝑖𝑖3 ). Prove that 𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝 = 𝑞𝑞 𝑝𝑝 for 1 ≤ 𝑝𝑝 ≤ 𝑛𝑛 − 1.

[You may assume that for any 𝑛𝑛th degree equation and 1 ≤ 𝑝𝑝 ≤ 𝑛𝑛
𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝 − 𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝−1 ∑1 + 𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝−2 ∑2 − ⋯ + (−1)𝑝𝑝−1 𝑆𝑆1 ∑𝑝𝑝−1 + (−1)𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝 ∑𝑝𝑝 = 0. ].

Find expressions for 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 , 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛+1 and 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛+2 in terms of 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑛𝑛. Suggest an expression for 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛+𝑚𝑚 ,
where 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑛𝑛, and prove its validity by induction.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1991 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q11]

A uniform circular cylinder of radius 2𝑎𝑎 with a groove of radius 𝑎𝑎 cut in its central cross-
section has mass 𝑀𝑀. It rests, as shown in the diagram, on a rough plane inclined at an acute
angle 𝛼𝛼 to the horizontal. It is supported by a light inextensible string wound round the groove
and attached to the cylinder at one end. The other end of the string is attached to the plane at
𝑄𝑄, the free part of the string, 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, making an angle 2𝛼𝛼 with the inclined plane. The coefficient of
1
friction at the contact between the cylinder and the plane is 𝜇𝜇. Show that 𝜇𝜇 ≥ 3 tan 𝛼𝛼.

The string 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is now detached from the plane and the end 𝑄𝑄 is fastened to a particle of mass
3𝑀𝑀 which is placed on the plane, the position of the string remaining unchanged. Given that
1
tan 𝛼𝛼 = 2 and that the system remains in equilibrium, find the least value of the coefficient of
friction between the particle and the plane.
1991
[Link]

[STEP 3, 1991Q12] 6

A smooth tube whose axis is horizontal has an elliptic cross-section in the form of the curve
with parametric equations
𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜃𝜃 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑏𝑏 sin 𝜃𝜃
where the 𝑥𝑥-axis is horizontal and the 𝑦𝑦-axis is vertically upwards. A particle moves freely
under gravity on the inside of the tube in the plane of this cross-section. By first finding 𝑥𝑥̈ and
𝑦𝑦̈ , or otherwise, show that the acceleration along the inward normal at the point with
parameter 𝜃𝜃 is
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2
.
√𝑎𝑎2 sin2 𝜃𝜃 + 𝑏𝑏 2 cos2 𝜃𝜃
The particle is projected along the surface in the vertical cross-section plane, with speed 2�𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏,
from the lowest point. Given that 2𝑎𝑎 = 3𝑏𝑏, show that it will leave the surface at the point with
parameter 𝜃𝜃 where
5 sin3 𝜃𝜃 + 12 sin 𝜃𝜃 − 8 = 0.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1991

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q13]
A smooth particle 𝑃𝑃1 is projected from a point 𝑂𝑂 on the horizontal floor of a room which has a
horizontal ceiling at a height ℎ above the floor. The speed of projection is �8𝑔𝑔ℎ and the
direction of projection makes an acute angle 𝛼𝛼 with the horizontal. The particle strikes the
ceiling and rebounds, the impact being perfectly elastic. Show that for this to happen 𝛼𝛼 must
1
be at least 6 π and that the range on the floor is then

8ℎ cos 𝛼𝛼 �2 sin 𝛼𝛼 − �4 sin2 𝛼𝛼 − 1�.

Another particle 𝑃𝑃2 is projected from 𝑂𝑂 with the same velocity as 𝑃𝑃1 but its impact with the
ceiling is perfectly inelastic. Find the difference 𝐷𝐷 between the ranges of 𝑃𝑃1 and 𝑃𝑃2 on the floor
1
and show that, as 𝛼𝛼 varies, 𝐷𝐷 has a maximum value when 𝛼𝛼 = π.
4

[STEP 3, 1991Q14]

1991
[Link]

The end 𝑂𝑂 of a smooth light rod 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 of length 2𝑎𝑎 is a fixed point. The rod 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 makes a fixed angle
3
sin−1 � � with the downward vertical 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, but is free to rotate about 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚
5
is attached to the rod at 𝐴𝐴 and a small ring 𝐵𝐵 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is free to slide on the rod but is joined
to 𝐴𝐴 by a spring of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 . The vertical plane
5𝑔𝑔
containing the rod 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 rotates about 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 with constant angular velocity � and 𝐵𝐵 is at rest
2𝑎𝑎
relative to the rod. Show that the length of 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is
(10𝑘𝑘 + 8)𝑎𝑎
.
10𝑘𝑘 − 9
13
Given that the reaction of the rod on the particle at 𝐴𝐴 makes an angle tan−1 � � with the
21
horizontal, find the value of 𝑘𝑘. Find also the magnitude of the reaction between the rod and the
ring 𝐵𝐵.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1991 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1991Q15]
A pack of 2𝑛𝑛 (where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 4) cards consists of two each of 𝑛𝑛 different sorts. If four cards are
drawn from the pack without replacement show that the probability that no pairs of identical
cards have been drawn is
4(𝑛𝑛 − 2)(𝑛𝑛 − 3)
.
(2𝑛𝑛 − 1)(2𝑛𝑛 − 3)
Find the probability that exactly one pair of identical cards is included in the four.
If 𝑘𝑘 cards are drawn without replacement and 2 < 𝑘𝑘 < 2𝑛𝑛 , find an expression for the
1
probability that there are exactly 𝑟𝑟 pairs of identical cards included when 𝑟𝑟 < 𝑘𝑘.
2
1
For even values of 𝑘𝑘 show that the probability that the drawn cards consist of 𝑘𝑘 pairs is
2

1 × 3 × 5 × ⋯ × (𝑘𝑘 − 1)
.
(2𝑛𝑛 − 1)(2𝑛𝑛 − 3) ⋯ (2𝑛𝑛 − 𝑘𝑘 + 1)

[STEP 3, 1991Q16]
The random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 take integer values 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 respectively which are restricted by
𝑥𝑥 ≥ 1, 𝑦𝑦 ≥ 1 and 2𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 ≤ 2𝑎𝑎 where 𝑎𝑎 is an integer greater than 1. The joint probability is
given by
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥, 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦) = 𝑐𝑐(2𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦),
1991
where 𝑐𝑐 is a positive constant, within this region and zero elsewhere. Obtain, in terms [Link]
𝑥𝑥, 𝑐𝑐
and 𝑎𝑎, the marginal probability P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥) and show that 8
6
𝑐𝑐 = .
𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎 − 1)(8𝑎𝑎 + 5)
Show that when 𝑦𝑦 is an even number the marginal probability P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦) is
3(2𝑎𝑎 − 𝑦𝑦)(2𝑎𝑎 + 2 + 𝑦𝑦)
2𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎 − 1)(8𝑎𝑎 + 5)
and find the corresponding expression when 𝑦𝑦 is odd.
Evaluate E(𝑌𝑌) in terms of 𝑎𝑎.

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1991

STEP 3 1992
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1992
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1992 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q1]
(i) Given that 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = ln(1 + e𝑥𝑥 ), prove that ln�𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥)� = 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) and that 𝑓𝑓 ′′ (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) −
[𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥)]2. Hence, or otherwise, expand 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) as a series in power of 𝑥𝑥 up to the term in 𝑥𝑥 4 .
(ii) Given that
1
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = ,
sinh 𝑥𝑥 cosh 2𝑥𝑥
explain why 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) can not be expanded as a series of non-negative powers of 𝑥𝑥 but that
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥) can be so expanded. Explain also why this latter expansion will consist of even
powers of 𝑥𝑥 only. Expand 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥) as a series as far as the term in 𝑥𝑥 4 .

[STEP 3, 1992Q2]
1 0 1 1
The matrices I and J are � � and � � respectively and 𝐀𝐀 = 𝐈𝐈 + 𝑎𝑎𝐉𝐉, where 𝑎𝑎 is a non-zero
0 1 1 1
1 1
real constant. Prove that 𝐀𝐀2 = 𝐈𝐈 + ((1 + 2𝑎𝑎)2 − 1)𝐉𝐉 and 𝐀𝐀3 = 𝐈𝐈 + ((1 + 2𝑎𝑎)3 − 1)𝐉𝐉 and
2 2
obtain a similar form for 𝐀𝐀4 .
If 𝐀𝐀𝑘𝑘 = 𝐈𝐈 + 𝑝𝑝𝑘𝑘 𝐉𝐉, suggest a suitable form for 𝑝𝑝𝑘𝑘 and prove that it is correct by induction, or
otherwise.

[STEP 3, 1992Q3]
1992
Sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶1 whose parametric equations are 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑡𝑡 2 , 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑡𝑡 3 . [Link]

2
The circle 𝐶𝐶2 passes through the origin 𝑂𝑂. The points 𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆 with real non-zero parameters 𝑟𝑟
and 𝑠𝑠 respectively are other intersections of 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐶𝐶2 . Show that 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 are roots of an
equation of the form
𝑡𝑡 4 + 𝑡𝑡 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 = 0,
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are real constants.
By obtaining a quadratic equation, with coefficients expressed in terms of 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠, whose roots
would be the parameters of any further intersections of 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐶𝐶2 , or otherwise, show that 𝑂𝑂,
𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆 are the only real intersections of 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐶𝐶2 .

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1992

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q4]
𝑥𝑥
A set of curves 𝑆𝑆1 is defined by the equation 𝑦𝑦 = , where 𝑎𝑎 is a constant which is different
𝑥𝑥−𝑎𝑎
for different members of 𝑆𝑆1 . Sketch on the same axes the curves for which 𝑎𝑎 = −2, −1, 1 and 2.
A second set of curve 𝑆𝑆2 is such that at each intersection between a member of 𝑆𝑆2 and a
member of 𝑆𝑆1 the tangents of the intersecting curves are perpendicular. On the same axes as
the already sketched members of 𝑆𝑆1 , sketch the member of 𝑆𝑆2 that passes through the point
(1, −1).
Obtain the first order differential equation for 𝑦𝑦 satisfied at all points on all members of 𝑆𝑆1 (i.e.
d𝑦𝑦
an equation connecting 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 and which does not involve 𝑎𝑎).
d𝑥𝑥
d𝑦𝑦
State the relationship between the values of on two intersecting curves, one from 𝑆𝑆1 and one
d𝑥𝑥
from 𝑆𝑆2 , at their intersection. Hence show that the differential equation for the curves of 𝑆𝑆2 is
d𝑦𝑦
𝑥𝑥 = 𝑦𝑦(𝑦𝑦 − 1) .
d𝑥𝑥
Find an equation for the member of 𝑆𝑆2 that you have sketched.

[STEP 3, 1992Q5]
The tetrahedron 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 has 𝐴𝐴 at the point (0, 4, −2). It is symmetrical about the plane 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧 =
2, which passes through 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐷𝐷. The mid-point of 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 is 𝑁𝑁. The centre, 𝑌𝑌, of the sphere 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
��⃗ = 3𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌
is at the point (3, −2, 4) and lies on 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 such that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ��⃗. Show that 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 6√2 and find1992
the
[Link]
coordinates of 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶.
3
1
The angle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is cos−1 � �. Find the coordinates of 𝐷𝐷.
3

[There are two alternative answers for each point.]

[STEP 3, 1992Q6]
π 𝑥𝑥 sin2(𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛)
Given that 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = ∫0 sin2 𝑥𝑥
d𝑥𝑥, where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer, show that 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 − 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛−1 = 𝐽𝐽𝑛𝑛 , where
π
𝑥𝑥 sin(2𝑛𝑛 − 1)𝑥𝑥
𝐽𝐽𝑛𝑛 = � d𝑥𝑥.
0 sin 𝑥𝑥
Obtain also a reduction formula for 𝐽𝐽𝑛𝑛 .
𝑥𝑥 sin2(𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛)
The curve 𝐶𝐶 is given by the cartesian equation 𝑦𝑦 = , where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer and
sin2 𝑥𝑥
𝑛𝑛π 2
0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ π. Show that the area under the curve 𝐶𝐶 is .
2

[STEP 3, 1992Q7]
The points 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑅𝑅 lie on the sides 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, respectively, of the parallelogram 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴. The
point 𝑄𝑄 is the fourth vertex of the parallelogram 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴. Prove that 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 meet in a
point.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1992 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q8]
Show that
𝑛𝑛
2𝑛𝑛+1 2𝑛𝑛 + 1
sin(2𝑛𝑛 + 1) 𝜃𝜃 = sin 𝜃𝜃 �(−1)𝑛𝑛−𝑟𝑟 � � cot 2𝑟𝑟 𝜃𝜃 ,
2𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟=0

where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer. Deduce that the equation

𝑛𝑛
2𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑟𝑟
�(−1)𝑟𝑟 � � 𝑥𝑥 = 0
2𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟=0
𝑘𝑘π
has roots cot 2 � � for 𝑘𝑘 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛𝑛.
2𝑛𝑛+1

Show that
𝑘𝑘π 𝑛𝑛(2𝑛𝑛−1)
(i) ∑𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘=1 cot 2 � � = ,
2𝑛𝑛+1 3
𝑘𝑘π
(ii) ∑𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘=1 tan2 �2𝑛𝑛+1� = 𝑛𝑛(2𝑛𝑛 + 1),
𝑘𝑘π 2𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛+1)
(iii) ∑𝑛𝑛𝑘𝑘=1 cosec 2 � � = .
2𝑛𝑛+1 3

[STEP 3, 1992Q9]
The straight line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, where 𝑂𝑂 is the origin, bisects the angle between the positive 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦
1992
axes. The ellipse 𝐸𝐸 has 𝑆𝑆 as focus. In polar coordinates with 𝑆𝑆 as pole and 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 as the initial line,
[Link]
𝐸𝐸 has equation 𝑙𝑙 = 𝑟𝑟(1 + e cos 𝜃𝜃). Show that, at the point on 𝐸𝐸 given by 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛼𝛼, the gradient of
4
the tangent to the ellipse is given by
d𝑦𝑦 sin 𝛼𝛼 − cos 𝛼𝛼 − e
= .
d𝑥𝑥 sin 𝛼𝛼 + cos 𝛼𝛼 + e
The points on 𝐸𝐸 given by 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛼𝛼 and 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛽𝛽 are the ends of a diameter of 𝐸𝐸. Show that
𝛼𝛼 𝛽𝛽 1+e
tan � � tan � � = − .
2 2 1−e
[A diameter of an ellipse is a chord through its centre.]

[STEP 3, 1992Q10]
Sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶 whose polar equation is
π π
𝑟𝑟 = 4𝑎𝑎 cos 2𝜃𝜃 for − < 𝜃𝜃 < .
4 4
The ellipse 𝐸𝐸 has parametric equations
𝑥𝑥 = 2𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜙𝜙 , 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎 sin 𝜙𝜙.
Show, without evaluating the integrals, that the perimeters of 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐸𝐸 are equal.
Show also that the areas of the regions enclosed by 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐸𝐸 are equal.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1992

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q11]

𝐴𝐴𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 represents a smooth vertical wall and 𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋 represents a parallel smooth vertical barrier,
both standing on a smooth horizontal table. A particle 𝑃𝑃 is projected along the table from 𝑂𝑂
with speed 𝑉𝑉 in a direction perpendicular to the wall. At the time of projection, the distance
75
between the wall and the barrier is �32� 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉, where 𝑇𝑇 is a constant. The barrier moves directly
towards the wall, remaining parallel to the wall, with initial speed 4𝑉𝑉 and with constant
4𝑉𝑉
acceleration directly away from the wall. The particle strikes the barrier 𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋 and rebounds.
𝑇𝑇
5𝑇𝑇
Show that this impact take place at time .
8

The barrier is sufficiently massive for its motion to be unaffected by the impact. Given that the
1
coefficient of restitution is , find the speed of 𝑃𝑃 immediately after impact.
2
1
𝑃𝑃 strikes 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and rebounds. Given that the coefficient of restitution for this collision is also ,
1992 2
9𝑇𝑇 [Link]
show that the next collision of 𝑃𝑃 with the barrier is at time 8
from the start of the motion. 5

[STEP 3, 1992Q12]

A smooth hemispherical bowl of mass 2𝑚𝑚 is rigidly mounted on a light carriage which slides
freely on a horizontal table as shown in the diagram. The rim of the bowl is horizontal and has
centre 𝑂𝑂. A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is free to slide on the inner surface of the bowl. Initially, 𝑃𝑃 is
in contact with the rim of the bowl and the system is at rest. The system is released and when
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 makes an angle 𝜃𝜃 with the horizontal the velocity of the bowl is 𝑣𝑣. Show that 3𝑣𝑣 = 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ sin 𝜃𝜃
and that
2𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 sin3 𝜃𝜃
𝑣𝑣 2 = ,
3(3 − sin2 𝜃𝜃)
where 𝑎𝑎 is the interior radius of the bowl.
Find, in terms of 𝑚𝑚, 𝑔𝑔 and 𝜃𝜃, the reaction between the bowl and the particle.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1992 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q13]

A uniform circular disc of radius 2𝑏𝑏 , mass 𝑚𝑚 and centre 𝑂𝑂 is free to turn about a fixed
horizontal axis through 𝑂𝑂 perpendicular to the plane of the disc. A light elastic string of
4
modulus 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, where 𝑘𝑘 > π, has one end attached to a fixed point 𝐴𝐴 and the other end to the
rim of the disc at 𝑃𝑃. The string is in contact with the rim of the disc along the arc 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is
horizontal. The natural length of the string and the length of the line 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 are each π𝑏𝑏 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is
� = 90° as shown in
vertical. A particle 𝑄𝑄 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to the rim of the disc and 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
the diagram. The system is released from rest with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 vertical and 𝑃𝑃 below 𝑂𝑂. Show that 𝑃𝑃
10−π𝑘𝑘
reaches 𝐶𝐶 and that then the upward vertical component of the reaction on the axis is 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 3
.
1992
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1992

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q14]

A horizontal circular disc of radius 𝑎𝑎 and centre 𝑂𝑂 lies on a horizontal table and is fixed to it so
that it cannot rotate. A light inextensible string of neglible thickness is wrapped round the disc
and attached at its free end to a particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚. When the string is all in contact with the
disc, 𝑃𝑃 is at 𝐴𝐴. The string is unwound so that the part not in contact with the disc is taut and
parallel to 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂. 𝑃𝑃 is then at 𝐵𝐵. The particle is projected along the table from 𝐵𝐵 with speed 𝑉𝑉
perpendicular to and away from 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂. In the general position, the string is tangential to the disc
� = 𝜃𝜃. Show that, in the general position, the 𝑥𝑥-coordinate of 𝑃𝑃 with respect to the
at 𝑄𝑄 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
axes shown in the figure is 𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜃𝜃 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 sin 𝜃𝜃, and find 𝑦𝑦-coordinate of 𝑃𝑃. Hence, or otherwise,
show that the acceleration of 𝑃𝑃 has components 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 and 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̈ along and perpendicular
to 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, respectively.
2𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆𝑣𝑣 2
The friction force between 𝑃𝑃 and the table is
𝑎𝑎
, where 𝑣𝑣 is the speed of 𝑃𝑃 and 𝜆𝜆 1992
is a
[Link]

constant. Show that 7

𝜃𝜃̈ 1
= − � + 2𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆� 𝜃𝜃̇
𝜃𝜃̇ 𝜃𝜃
and find 𝜃𝜃̇ in terms of 𝜃𝜃, 𝜆𝜆 and 𝑎𝑎. Find also the tension in the string when 𝜃𝜃 = π.

[STEP 3, 1992Q15]
A goat 𝐺𝐺 lives in a square field 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 of side 𝑎𝑎. It wanders randomly round its field, so that at
any time the probability of its being in any given region is proportional to the area of this region.
Write down the probability that its distance, 𝑅𝑅, from 𝑂𝑂 is less than 𝑟𝑟 if 0 < 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 𝑎𝑎, and show that
if 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 𝑎𝑎 the probability is
1
𝑟𝑟 2 2 π𝑟𝑟 2 𝑟𝑟 2 𝑎𝑎
� 2 − 1� + 2 − 2 cos−1 � �.
𝑎𝑎 4𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎 𝑟𝑟
Find the median of 𝑅𝑅 and probability density function of 𝑅𝑅.
The goat is then tethered to the corner 𝑂𝑂 by a chain of length 𝑎𝑎. Find the conditional probability
𝑎𝑎
that its distance from the fence 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is more than .
2

STEP 3 Past Paper 1992 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1992Q16]
e−𝜆𝜆 𝜆𝜆𝑛𝑛
The probability that there are exactly 𝑛𝑛 misprints in an issue of a newspaper is 𝑛𝑛!
where 𝜆𝜆
is a positive constant. The probability that I spot a particular misprint is 𝑝𝑝, independent of what
happens for other misprints, and 0 < 𝑝𝑝 < 1.
(i) If there are exactly 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑛𝑛 misprints, what is the probability that I spot exactly 𝑚𝑚 of them?
(ii) show that, if I spot exactly 𝑚𝑚 misprints, the probability that I have failed to spot exactly 𝑛𝑛
misprints is
(1 − 𝑝𝑝)𝑛𝑛 𝜆𝜆𝑛𝑛 −(1−𝑝𝑝)𝜆𝜆
e .
𝑛𝑛!

1992
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1992

STEP 3 1993
180 MINUTES

STEP 3 1993
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

There are 16 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.

You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1993 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q1]
The curve 𝑃𝑃 has the parametric equations
π π
𝑥𝑥 = sin 𝜃𝜃 , 𝑦𝑦 = cos 2𝜃𝜃 for − ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ .
2 2
Show that 𝑃𝑃 is part of the parabola 𝑦𝑦 = 1 − 2𝑥𝑥 2 and sketch 𝑃𝑃.
1
Show that the length of 𝑃𝑃 is √17 + 4 sinh−1 4.

Obtain the volume of the solid enclosed when 𝑃𝑃 is rotated through 2π radians about the line
𝑦𝑦 = −1.

[STEP 3, 1993Q2]
The curve 𝐶𝐶 has the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑦𝑦 3 = 3𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥.
(i) Show that there is no point of inflection on 𝐶𝐶. You may assume that the origin is not a point
of inflection.
(ii) The part of 𝐶𝐶 which lies in the first quadrant is a closed loop touching the axes at the origin.
By converting to polar coordinates, or otherwise, evaluate the area of this loop.

[STEP 3, 1993Q3]
The matrices 𝐀𝐀, 𝐁𝐁 and 𝐌𝐌 are given by 1993
[Link]
𝑎𝑎 0 0 1 𝑝𝑝 𝑞𝑞 1 3 2
2
𝐀𝐀 = �𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐 0� , 𝐁𝐁 = �0 1 𝑟𝑟 � , 𝐌𝐌 = �4 13 5�,
𝑑𝑑 𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓 0 0 1 3 8 7
where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, … , 𝑟𝑟 are real numbers. Given that 𝐌𝐌 = 𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀, show that 𝑎𝑎 = 1, 𝑏𝑏 = 4, 𝑐𝑐 = 1, 𝑑𝑑 = 3,
𝑒𝑒 = −1, 𝑓𝑓 = −2, 𝑝𝑝 = 3, 𝑞𝑞 = 2, 𝑟𝑟 = −3 gives the unique solution for 𝐀𝐀 and 𝐁𝐁. Evaluate 𝐀𝐀−1 and
𝐁𝐁 −1 .
Hence, or otherwise, solve the simultaneous equations
𝑥𝑥 + 3𝑦𝑦 + 2𝑧𝑧 = 7
4𝑥𝑥 + 13𝑦𝑦 + 5𝑧𝑧 = 18
3𝑥𝑥 + 8𝑦𝑦 + 7𝑧𝑧 = 25.

[STEP 3, 1993Q4]
Sum the following infinite series.
1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 2𝑛𝑛
(i) 1 + � � + � � + ⋯ + � � + ⋯.
3 2 5 2 2𝑛𝑛+1 2

(ii) 2 − 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 3 + 2𝑥𝑥 4 − ⋯ + 2𝑥𝑥 4𝑘𝑘 − 𝑥𝑥 4𝑘𝑘+1 − 𝑥𝑥 4𝑘𝑘+3 + ⋯ where |𝑥𝑥| < 1.

𝑟𝑟2𝑟𝑟−2
(iii) ∑∞
𝑟𝑟=2 .
3𝑟𝑟−1
2
(iv) ∑∞
𝑟𝑟=2 .
𝑟𝑟(𝑟𝑟 2 −1)

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1993

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q5]
The set 𝑆𝑆 consists of ordered pairs of complex numbers (𝑧𝑧1 , 𝑧𝑧2 ) and a binary operation ∘ on 𝑆𝑆
is defined by
(𝑧𝑧1 , 𝑧𝑧2 ) ∘ (𝑤𝑤1 , 𝑤𝑤2 ) = (𝑧𝑧1 𝑤𝑤1 − 𝑧𝑧2 𝑤𝑤2∗ , 𝑧𝑧1 𝑤𝑤2 + 𝑧𝑧2 𝑤𝑤1∗ ).
Show that the operation ∘ is associative and determine whether it is commutative. Evaluate
(𝑧𝑧, 0) ∘ (𝑤𝑤, 0), (𝑧𝑧, 0) ∘ (0, 𝑤𝑤), (0, 𝑧𝑧) ∘ (𝑤𝑤, 0) and (0, 𝑧𝑧) ∘ (0, 𝑤𝑤).
The set 𝑆𝑆1 is the subset of 𝑆𝑆 consisting of 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, … , 𝐻𝐻, where 𝐴𝐴 = (1, 0), 𝐵𝐵 = (0, 1), 𝐶𝐶 = (𝐢𝐢, 0),
𝐷𝐷 = (0, 𝐢𝐢), 𝐸𝐸 = (−1, 0), 𝐹𝐹 = (0, −1), 𝐺𝐺 = (−𝐢𝐢, 0) and 𝐻𝐻 = (0, −𝐢𝐢). Show that 𝑆𝑆1 is closed under
∘ and that it has an identity element. Determine the inverse and order of each element of 𝑆𝑆1 .
Show that 𝑆𝑆1 is a group under ∘.
[You are not required to compute the multiplication table in full.]
Show that {𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐸𝐸, 𝐹𝐹} is a subgroup of 𝑆𝑆1 and determine whether it is isomorphic to the group
0 1
generated by the 2 × 2 matrix � � under matrix multiplication.
−1 0

[STEP 3, 1993Q6]
The point in the Argand diagram representing the complex number 𝑧𝑧 lies on the circle with
centre 𝐾𝐾 and radius 𝑟𝑟, where 𝐾𝐾 represents the complex number 𝑘𝑘. Show that
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 ∗ − 𝑘𝑘𝑧𝑧 ∗ − 𝑘𝑘 ∗ 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ∗ − 𝑟𝑟 2 = 0.
1993
The point 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄1 and 𝑄𝑄2 represent the complex numbers 𝑧𝑧, 𝑤𝑤1 and 𝑤𝑤2 respectively. The point 𝑃𝑃
[Link]
lies on the circle with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 as diameter, where 𝑂𝑂 and 𝐴𝐴 represent 0 and 2𝐢𝐢 respectively. Given3
𝑧𝑧
that 𝑤𝑤1 = , find the equation of the locus 𝐿𝐿 of 𝑄𝑄1 in the terms of 𝑤𝑤1 and describe the
𝑧𝑧−1
geometrical form of 𝐿𝐿.
Given that 𝑤𝑤2 = 𝑧𝑧 ∗ , show that the locus of 𝑄𝑄2 is also 𝐿𝐿. Determine the positions of 𝑃𝑃 for which
𝑄𝑄1 coincides with 𝑄𝑄2 .

[STEP 3, 1993Q7]
The real numbers 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 satisfy the simultaneous equations
sinh(2𝑥𝑥) = cosh 𝑦𝑦 and sinh(2𝑦𝑦) = 2 cosh 𝑥𝑥.
Show that sinh2 𝑦𝑦 is a root of the equation
4𝑡𝑡 3 + 4𝑡𝑡 2 − 4𝑡𝑡 − 1 = 0
and demonstrate that this gives at most one valid solution for 𝑦𝑦. Show that the relevant value
of 𝑡𝑡 lies between 0.7 and 0.8, and use an iterative process to find 𝑡𝑡 to 6 decimal places.
Find 𝑦𝑦 and hence find 𝑥𝑥, checking your answers and stating the final answers to four decimal
places.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1993 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q8]
A square pyramid has its base vertices at the points 𝐴𝐴(𝑎𝑎, 0, 0) , 𝐵𝐵(0, 𝑎𝑎, 0) , 𝐶𝐶(−𝑎𝑎, 0, 0) and
𝐷𝐷(0, −𝑎𝑎, 0), and its vertex at 𝐸𝐸(0, 0, 𝑎𝑎). The point 𝑃𝑃 lies on 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 with 𝑥𝑥-coordinate 𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆, where 0 <
𝜆𝜆 < 1, and the point 𝑄𝑄 lies on 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 with 𝑥𝑥-coordinate −𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇, where 0 < 𝜇𝜇 < 1. The plane 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
cuts 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 at 𝑅𝑅 and the 𝑦𝑦-coordinate of 𝑅𝑅 is −𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾. Prove that
𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆
𝛾𝛾 = .
𝜆𝜆 + 𝜇𝜇 − 𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆
Show that the quadrilateral 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 cannot be a parallelogram.

[STEP 3, 1993Q9]
For the real numbers 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , 𝑎𝑎3 , …,
(i) prove that 𝑎𝑎12 + 𝑎𝑎22 ≥ 2𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎2 ,
(ii) prove that 𝑎𝑎12 + 𝑎𝑎22 + 𝑎𝑎32 ≥ 𝑎𝑎2 𝑎𝑎3 + 𝑎𝑎3 𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎2 ,
(iii) prove that 3(𝑎𝑎12 + 𝑎𝑎22 + 𝑎𝑎32 + 𝑎𝑎42 ) ≥ 2(𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎3 + 𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎4 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑎𝑎3 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑎𝑎4 + 𝑎𝑎3 𝑎𝑎4 ),
(iv) state and prove a generalisation of (iii) to the case of 𝑛𝑛 real numbers,
(v) prove that
𝑛𝑛 2
2𝑛𝑛
�� 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 � ≥ � 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 𝑎𝑎𝑗𝑗 ,
𝑛𝑛 − 1
𝑖𝑖=1 1993
[Link]
where the latter sum is taken over all pairs (𝑖𝑖, 𝑗𝑗) with 1 ≤ 𝑖𝑖 < 𝑗𝑗 ≤ 𝑛𝑛. 4

[STEP 3, 1993Q10]
The transformation 𝑇𝑇 of the point 𝑃𝑃 in the 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 plane to the point 𝑃𝑃′ is constructed as follows:
Lines are drawn through 𝑃𝑃 parallel to the lines 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 and 𝑦𝑦 = −𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 to cut the line 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 at
𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 respectively, 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑘𝑘 being given constant. 𝑃𝑃′ is the fourth vertex of the parallelogram
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃′𝑅𝑅.
Show that if 𝑃𝑃 is (𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑦𝑦1 ) then 𝑄𝑄 is
𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑦𝑦1 𝑘𝑘(𝑚𝑚𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑦𝑦1 )
� , �.
𝑚𝑚 − 𝑘𝑘 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑘𝑘
Obtain the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃′ in terms of 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑦𝑦1 , 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑘𝑘 , and express 𝑇𝑇 as a matrix
transformation. Show that areas are transformed under 𝑇𝑇 into areas of the same magnitude.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1993

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q11]
[In this question, all gravitational forces are to be neglected.] A rigid frame is constructed from
12 equal uniform rods, each of length 𝑎𝑎 and mass 𝑚𝑚, forming the edges of a cube. Three of the
edges are 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 , 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 , and the vertices opposite 𝑂𝑂 , 𝐴𝐴 , 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are 𝑂𝑂′ , 𝐴𝐴′ , 𝐵𝐵′ and 𝐶𝐶′
respectively. Forces act along the lines as follows, in the directions indicated by the order of
the letters:

2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝐴𝐴𝐶𝐶 ′ , √2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝑂𝑂′ 𝐴𝐴,
√2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴′ , 2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝐶𝐶 ′ 𝐵𝐵, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 along 𝐴𝐴′ 𝐶𝐶.
Initially the frame is at rest and there are no other forces acting on it.
(i) The frame is freely pivoted at 𝑂𝑂. Show that the direction of the line about which it will start
1
to rotate is �1� with respect to axes along 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 respectively.
2
2𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 2
(ii) Show that the moment of inertia of the rod 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 about the axis 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂′ is and about a
9
𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 2
parallel axis through its mid-point is . Hence find the moment of inertia of 𝐵𝐵’𝐶𝐶 about
18
14𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎 2
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂′ and show that the moment of inertia of the frame about 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂′ is . If the frame is
3
freely pivoted about the line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂′ and the forces continue to act along the specified lines,
find the initial angular acceleration of the frame.

[STEP 3, 1993Q12] 1993

[Link]

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is a horizontal line with 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 𝑎𝑎 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 6𝑎𝑎. There are fixed smooth pegs at 5𝐵𝐵
and 𝐶𝐶. A uniform string of natural length 2𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 is stretched from 𝐴𝐴
to 𝐷𝐷, passing over the pegs at 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to the midpoint 𝑃𝑃 of the
𝑎𝑎
string. When the system is in equilibrium, 𝑃𝑃 is a distance below 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵. Evaluate 𝑘𝑘.
4

The particle is pulled down to a point 𝑄𝑄, which is at a distance 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 below the mid-point of 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵,
and is released form rest. 𝑃𝑃 rises to a point 𝑅𝑅, which is at a distance 3𝑎𝑎 above 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵. Show that
2𝑝𝑝2 − 𝑝𝑝 − 17 = 0.
Show also that the tension in the strings is less when the particle is at 𝑅𝑅 than when the particle
is at 𝑄𝑄.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1993 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q13]

A uniform circular disc with radius 𝑎𝑎, mass 4𝑚𝑚 and centre 𝑂𝑂 is freely mounted on a fixed
horizontal axis which is perpendicular to its plane and passes through 𝑂𝑂. A uniform heavy
chain 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 of length (4 + 𝜋𝜋)𝑎𝑎, mass (4 + 𝜋𝜋)𝑚𝑚 and negligible thickness is hung over the rim of the
disc as shown in the diagram: 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 are the points of the chain at the same level as 𝑂𝑂. The
contact between the chain and the rim of the disc is sufficiently rough to prevent slipping.
Initially, the system is at rest with 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 2𝑎𝑎. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to the chain
at 𝑃𝑃 and the system is released. By considering the energy of the system, show that when 𝑃𝑃 has
descended a distance 𝑥𝑥, its speed 𝑣𝑣 is given by
(𝜋𝜋 + 7)𝑎𝑎𝑣𝑣 2 = 2𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎).
By considering the part 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 of the chain as a body of variable mass, show that when 𝑆𝑆 reaches
𝑅𝑅 the tension in the chain at 𝑄𝑄 is
5𝜋𝜋 − 2
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. 1993
𝜋𝜋 + 7 [Link]

[STEP 3, 1993Q14]
A particle rests at a point 𝐴𝐴 on a horizontal table and is joined to a point 𝑂𝑂 on the table by a taut
inextensible string of length 𝑐𝑐. The particle is projected vertically upwards at a speed 64�6𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔.
It next strikes the table at a point 𝐵𝐵 and rebounds. The coefficient of restitution for any impact
1
between the particle and the table is 2 . After rebounding at 𝐵𝐵 , the particle will rebound
alternately at 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 until the string becomes slack. Show that when the string becomes slack
𝑐𝑐
the particle is at height above the table.
2

Determine whether the first rebound between 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 is nearer to 𝐴𝐴 or to 𝐵𝐵.

[STEP 3, 1993Q15]
The probability of throwing a head with a certain coin is 𝑝𝑝 and the probability of throwing a
tail is 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝. The coin is thrown until at least two heads and at least two tails have been
thrown; this happens when the coin has been thrown 𝑁𝑁 times. Write down an expression for
the probability that 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑛𝑛.
Show that the expectation of 𝑁𝑁 is
1
2� − 1 − 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝�.
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1993

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1993Q16]
The time taken for me to set an acceptable examination question it 𝑇𝑇 hours. The distribution of
𝑇𝑇 is a truncated normal distribution with probability density 𝑓𝑓 where
1 1 𝑡𝑡 − 𝜎𝜎 2
exp �− � � � for 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 0
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = �𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘√2𝜋𝜋 2 𝜎𝜎
0 for 𝑡𝑡 < 0.
Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡). Show that 𝑘𝑘 is approximately 0.841 and obtain the mean of 𝑇𝑇 as a
multiple of 𝜎𝜎.
Over a period of years, I find that the mean setting time is 3 hours.
(i) Find the approximate probability that none of the 16 questions on next year’s paper will
take more than 4 hours to set.
(ii) Given that a particular question is unsatisfactory after 2 hours work, find the probability
that it will still be unacceptable after a further 2 hours work.

1993
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 1993 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1993
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1993

STEP 3 1994
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1994
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Your final mark will be based on the six questions for which you gain the highest marks.
You are advised to concentrate on no more than six questions. Little credit will be given
for fragmentary answers.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1994 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1994Q1]
Calculate
𝑥𝑥
� sech 𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡.
0

Find the reduction formula involving 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 and 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛−2 , where

𝑥𝑥
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � sech𝑛𝑛 𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡
0

and, hence or otherwise, find 𝐼𝐼5 and 𝐼𝐼6 .

[STEP 3, 1994Q2]
(i) By setting 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 −1 , find the solutions of
𝑥𝑥 4 + 10𝑥𝑥 3 + 26𝑥𝑥 2 + 10𝑥𝑥 + 1 = 0.
(ii) Solve
𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑥𝑥 3 − 10𝑥𝑥 2 − 4𝑥𝑥 + 16 = 0.

[STEP 3, 1994Q3]
1994
[Link]
Describe geometrically the possible intersections of a plane with a sphere.
2
Let 𝑃𝑃1 and 𝑃𝑃2 be the planes with equations
3𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 − 1 = 0,
𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 + 1 = 0,
respectively, and let 𝑆𝑆1 and 𝑆𝑆2 be the spheres with equations
𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 = 7,
𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 − 6𝑦𝑦 − 4𝑧𝑧 + 10 = 0,
respectively. Let 𝐶𝐶1 be the intersection of 𝑃𝑃1 and 𝑆𝑆1 , let 𝐶𝐶2 be the intersection of 𝑃𝑃2 and 𝑆𝑆2 and
let 𝐿𝐿 be the intersection of 𝑃𝑃1 and 𝑃𝑃2 . Find the points where 𝐿𝐿 meets each of 𝑆𝑆1 and 𝑆𝑆2 .
Determine, giving your reasons, whether the circles 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐶𝐶2 are linked.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1994

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1994Q4]
Find the two solutions of the differential equation

d𝑦𝑦 2
� � = 4𝑦𝑦
d𝑥𝑥
which pass through the point (𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 2 ), where 𝑏𝑏 ≠ 0.
Find two distinct points (𝑎𝑎1 , 1) and (𝑎𝑎2 , 1) such that one of the solutions through each of them
also passes through the origin. Show that the graphs of these two solutions coincide and sketch
their common graph, together with the other solutions through (𝑎𝑎1 , 1) and (𝑎𝑎2 , 1).
Now sketch sufficient members of the family of solutions (for varying 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏) to indicate the
general behaviour. Use your sketch to identify a common tangent, and comment briefly on its
relevance to the differential equation.

[STEP 3, 1994Q5]
The function 𝑓𝑓 is given by 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = sin−1 𝑥𝑥 for −1 < 𝑥𝑥 < 1. Prove that
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑓𝑓 ′′ (𝑥𝑥) − 𝑥𝑥𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) = 0.
Prove also that
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑓𝑓 𝑛𝑛+2 (𝑥𝑥) − (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑓𝑓 𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) − 𝑛𝑛2 𝑓𝑓 𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = 0,
for all 𝑛𝑛 > 0, where 𝑓𝑓 𝑛𝑛 denotes the 𝑛𝑛th derivative of 𝑓𝑓. Hence express 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) as a Maclaurin
series. 1994
[Link]

The function 𝑔𝑔 is given by 3

1 + 𝑥𝑥
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = ln � ,
1 − 𝑥𝑥

for −1 < 𝑥𝑥 < 1. Write down a power series expansion for 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥), and show that the coefficient
of 𝑥𝑥 2𝑛𝑛+1 is greater than that in the expansion of 𝑓𝑓, for each 𝑛𝑛 > 0.

[STEP 3, 1994Q6]
The four points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶, 𝐷𝐷 in the Argand diagram (complex plane) correspond to the complex
π
numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 respectively. The point 𝑃𝑃1 is mapped to 𝑃𝑃2 by rotating about 𝐴𝐴 through
2
π
radians. Then 𝑃𝑃2 is mapped to 𝑃𝑃3 by rotating about 𝐵𝐵 through radians, 𝑃𝑃3 is mapped to 𝑃𝑃4 by
2
π π
rotating about 𝐶𝐶 through radians and 𝑃𝑃4 is mapped to 𝑃𝑃5 by rotating about 𝐷𝐷 through
2 2
radians, each rotation being in the positive sense. If 𝑧𝑧𝑖𝑖 is the complex number corresponding
to 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 , find 𝑧𝑧5 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 and 𝑧𝑧1 .
Show that 𝑃𝑃5 will coincide with 𝑃𝑃1 , irrespective of the choice of the latter if, and only if, 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐 =
𝐢𝐢(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑) and interpret this condition geometrically.
The points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are now chosen to be distinct points on the unit circle and the angle of
rotation is changed to 𝜃𝜃, where 𝜃𝜃 ≠ 0, on each occasion. Find the necessary and sufficient
condition on 𝜃𝜃 and the points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 for 𝑃𝑃4 always to coincide with 𝑃𝑃1 .

STEP 3 Past Paper 1994 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1994Q7]
Let 𝑆𝑆3 be the group of permutations of three objects and 𝑍𝑍6 be the group of integers under
addition modulo 6. List all the elements of each group, stating the order of each element. State,
with reasons, whether 𝑆𝑆3 is isomorphic with 𝑍𝑍6 .
π𝐢𝐢
Let 𝐶𝐶6 be the group of 6th roots of unity. That is, 𝐶𝐶6 = {1, 𝛼𝛼, 𝛼𝛼 2 , 𝛼𝛼 3 , 𝛼𝛼 4 , 𝛼𝛼 5 } where 𝛼𝛼 = e 3 and
the group operation is complex multiplicaion. Prove that 𝐶𝐶6 is isomorphic with 𝑍𝑍6 . Is there any
(multiplicative or additive) subgroup of the complex numbers which is isomorphic with 𝑆𝑆3 ?
Give a reason for your answer.

[STEP 3, 1994Q8]
Let 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑, 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 be real numbers. By considering the determinant of the matrix
product
𝑧𝑧1 𝑧𝑧2 𝑧𝑧3 𝑧𝑧4
�−𝑧𝑧 ∗ 𝑧𝑧1∗ � �−𝑧𝑧4∗ 𝑧𝑧3∗ �,
2

where 𝑧𝑧1 , 𝑧𝑧2 , 𝑧𝑧3 and 𝑧𝑧4 are suitably chosen complex numbers, find expressions 𝐿𝐿1 , 𝐿𝐿2 , 𝐿𝐿3 and
𝐿𝐿4 , each of which is linear in 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑 and also linear in 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠, such that
(𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 + 𝑐𝑐 2 + 𝑑𝑑2 )(𝑝𝑝2 + 𝑞𝑞 2 + 𝑟𝑟 2 + 𝑠𝑠 2 ) = 𝐿𝐿21 + 𝐿𝐿22 + 𝐿𝐿23 + 𝐿𝐿24 .

1994
[Link]

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1994

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1994Q9]

A smooth, axially symmetric bowl has its vertical cross-sections determined by 𝑠𝑠 = 2�𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘,
where 𝑠𝑠 is the arc-length measured from its lowest point 𝑉𝑉, and 𝑦𝑦 is the height above 𝑉𝑉. A
particle is released from rest at a point on the surface at a height ℎ above 𝑉𝑉. Explain why

d𝑠𝑠 2
� � + 2𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
d𝑡𝑡
is constant.
Show that the time for the particle to reach 𝑉𝑉 is

𝑘𝑘
π� .
2𝑔𝑔

Two elastic particles of mass 𝑚𝑚 and 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 , where 𝛼𝛼 < 1 , are released simultaneously from
opposite sides of the bowl at heights 𝛼𝛼 2 ℎ and ℎ respectively. If the coefficient of restitution
between the particles is 𝛼𝛼, describe the subsequent motion.

[STEP 3, 1994Q10]
The island of Gammaland is totally flat and subject to a constant wind of 𝑤𝑤 kh-1, blowing from
the West. Its southernmost shore stretches almost indefinitely, due east and west, from1994 the
coastal city of Alphaport. A novice pilot is making her first solo flight from Alphaport [Link]
the
town of Betaville which lies north-east of Alphaport. Her instructor has given her the correct5
heading to reach Betaville, flying at the plane's recommended airspeed of 𝑣𝑣 kh-1, where 𝑣𝑣 > 𝑤𝑤.
On reaching Betaport the pilot returns with the opposite heading to that of the outward flight
and, so featureless is Gammaland, that she only realises her error as she crosses the coast with
Alphaport nowhere in sight. Assuming that she then turns West along the coast, and that her
outward flight took 𝑡𝑡 hours, show that her return flight takes
𝑣𝑣 + 𝑤𝑤
� � 𝑡𝑡 hours.
𝑣𝑣 − 𝑤𝑤
If Betaville is 𝑑𝑑 kilometres from Alphaport, show that, with the correct heading, the return
flight should have taken

√2𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝑡𝑡 + hours.
𝑣𝑣 2 − 𝑤𝑤 2

STEP 3 Past Paper 1994 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1994Q11]
A step-ladder has two sections 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 , each of length 4𝑎𝑎 , smoothly hinged at 𝐴𝐴 and
𝑎𝑎
connected by a light elastic rope 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷, of natural length and modulus 𝑊𝑊, where 𝐷𝐷 is on 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐸𝐸
4
is on 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑎𝑎. The section 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, which contains the steps, is uniform and of weight
𝑊𝑊 and the weight of 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is negligible.
The step-ladder rests on a smooth horizontal floor and a man of weight 4𝑊𝑊 carefully ascends
it to stand on a rung distant 𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽 from the end of the ladder resting on the floor. Find the height
above the floor of the rung on which the man is standing when 𝛽𝛽 is the maximum value at which
equilibrium is possible.

1994
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1994

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1994Q12]
In certain forms of Tennis two players 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 serve alternate games. Player 𝐴𝐴 has probability
𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 of winning a game in which she serves and probability 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 of winning a game in which player
𝐵𝐵 serves. Player 𝐵𝐵 has probability 𝑞𝑞𝐵𝐵 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 of winning a game in which she serves and
probability 𝑞𝑞𝐴𝐴 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 of winning a game in which player 𝐴𝐴 serves. In Shortened Tennis the
first player to lead by 2 games wins the match. Find the probability 𝑃𝑃short that 𝐴𝐴 wins a
Shortened Tennis match in which she serves first and show that it is the same as if 𝐵𝐵 serves
first.
In Standard Tennis the first player to lead by 2 or more games after 4 or more games have been
played wins the match. Show that the probability that the match is decided in 4 games is
𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴2 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵2 + 𝑞𝑞𝐴𝐴2 𝑞𝑞𝐵𝐵2 + 2(𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 + 𝑞𝑞𝐴𝐴 𝑞𝑞𝐵𝐵 )(𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 𝑞𝑞𝐵𝐵 + 𝑞𝑞𝐴𝐴 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 ).
If 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 = 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 = 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞𝐴𝐴 = 𝑞𝑞𝐵𝐵 = 𝑞𝑞 , find the probability 𝑃𝑃stan that 𝐴𝐴 wins a Standard Tennis
match in which she serves first. Show that
𝑝𝑝2 𝑞𝑞 2 (𝑝𝑝 − 𝑞𝑞)
𝑃𝑃stan − 𝑃𝑃short = .
𝑝𝑝2 + 𝑞𝑞 2

[STEP 3, 1994Q13]
During his performance a trapeze artist is supported by two identical ropes, either of which
can bear his weight. Each rope is such that the time, in hours of performance, before it fails1994is
[Link]
exponentially distributed, independently of the other, with probability density function 7
𝜆𝜆exp(−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆) for 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 0 (and 0 for 𝑡𝑡 < 0), for some 𝜆𝜆 > 0. A particular rope has already been in
use for 𝑡𝑡0 hours of performance. Find the distribution for the length of time the artist can
continue to use it before it fails. Interpret and comment upon your result.
Before going on tour the artist insists that the management purchase two new ropes of the
above type. Show that the probability density function of the time until both ropes fail is
2𝜆𝜆e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 �1 − e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 � if 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 0,
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = �
0 otherwise.
If each performance lasts for ℎ hours, find the probability that both ropes fail during the 𝑛𝑛th
performance. Show that the probability that both ropes will fail during the same performance
𝜆𝜆ℎ
is tanh � �.
2

[STEP 3, 1994Q14]
Three points, 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅, are independently randomly chosen on the perimeter of a circle.
Prove that the probability that at least one of the angles of the triangle 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 will exceed 𝑘𝑘π is
1 1 1
3(1 − 𝑘𝑘)2 if ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 1. Find the probability if ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ .
2 3 2

STEP 3 Past Paper 1994 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1994
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1994

STEP 3 1995
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1995
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1995 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1995Q1]
Find the simultaneous solutions of the three linear equations
𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑎𝑎2
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 1
2
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝑏𝑏
for all possible real values of 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏.

[STEP 3, 1995Q2]
If
a 1 1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛+2 (𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥)2 d𝑥𝑥,
0

π𝑎𝑎 2
show that 𝐼𝐼0 = 8
.

Show that (2𝑛𝑛 + 4)𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑎𝑎𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛−1 and hence evaluate 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 .

[STEP 3, 1995Q3]
What is the general solution of the differential equation 1995
2 [Link]
d 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
+ 2𝑘𝑘 + 𝑥𝑥 = 0 2
d𝑡𝑡 2 d𝑡𝑡
for each of the cases: (i) 𝑘𝑘 > 1; (ii) 𝑘𝑘 = 1; (iii) 0 < 𝑘𝑘 < 1?
In case(iii) the equation represents damped simple harmonic motion with damping factor 𝑘𝑘.
Let 𝑥𝑥(0) = 0 and let 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑥𝑥2 , … , 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 , … be the sequence of successive maxima and minima, so that
𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1
if 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 is a maximum then 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 is the next minimum. Show that � � takes a value 𝛼𝛼 which is
𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛
independent of 𝑛𝑛, and that
(ln 𝛼𝛼)2
𝑘𝑘 2 = .
π2 + (ln 𝛼𝛼)2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1995

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1995Q4]
Let
𝑛𝑛

𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝜃𝜃) = � cos 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

𝑘𝑘=0

and
𝑛𝑛

𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 (𝜃𝜃) = � sin 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 ,

𝑘𝑘=0

where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer and 0 < 𝜃𝜃 < 2π. Show that

1 1
cos � 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛� sin �2 (𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝜃𝜃�
𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝜃𝜃) = 2 ,
1
sin �2 𝜃𝜃�

and obtain the corresponding expression for 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 (𝜃𝜃).

Hence, or otherwise, show that for 0 < 𝜃𝜃 < 2π,
1 1
�𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝜃𝜃) − � ≤ .
2 1
2 sin � 𝜃𝜃�
2

[STEP 3, 1995Q5]
1995
Show that 𝑦𝑦 = sin2(𝑚𝑚 sin−1 𝑥𝑥) satisfies the differential equation [Link]

3
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑦𝑦 2 = 𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦1 + 2𝑚𝑚2 (1 − 2𝑦𝑦),
and deduce that, for all 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+2 = (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+1 + (𝑛𝑛2 − 4𝑚𝑚2 )𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 ,
where 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 denotes the 𝑛𝑛th derivative of 𝑦𝑦.
Derive the Maclaurin series for 𝑦𝑦, making it clear what the general term is.

[STEP 3, 1995Q6]
The variable non-zero complex number 𝑧𝑧 is such that
|𝑧𝑧 − 𝐢𝐢| = 1.
1
Find the modulus of 𝑧𝑧 when its argument is 𝜃𝜃. Find also the modulus and argument of in
𝑧𝑧
1
terms of 𝜃𝜃 and show in an Argand diagram the loci of points which represent 𝑧𝑧 and .
𝑧𝑧
1
Find the locus 𝐶𝐶 in the Argand diagram such that 𝑤𝑤 ∈ 𝐶𝐶 if, and only if, the real part of is −1.
𝑤𝑤

STEP 3 Past Paper 1995 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1995Q7]
Consider the following sets with the usual definition of multiplication appropriate to each. In
each case you may assume that the multiplication is associative. In each case state, giving
adequate reasons, whether or not the set is a group:
(i) the complex numbers of unit modulus.
(ii) the integers modulo 4.
(iii) the matrices
cos 𝜃𝜃 − sin 𝜃𝜃
𝑀𝑀(𝜃𝜃) = � �,
sin 𝜃𝜃 cos 𝜃𝜃
where 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃 < 2π.
(iv) the integers 1, 3, 5, 7 modulo 8.
(v) the 2 × 2 matrices all of whose entries are integers.
(vi) the integers 1, 2, 3, 4 modulo 5.
In the case of each pair of groups above state, with reasons, whether or not they are isomorphic.

[STEP 3, 1995Q8]
A plane π in 3-dimensional space is given by the vector equation 𝐫𝐫 ∙ 𝐧𝐧 � = 𝑝𝑝, where 𝐧𝐧
� is a unit
vector and 𝑝𝑝 is a non-negative real number. If 𝐱𝐱 is the position vector of a general point 𝑋𝑋, find
the equation of the normal to π through 𝑋𝑋 and the perpendicular distance of 𝑋𝑋 from π. 1995
[Link]

The unit circles 𝐶𝐶𝑖𝑖 , 𝑖𝑖 = 1,2, with centres 𝐫𝐫𝑖𝑖 , lie in the planes π𝑖𝑖 given by 𝐫𝐫 ∙ 𝐧𝐧�𝚤𝚤 = 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖 , where the 𝐧𝐧
4�𝚤𝚤
are unit vectors, and 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖 are non-negative real numbers. Prove that there is a sphere whose
surface contains both circles only if there is a real number 𝜆𝜆 such that
�1 = 𝐫𝐫2 ± 𝜆𝜆𝐧𝐧
𝐫𝐫1 + 𝜆𝜆𝐧𝐧 �. 2

Hence, or otherwise, deduce the necessary conditions that

(𝐫𝐫1 − 𝐫𝐫2 ) ∙ (𝐧𝐧
�1 × 𝐧𝐧
�) 2 =0

and that
�1 ∙ 𝐫𝐫2 )2 = (𝑝𝑝2 − 𝐧𝐧
(𝑝𝑝1 − 𝐧𝐧 �2 ∙ 𝐫𝐫1 )2 .
Interpret each of these two conditions geometrically.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1995

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1995Q9]
A thin circular disc of mass 𝑚𝑚, radius 𝑟𝑟 and with its centre of mass at its centre 𝐶𝐶 can rotate
freely in a vertical plane about a fixed horizontal axis through a point 𝑂𝑂 of its circumference. A
particle 𝑃𝑃, also of mass 𝑚𝑚, is attached to the circumference of the disc so that the angle 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is
π
2𝛼𝛼, where 𝛼𝛼 ≤ .
2

(i) In the position of stable equilibrium 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 makes an angle 𝛽𝛽 with the vertical. Prove that
sin 2𝛼𝛼
tan 𝛽𝛽 = .
2 − cos 2𝛼𝛼
𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌
(ii) The density of the disc at a point distant 𝑥𝑥 from 𝐶𝐶 is . Show that its moment of inertia
𝑟𝑟
8𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟 2
about the horizontal axis through 𝑂𝑂 is .
5

(iii) The mid-point of 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 is 𝑄𝑄. The disc is held at rest with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 horizontal and 𝐶𝐶 lower than 𝑃𝑃
and it is then released. Show that the speed 𝑣𝑣 with which 𝐶𝐶 is moving when 𝑃𝑃 passes
vertically below 𝑂𝑂 is given by
15𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 sin 𝛼𝛼
𝑣𝑣 2 = .
2(2 + 5 sin2 𝛼𝛼)
Find the maximum value of 𝑣𝑣 2 as 𝛼𝛼 is varied.

1995
[STEP 3, 1995Q10] [Link]

5
A cannon is situated at the bottom of a plane inclined at angle 𝛽𝛽 to the horizontal. A (small)
cannon ball is fired from the cannon at an initial speed 𝑢𝑢. Ignoring air resistance, find the angle
of firing which will maximize the distance up the plane travelled by the cannon ball and show
that in this case the ball will land at a distance
𝑢𝑢2
𝑔𝑔(1 + sin 𝛽𝛽)
from the cannon.

[STEP 3, 1995Q11]

A ship is sailing due west at 𝑉𝑉 knots while a plane, with an airspeed of 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 knots, where 𝑘𝑘 > √2,
patrols so that it is always to the north west of the ship. If the wind in the area is blowing from
north to south at 𝑉𝑉 knots and the pilot is instructed to return to the ship every thirty minutes,
how long will her outward flight last?
Assume that the maximum distance of the plane from the ship during the above patrol was 𝑑𝑑𝑤𝑤
miles. If the air now becomes dead calm, and the pilot's orders are maintained, show that the
𝑑𝑑𝑤𝑤
ratio 𝑑𝑑𝑐𝑐
of 𝑑𝑑𝑤𝑤 to the new maximum distance, 𝑑𝑑𝑐𝑐 miles, of the plane from the ship is

𝑘𝑘 2 − 2
�4𝑘𝑘 2 − 2.
2𝑘𝑘(𝑘𝑘 2 − 1)

STEP 3 Past Paper 1995 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1995Q12]
The random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 are independently normally distributed with means 0 and
variances 1. Show that the joint probability density function for (𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌) is
1 −1�𝑥𝑥2 +𝑦𝑦2 �
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) = e 2 − ∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞, −∞ < 𝑦𝑦 < ∞.
2π
If (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) are the coordinates, referred to rectangular axes, of a point in the plane, explain what
is meant by saying that this density is radially symmetrical.
The random variables 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑉𝑉 have a joint probability density function which is radially
symmetrical (in the above sense). By considering the straight line with equation 𝑈𝑈 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, or
otherwise, show that
𝑈𝑈
P � < 𝑘𝑘� = 2P(𝑈𝑈 < 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, 𝑉𝑉 > 0).
𝑉𝑉
𝑈𝑈
Hence, or otherwise, show that the probability density function of is
𝑉𝑉

1
𝑔𝑔(𝑘𝑘) = − ∞ < 𝑘𝑘 < ∞.
π(1 + 𝑘𝑘 2 )

[STEP 3, 1995Q13]
A message of 10𝑘𝑘 binary digits is sent along a fibre optic cable with high probabilities 𝑝𝑝0 1995 and
[Link]
𝑝𝑝1 that the digits 0 and 1, respectively, are received correctly. If the probability of a digit in the
6
original message being a 1 is 𝛼𝛼 , find the probability that the entire message is received
correctly.
Find the probability 𝛽𝛽 that a randomly chosen digit in the message is received as a 1 and show
that 𝛽𝛽 = 𝛼𝛼 if, and only if,
𝑞𝑞0
𝛼𝛼 = ,
𝑞𝑞1 + 𝑞𝑞0
where 𝑞𝑞0 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝0 and 𝑞𝑞1 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝1 . If this condition is satisfied and the received message
consists entirely of zeros, what is the probability that it is correct?
1
If now 𝑞𝑞0 = 𝑞𝑞1 = 𝑞𝑞 and 𝛼𝛼 = , find the approximate value of 𝑞𝑞 which will ensure that a message
2
of one million binary digits has a fifty-fifty chance of being received entirely correctly.
The probability of error 𝑞𝑞 is proportional to the square of the length of the cable. Initially the
length is such that the probability of a message of one million binary bits, among which 0 and
1
1 are equally likely, being received correctly is . What would this probability become if a
2
booster station were installed at its mid-point, assuming that the booster station re-transmits
the received version of the message, and assuming that terms of order 𝑞𝑞 2 may be ignored?

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1995

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1995Q14]
A candidate finishes examination questions in time 𝑇𝑇, where 𝑇𝑇 has probability density function
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = 𝑡𝑡e−𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 0,
the probabilities for the various questions being independent. Find the moment generating
function of 𝑇𝑇 and hence find the moment generating function for the total time 𝑈𝑈 taken to finish
two such questions. Show that the probability density function for 𝑈𝑈 is
1
𝑔𝑔(𝑢𝑢) = 𝑢𝑢3 e−𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢 ≥ 0.
6
Find the probability density function for the total time taken to answer 𝑛𝑛 such questions.

1995
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 1995 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1995
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1995

STEP 3 1996
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1996
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1996 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1996Q1]
Define cosh 𝑥𝑥 and sinh 𝑥𝑥 in terms of exponentials and prove, from your definitions, that
cosh4 𝑥𝑥 − sinh4 𝑥𝑥 = cosh 2𝑥𝑥
and
1 3
cosh4 𝑥𝑥 + sinh4 𝑥𝑥 = cosh 4𝑥𝑥 + .
4 4
Find 𝑎𝑎0 , 𝑎𝑎1 , … , 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 in terms of 𝑛𝑛 such that
cosh𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎0 + 𝑎𝑎1 cosh 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎2 cosh 2𝑥𝑥 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 cosh 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛.
Hence, or otherwise, find expressions for cosh2m 𝑥𝑥 − sinh2𝑚𝑚 𝑥𝑥 and cosh2m 𝑥𝑥 + sinh2𝑚𝑚 𝑥𝑥 , in
terms of cosh 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, where 𝑘𝑘 = 0, … , 2𝑚𝑚.

[STEP 3, 1996Q2]
For all values of 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏, either solve the simultaneous equations
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 2
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑧𝑧 = 2
2𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧 = 2𝑏𝑏
or prove that they have no solution. 1996
[Link]

2
[STEP 3, 1996Q3]
Find
𝜃𝜃
1
� d𝑥𝑥,
0 1 − 𝑎𝑎 cos 𝑥𝑥
where 0 < 𝜃𝜃 < π and −1 < 𝑎𝑎 < 1.
Hence show that
π
2 1 2 2 + 𝑎𝑎
� d𝑥𝑥 = tan−1 � ,
0 2 − 𝑎𝑎 cos 𝑥𝑥 √4 − 𝑎𝑎 2 2 − 𝑎𝑎

and also that

3π
4 1 π
� d𝑥𝑥 = .
0 √2 + cos 𝑥𝑥 2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1996

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1996Q4]
Find the integers 𝑘𝑘 satisfying the inequality 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 2(𝑘𝑘 − 2).
Given that 𝑁𝑁 is a strictly positive integer consider the problem of finding strictly positive
integers whose sum is 𝑁𝑁 and whose product is as large as possible. Call this largest possible
product 𝑃𝑃(𝑁𝑁). Show that 𝑃𝑃(5) = 2 × 3, 𝑃𝑃(6) = 32 , 𝑃𝑃(7) = 22 × 3, 𝑃𝑃(8) = 2 × 32 and 𝑃𝑃(9) =
33 .
Find 𝑃𝑃(1000) explaining your reasoning carefully.

[STEP 3, 1996Q5]
Show, using de Moivre’s Theorem, or otherwise, that
𝑡𝑡(𝑡𝑡 6 − 21𝑡𝑡 4 + 35𝑡𝑡 2 − 7)
tan 7𝜃𝜃 = ,
7𝑡𝑡 6 − 35𝑡𝑡 4 + 21𝑡𝑡 2 − 1
where 𝑡𝑡 = tan 𝜃𝜃.
(i) By considering the equation tan 7𝜃𝜃 = 0, or otherwise, obtain a cubic equation with integer
coefficients whose roots are
π 2π 3π
tan2 � � , tan2 � � and tan2 � �
7 7 7
and deduce the value of
π 2π 3π 1996
tan � � tan � � tan � �.
7 7 7 [Link]

3
(ii) Find, without using a calculator, the value of
π 3π 5π
tan2 � � + tan2 � � + tan2 � �.
14 14 14

[STEP 3, 1996Q6]
(i) Let 𝑆𝑆 be the set of matrices of the form
𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎
� �,
𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎
where 𝑎𝑎 is any real non-zero number. Show that 𝑆𝑆 is closed under matrix multiplication
and, further, that 𝑆𝑆 is a group under matrix multiplication.
(ii) Let 𝐺𝐺 be a set of 𝑛𝑛 × 𝑛𝑛 matrices which is a group under matrix multiplication, with identity
element 𝐄𝐄. By considering equations of the form 𝐁𝐁𝐁𝐁 = 𝐃𝐃 for suitable elements 𝐁𝐁, 𝐂𝐂 and 𝐃𝐃
of 𝐺𝐺 , show that if a given element 𝐀𝐀 of 𝐺𝐺 is a singular matrix (i.e. det 𝐀𝐀 = 0), then all
elements of 𝐺𝐺 are singular. Give, with justification, an example of such a group of singular
matrices in the case 𝑛𝑛 = 3.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1996 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1996Q7]
(i) If 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧 = 𝛼𝛼, 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 = 𝛽𝛽 and 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = 𝛾𝛾, find numbers 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 such that

𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑦𝑦 3 + 𝑧𝑧 3 = 𝐴𝐴𝛼𝛼 3 + 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶.

Solve the equations
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧 = 1
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 = 3
2

𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑦𝑦 3 + 𝑧𝑧 3 = 4.
(ii) The area of a triangle whose sides are 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 is given by the formula

area = �𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑎𝑎)(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑏𝑏)(𝑠𝑠 − 𝑐𝑐)

1
where 𝑠𝑠 is the semi-perimeter (𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐). If 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are the roots of the equation
2

𝑥𝑥 3 − 16𝑥𝑥 2 + 81𝑥𝑥 − 128 = 0,

find the area of the triangle.

[STEP 3, 1996Q8]
A transformation 𝑇𝑇 of the real numbers is defined by
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏
𝑦𝑦 = 𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥) = ,
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 − 𝑑𝑑
1996
where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 are real numbers such that 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≠ 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏. Find all numbers 𝑥𝑥 such that 𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥.
[Link]
−1 (𝑦𝑦)
Show that the inverse operation, 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑇𝑇 expressing 𝑥𝑥 in terms of 𝑦𝑦 is of the same form as
4
𝑇𝑇 and find corresponding numbers 𝑎𝑎′, 𝑏𝑏′, 𝑐𝑐′, 𝑑𝑑′.
Let 𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟 denote the set of all real numbers excluding 𝑟𝑟. Show that, if 𝑐𝑐 ≠ 0, there is a value of 𝑟𝑟
such that 𝑇𝑇 is defined for all 𝑥𝑥 ∈ 𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟 and find the image 𝑇𝑇(𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟 ). What is the corresponding result
if 𝑐𝑐 = 0?
If 𝑇𝑇1 , given by numbers 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑏𝑏1 , 𝑐𝑐1 , 𝑑𝑑1 , and 𝑇𝑇2 , given by numbers 𝑎𝑎2 , 𝑏𝑏2 , 𝑐𝑐2 , 𝑑𝑑2 , are two such
transformations, show that their composition 𝑇𝑇3 , defined by 𝑇𝑇3 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑇𝑇2 �𝑇𝑇1 (𝑥𝑥)�, is of the same
form.
Find necessary and sufficient conditions on the numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 for 𝑇𝑇 2 , the composition of 𝑇𝑇
with itself, to be the identity. Hence, or otherwise, find transformations 𝑇𝑇1 , 𝑇𝑇2 and their
composition 𝑇𝑇3 such that 𝑇𝑇12 and 𝑇𝑇22 are each the identity but 𝑇𝑇32 is not.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1996

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1996Q9]
A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is at rest on top of a smooth fixed sphere of radius 𝑎𝑎. Show that, if the
particle is given a small displacement, it reaches the horizontal plane through the centre of the
sphere at a distance

𝑎𝑎�5√5 + 4√23�
27
from the centre of the sphere.
[Air resistance should be neglected.]

[STEP 3, 1996Q10]
Two rough solid circular cylinders, of equal radius and length and of uniform density, lie side
π
by side on a rough plane inclined at an angle 𝛼𝛼 to the horizontal, where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < . Their axes
2
are horizontal and they touch along their entire length. The weight of the upper cylinder is 𝑊𝑊1
and the coefficient of friction between it and the plane is 𝜇𝜇1 . The corresponding quantities for
the lower cylinder are 𝑊𝑊2 and 𝜇𝜇2 respectively and the coefficient of friction between the two
cylinders is 𝜇𝜇. Show that for equilibrium to be possible:
(i) 𝑊𝑊1 > 𝑊𝑊2 .
𝑊𝑊1 +𝑊𝑊2
(ii) 𝜇𝜇 ≥ . 1996
𝑊𝑊1 −𝑊𝑊2 [Link]

−1 5
2𝑊𝑊1 cot 𝛼𝛼
(iii) 𝜇𝜇1 ≥ � − 1� .
𝑊𝑊1 +𝑊𝑊2

Find the similar inequality to (iii) for 𝜇𝜇2 .

[STEP 3, 1996Q11]
A smooth circular wire of radius 𝑎𝑎 is held fixed in a vertical plane with light elastic strings of
natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus 𝜆𝜆 attached to the upper and lower extremities, 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐶𝐶
respectively, of the vertical diameter. The other ends of the two strings are attached to a small
ring 𝐵𝐵 of mass 𝑚𝑚 which is free to slide on the wire. Show that, while both strings remain taut,
the equation for the motion of the ring is
2𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝜃𝜃̈ = 𝜆𝜆(cos 𝜃𝜃 − sin 𝜃𝜃) − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 sin 2𝜃𝜃,
�.
where 𝜃𝜃 is the angle 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
3
Initially the system is at rest in equilibrium with sin 𝜃𝜃 = . Deduce that 5𝜆𝜆 = 24𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚.
5

The ring is now displaced slightly. Show that in the ensuing motion it will oscillate with period
approximately

𝑎𝑎
10π� .
91𝑔𝑔

STEP 3 Past Paper 1996 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1996Q12]
It has been observed that Professor Ecks proves three types of theorems: 1, those that are
correct and new; 2, those that are correct, but already known; 3, those that are false. It has also
been observed that, if a certain of her theorems is of type 𝑖𝑖, then her next theorem is of type 𝑗𝑗
with probability 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 , where 𝑝𝑝𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 is the entry in the 𝑖𝑖th row and 𝑗𝑗th column of the following array:
0.3 0.3 0.4
�0.2 0.4 0.4�
0.1 0.3 0.6
Let 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 , 𝑖𝑖 = 1,2, 3 , be the probability that a given theorem is of type 𝑖𝑖 , and let 𝑏𝑏𝑗𝑗 be the
consequent probability that the next theorem is of type 𝑗𝑗.
(i) Explain why 𝑏𝑏𝑗𝑗 = 𝑎𝑎1 𝑝𝑝1𝑗𝑗 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑝𝑝2𝑗𝑗 + 𝑎𝑎3 𝑃𝑃3𝑗𝑗 .

(ii) Find values of 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 and 𝑎𝑎3 such that 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖 = 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 for 𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3.
(iii) For these values of the 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 find the probabilities 𝑞𝑞𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 that, if a particular theorem is of type 𝑗𝑗,
then the preceding theorem was of type 𝑖𝑖.

[STEP 3, 1996Q13]
Let 𝑋𝑋 be a random variable which takes only the finite number of different possible real values
𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑥𝑥2 , … , 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 . Define the expectation E(𝑋𝑋) and the variance var(𝑋𝑋) of 𝑋𝑋. Show that, if 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏
1996
are real numbers, then E(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏) = 𝑎𝑎E(𝑋𝑋) + 𝑏𝑏 and express var(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏) similarly in terms of
[Link]

var(𝑋𝑋). 6

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1996

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1996Q14]
Whenever I go cycling I start with my bike in good working order. However if all is well at time
𝑡𝑡 , the probability that I get a puncture in the small interval (𝑡𝑡, 𝑡𝑡 + 𝛿𝛿𝛿𝛿) is 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 . How many
punctures can I expect to get on a journey during which my total cycling time is 𝑇𝑇?
When I get a puncture I stop immediately to repair it and the probability that, if I am repairing
it at time 𝑡𝑡, the repair will be completed in time (𝑡𝑡, 𝑡𝑡 + 𝛿𝛿𝛿𝛿) is 𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽. If 𝑝𝑝(𝑡𝑡) is the probability that
I am repairing a puncture at time 𝑡𝑡, write down an equation relating 𝑝𝑝(𝑡𝑡) to 𝑝𝑝(𝑡𝑡 + 𝛿𝛿𝛿𝛿), and
derive from this a differential equation relating 𝑝𝑝′ (𝑡𝑡) and 𝑝𝑝(𝑡𝑡). Show that
𝛼𝛼
𝑝𝑝(𝑡𝑡) = �1 − exp(−(𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽)𝑡𝑡)�,
𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽
satisfies this differential equation with the appropriate initial condition.
Find an expression, involving 𝛼𝛼, 𝛽𝛽 and 𝑇𝑇, for the time expected to be spent mending punctures
during a journey of total time 𝑇𝑇. Hence, or otherwise, show that, the fraction of the journey
expected to be spent mending punctures is given approximately by
𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼
if (𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽)𝑇𝑇 is small,
2
and by
𝛼𝛼
if (𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽)𝑇𝑇 is large.
𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽

1996
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 1996 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1996
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1996

STEP 3 1997
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1997
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1997 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1997Q1]
(i) By considering the series expansion of (𝑥𝑥 2 + 5𝑥𝑥 + 4)e𝑥𝑥 or otherwise, show that
32 42 52
10e = 4 + + + + ⋯.
1! 2! 3!
(ii) Show that
22 3 2 4 2
5e = 1 + + + + ⋯.
1! 2! 3!
(iii) Evaluate
23 33 43
1+ + + + ⋯.
1! 2! 3!

[STEP 3, 1997Q2]
Let
ln 𝑡𝑡
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = for 𝑡𝑡 > 0.
𝑡𝑡
Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) and find its maximum value. How many values of 𝑡𝑡 correspond to a
given positive value of 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡)?
1997
Find how many positive values of 𝑦𝑦 satisfy 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 for a given positive value of 𝑥𝑥. [Link]
the
𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥
set of points (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) which satisfy 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑦𝑦 with 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 > 0. 2

[STEP 3, 1997Q3]
By considering the solutions of the equation 𝑧𝑧 𝑛𝑛 − 1 = 0, or otherwise, show that
(𝑧𝑧 − 𝜔𝜔)(𝑧𝑧 − 𝜔𝜔2 ) ⋯ (𝑧𝑧 − 𝜔𝜔𝑛𝑛−1 ) = 1 + 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑧𝑧 2 + ⋯ + 𝑧𝑧 𝑛𝑛−1 ,
2π𝐢𝐢
where 𝑧𝑧 is any complex number and 𝜔𝜔 = e 𝑛𝑛 .
Let 𝐴𝐴1 , 𝐴𝐴2 , 𝐴𝐴3 , … , 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 be points equally spaced around a circle of radius 𝑟𝑟 centred at 𝑂𝑂 (so that
they are the vertices of a regular 𝑛𝑛-sided polygon).
Show that
��⃗1 + 𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴
𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴 ��⃗2 + 𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴
��⃗3 + ⋯ + 𝑂𝑂𝐴𝐴
��⃗
𝑛𝑛 = 𝟎𝟎.

Deduce, or prove otherwise, that

𝑛𝑛

�|𝐴𝐴1 𝐴𝐴𝑘𝑘 |2 = 2𝑟𝑟 2 𝑛𝑛.

𝑘𝑘=1

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1997

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1997Q4]
In this question, you may assume that if 𝑘𝑘1 , … , 𝑘𝑘𝑛𝑛 are distinct positive real numbers, then
1
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
1
� 𝑘𝑘𝑟𝑟 > �� 𝑘𝑘𝑟𝑟 � ,
𝑛𝑛
𝑟𝑟=1 𝑟𝑟=1

i.e. their arithmetic mean is greater than their geometric mean.

Suppose that 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑 are positive real numbers such that the polynomial
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 4 − 4𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 3 + 6𝑏𝑏 2 𝑥𝑥 2 − 4𝑐𝑐 3 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑑𝑑4
has four distinct positive roots 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠.
(i) Show that 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟, and 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 are distinct.
(ii) By considering the relationship between the coefficients of 𝑓𝑓 and its roots, show that 𝑐𝑐 >
𝑑𝑑.
(iii) Explain why the polynomial 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) must have three distinct roots.
(iv) By differentiating 𝑓𝑓, show that 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑐𝑐.
(v) Show that 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏.

[STEP 3, 1997Q5]
Find the ratio, over one revolution, of the distance moved by a wheel rolling on a flat surface to
1997
the distance traced out by a point on its circumference. [Link]

[STEP 3, 1997Q6]
Suppose that 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 satisfies the equations
d2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 d𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 ) 2
− 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑛𝑛2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 = 0,
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 (1) = 1, 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = (−1)𝑛𝑛 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 (−𝑥𝑥).
If 𝑥𝑥 = cos 𝜃𝜃, show that
d2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛
+ 𝑛𝑛2 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 = 0,
d𝜃𝜃 2
and hence obtain 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 as a function of 𝜃𝜃. Deduce that for |𝑥𝑥| ≤ 1
𝑦𝑦0 = 1, 𝑦𝑦1 = 𝑥𝑥,
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 − 2𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 + 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛−1 = 0.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1997 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1997Q7]
For each positive integer 𝑛𝑛, let
1 1 1
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = + + + ⋯;
𝑛𝑛 + 1 (𝑛𝑛 + 1)(𝑛𝑛 + 2) (𝑛𝑛 + 1)(𝑛𝑛 + 2)(𝑛𝑛 + 3)
1 1 1
𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 = + 2
+ + ⋯.
𝑛𝑛 + 1 (𝑛𝑛 + 1) (𝑛𝑛 + 1)3
(i) Evaluate 𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 .
1
(ii) Show that 0 < 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 < .
𝑛𝑛

(iii) Deduce that 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = 𝑛𝑛! e − [𝑛𝑛! e] (where [𝑥𝑥] is the integer part of 𝑥𝑥).
(iv) Hence show that e is irrational.

[STEP 3, 1997Q8]
Let 𝐑𝐑 𝛼𝛼 be the 2 × 2 matrix that represents a rotation through the angle 𝛼𝛼 and let
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏
𝐀𝐀 = � �.
𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐
(i) Find in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 an angle 𝛼𝛼 such that the matrix 𝐑𝐑 −𝛼𝛼 𝐀𝐀𝐑𝐑 𝛼𝛼 is diagonal (i.e. has the
value zero in top-right and bottom-left positions).
(ii) Find values of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 such that the equation of the ellipse
π 1997
𝑥𝑥 2 + (𝑦𝑦 + 2𝑥𝑥 cot 2𝜃𝜃)2 = 1 �0 < 𝜃𝜃 < � [Link]
4 4
can be expressed in the form
𝑥𝑥
(𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦)𝐀𝐀 � � = 1.
𝑦𝑦
Show that, for this 𝐀𝐀 , the matrix 𝐑𝐑 −𝛼𝛼 𝐀𝐀𝐑𝐑 𝛼𝛼 is diagonal if 𝛼𝛼 = 𝜃𝜃 . Express the non-zero
elements of this diagonal matrix in terms of 𝜃𝜃.
(iii) Deduce, or show otherwise, that the minimum and maximum distances from the centre to
the circumference of this ellipse are tan 𝜃𝜃 and cot 𝜃𝜃.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1997

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1997Q9]
A uniform rigid rod 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 is suspended from a fixed point 𝐴𝐴 by light stretched springs 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
The springs are of different natural lengths but the ratio of tension to extension is the same
constant 𝜅𝜅 for each. The rod is not hanging vertically. Show that the ratio of the lengths of the
stretched springs is equal to the ratio of the natural lengths of the unstretched springs.

[STEP 3, 1997Q10]
By pressing a finger down on it, a uniform spherical marble of radius 𝑎𝑎 is made to slide along a
horizontal table top with an initial linear speed 𝑣𝑣0 and an initial backward angular speed 𝜔𝜔0
about the horizontal axis perpendicular to 𝑣𝑣0 . The frictional force between the marble and the
table is constant (independent of speed).
𝑣𝑣0
Find the value of for which the marble
𝑎𝑎𝜔𝜔0

(i) slides to a complete stop,

𝑣𝑣
(ii) comes to a stop and then rolls back towards its initial position with linear speed 0 .
7

[STEP 3, 1997Q11]
1997
[Link]

A heavy symmetrical bell and clapper can both swing freely in a vertical plane about a point 𝑂𝑂
on a horizontal beam at the apex of the bell. The mass of the bell is 𝑀𝑀 and its moment of inertia
about the beam is 𝑀𝑀𝑘𝑘 2 . Its centre of mass, 𝐺𝐺 , is a distance ℎ from 𝑂𝑂. The clapper may be
regarded as a small heavy ball on a light rod of length 𝑙𝑙. Initially the bell is held with its axis
vertical and its mouth above the beam. The clapper ball rests against the side of the bell, with
the rod making an angle 𝛽𝛽 with the axis. The bell is then released. Show that, at the moment
when the clapper and bell separate, the clapper rod makes an angle 𝛼𝛼 with the upward vertical,
where
𝑘𝑘 2
cot 𝛼𝛼 = cot 𝛽𝛽 − cosec 𝛽𝛽.
ℎ𝑙𝑙

STEP 3 Past Paper 1997 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1997Q12]
(i) I toss a biased coin which has a probability 𝑝𝑝 of landing heads and a probability 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝
of landing tails. Let 𝐾𝐾 be the number of tosses required to obtain the first head and let
∞

𝐺𝐺(𝑠𝑠) = � P(𝐾𝐾 = 𝑘𝑘)𝑠𝑠 𝑘𝑘 .

𝑘𝑘=1

Show that
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐺𝐺(𝑠𝑠) =
1 − 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞
and hence find the expectation and variance of 𝐾𝐾.
(ii) I sample cards at random with replacement from a normal pack of 52. Let 𝑁𝑁 be the total
number of draws I make in order to sample every card at least once. By expressing 𝑁𝑁 as a
sum 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑁𝑁1 + 𝑁𝑁2 + ⋯ + 𝑁𝑁52 of random variables, or otherwise, find the expectation of 𝑁𝑁.
Estimate the numerical value of this expectation, using the approximations e ≈ 2.7 and
1 1 1
1 + 2 + 3 + ⋯ + 𝑛𝑛 ≈ 0.5 + ln 𝑛𝑛 if 𝑛𝑛 is large.

[STEP 3, 1997Q13]
Let 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 be independent standard normal random variables. The probability density
1997
function, 𝑓𝑓, of each is therefore given by [Link]

1 1 2 6
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = (2π)−2 e−2𝑥𝑥 .
(i) Find the moment generating function 𝐸𝐸�e𝜃𝜃𝜃𝜃 � of 𝑋𝑋.
(ii) Find the moment generating function of 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 and hence obtain the condition on 𝑎𝑎 and
𝑏𝑏 which ensures that 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 has the same distribution as 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌.
(iii) Let 𝑍𝑍 = e𝜇𝜇+𝜎𝜎𝜎𝜎 . Show that
1 2 2
𝐸𝐸�𝑍𝑍 𝜃𝜃 � = 𝑒𝑒 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇+2𝜎𝜎
𝜃𝜃
,
and hence find the expectation and variance of 𝑍𝑍.

[STEP 3, 1997Q14]
An industrial process produces rectangular plates of mean length 𝜇𝜇1 and mean breadth 𝜇𝜇2 . The
length and breadth vary independently with non-zero standard deviations 𝜎𝜎1 and 𝜎𝜎2
respectively. Find the means and standard deviations of the perimeter and of the area of the
plates. Show that the perimeter and area are not independent.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1997

STEP 3 1998
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1998
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1998 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1998Q1]
Let
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = sin2 𝑥𝑥 + 2 cos 𝑥𝑥 + 1
for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π. Sketch the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥), giving the coordinates of the stationary points. Now
let
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑏𝑏
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≠ 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏, 𝑑𝑑 ≠ −3𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 ≠ 𝑐𝑐.
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑑𝑑
Show that the stationary points of 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) occur at the same values of 𝑥𝑥 as those of 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥),
and find the corresponding values of 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥).
𝑑𝑑 𝑑𝑑
Explain why, if < −3 or > 1, |𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)| cannot be arbitrarily large.
𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐

[STEP 3, 1998Q2]
Let
1
𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = � 𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎 (1 − 𝑡𝑡)𝑏𝑏 d𝑡𝑡 (𝑎𝑎 ≥ 0, 𝑏𝑏 ≥ 0).
0

(i) Show that 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = 𝐼𝐼(𝑏𝑏, 𝑎𝑎).

1998
(ii) Show that 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎 + 1, 𝑏𝑏) + 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 + 1). [Link]

2
(iii) Show that (𝑎𝑎 + 1)𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝑎𝑎 + 1, 𝑏𝑏 − 1) when 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are positive and hence
calculate 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) when 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are positive integers.

[STEP 3, 1998Q3]
The value 𝑉𝑉𝑁𝑁 of a bond after 𝑁𝑁 days is determined by the equation
𝑉𝑉𝑁𝑁+1 = (1 + 𝑐𝑐)𝑉𝑉𝑁𝑁 − 𝑑𝑑 (𝑐𝑐 > 0, 𝑑𝑑 > 0),
where 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑 are given constants. By looking for solutions of the form 𝑉𝑉𝑇𝑇 = 𝐴𝐴𝑘𝑘 𝑇𝑇 + 𝐵𝐵 for some
constants 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝑘𝑘, or otherwise, find 𝑉𝑉𝑁𝑁 in terms of 𝑉𝑉0 .
What is the solution for 𝑐𝑐 = 0? Show that this is the limit (for fixed 𝑁𝑁) as 𝑐𝑐 → 0 of your solution
for 𝑐𝑐 > 0.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1998

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1998Q4]
π π
Show that the equation (in plane polar coordinates) 𝑟𝑟 = cos 𝜃𝜃, for − ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ , represents a
2 2
circle.
Sketch the curve 𝑟𝑟 = cos 2𝜃𝜃 for 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ 2π, and describe the curves 𝑟𝑟 = cos 2𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛, where 𝑛𝑛 is
an integer. Show that the area enclosed by such a curve is independent of 𝑛𝑛.
Sketch also the curve 𝑟𝑟 = cos 3𝜃𝜃 for 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ 2π.

[STEP 3, 1998Q5]
The exponential of a square matrix 𝐀𝐀 is defined to be
∞
1 𝑟𝑟
exp(𝐀𝐀) = � 𝐀𝐀 ,
𝑟𝑟!
𝑟𝑟=0

where 𝐀𝐀0 = 𝐈𝐈 and 𝐈𝐈 is the identity matrix.

Let
0 −1
𝐌𝐌 = � �.
1 0
Show that 𝐌𝐌2 = −𝐈𝐈 and hence express exp(𝜃𝜃𝐌𝐌) as a single 2 × 2 matrix, where 𝜃𝜃 is a real
number. Explain the geometrical significance of exp(𝜃𝜃𝐌𝐌).
Let
1998
0 1 [Link]
𝐍𝐍 = � �. 3
0 0
Express similarly exp(𝑠𝑠𝐍𝐍), where 𝑠𝑠 is a real number, and explain the geometrical significance
of exp(𝑠𝑠𝐍𝐍).
For which values of 𝜃𝜃 does
exp(𝑠𝑠𝐍𝐍) exp(𝜃𝜃𝐌𝐌) = exp(𝜃𝜃𝐌𝐌) exp(𝑠𝑠𝐍𝐍)
for all 𝑠𝑠? Interpret this fact geometrically.

[STEP 3, 1998Q6]
(i) Show that four vertices of a cube, no two of which are adjacent, form the vertices of a
regular tetrahedron. Hence, or otherwise, find the volume of a regular tetrahedron whose
edges are of unit length.
(ii) Find the volume of a regular octahedron whose edges are of unit length.
(iii) Show that the centres of the faces of a cube form the vertices of a regular octahedron. Show
that its volume is half that of the tetrahedron whose vertices are the vertices of the cube.
[A regular tetrahedron (octahedron) has four (eight) faces, all equilateral triangles.]

STEP 3 Past Paper 1998 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1998Q7]
Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑠𝑠) = e𝑠𝑠 (𝑠𝑠 − 3) + 3 for 0 ≤ 𝑠𝑠 < ∞ . Taking e ≈ 2.7 , find the smallest
positive integer, 𝑚𝑚, such that 𝑓𝑓(𝑚𝑚) > 0.
Now let
𝑥𝑥 3
𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥
e𝑇𝑇 − 1
where 𝑇𝑇 is a positive constant. Show that 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) has a single turning point in 0 < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞. By
considering the behaviour for small 𝑥𝑥 and for large 𝑥𝑥, sketch 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 < ∞.
Let
∞
� 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 = 𝐵𝐵,
0

which may be assumed to be finite. Show that 𝐵𝐵 = 𝐾𝐾𝑇𝑇 𝑛𝑛 where 𝐾𝐾 is a constant, and 𝑛𝑛 is an
integer which you should determine.
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
Given that 𝐵𝐵 ≈ 2 ∫0 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥, use your graph of 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) to find a rough estimate for 𝐾𝐾.

[STEP 3, 1998Q8]
� , where 𝐦𝐦
(i) Show that the line 𝐫𝐫 = 𝐛𝐛 + 𝜆𝜆𝐦𝐦 � is a unit vector, intersects the sphere 𝐫𝐫. 𝐫𝐫 = 𝑎𝑎2 at
two points if
1998
𝑎𝑎2 > 𝐛𝐛. 𝐛𝐛 − (𝐛𝐛. 𝐦𝐦
� )2 . [Link]

4
Write down the corresponding condition for there to be precisely one point of intersection.
� . 𝐩𝐩 = 0.
If this point has position vector 𝐩𝐩, show that 𝐦𝐦
(ii) Now consider a second sphere of radius 𝑎𝑎 and a plane perpendicular to a unit vector 𝐧𝐧 �.
The centre of the sphere has position vector 𝐝𝐝 and the minimum distance from the origin
to the plane is 𝑙𝑙. What is the condition for the plane to be tangential to this second sphere?
(iii) Show that the first and second spheres intersect at right angles (i.e. the two radii to each
point of intersection are perpendicular) if
𝐝𝐝. 𝐝𝐝 = 2𝑎𝑎2 .

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1998

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1998Q9]
A uniform right circular cone of mass 𝑚𝑚 has base of radius 𝑎𝑎 and perpendicular height ℎ from
3
base to apex. Show that its moment of inertia about its axis is 𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎2 , and calculate its moment
10
of inertia about an axis through its apex parallel to its base.
[Any theorems used should be stated clearly.]
The cone is now suspended from its apex and allowed to perform small oscillations. Show that
their period is

4ℎ2 + 𝑎𝑎2
2π� .
5𝑔𝑔ℎ
3
[You may assume that the centre of mass of the cone is a distance 4 ℎ from its apex.]

[STEP 3, 1998Q10]
Two identical spherical balls, moving on a horizontal, smooth table, collide in such a way that
both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. Let 𝐯𝐯1 and 𝐯𝐯2 be the velocities of the balls
before the collision and let 𝐯𝐯′1 and 𝐯𝐯′2 be the velocities of the balls after the collision, where 𝐯𝐯1,
𝐯𝐯2 , 𝐯𝐯′1 and 𝐯𝐯′2 are two-dimensional vectors. Write down the equations for conservation of
momentum and kinetic energy in terms of these vectors. Hence show that their relative speed 1998
is also conserved. [Link]

5
Show that, if one ball is initially at rest but after the collision both balls are moving, their final
velocities are perpendicular.
Now suppose that one ball is initially at rest, and the second is moving with speed 𝑉𝑉. After a
collision in which they lose a proportion 𝑘𝑘 of their original kinetic energy (0 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 1), the
direction of motion of the second ball has changed by an angle 𝜃𝜃. Find a quadratic equation
satisfied by the final speed of the second ball, with coefficients depending on 𝑘𝑘, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝜃𝜃. Hence
1
show that 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 2.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1998 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1998Q11]
Consider a simple pendulum of length 𝑙𝑙 and angular displacement 𝜃𝜃, which is not assumed to
be small. Show that

1 d𝜃𝜃 2
𝑙𝑙 � � = 𝑔𝑔(cos 𝜃𝜃 − cos 𝛾𝛾),
2 d𝑡𝑡
where 𝛾𝛾 is the maximum value of 𝜃𝜃. Show also that the period 𝑃𝑃 is given by
1
𝑙𝑙 𝛾𝛾 𝛾𝛾 𝜃𝜃 −2
𝑃𝑃 = 2� � �sin2 � � − sin2 � �� d𝜃𝜃.
𝑔𝑔 0 2 2

𝜃𝜃 𝛾𝛾
By using the substitution sin � � = sin � � sin 𝜙𝜙, and then finding an approximate expression
2 2
for the integrand using the binomial expansion, show that for small values of 𝛾𝛾 the period is
approximately

𝑙𝑙 𝛾𝛾 2
2π� �1 + �.
𝑔𝑔 16

1998
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1998

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1998Q12]
The mountain villages 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 lie at the vertices of a tetrahedron, and each pair of villages
is joined by a road. After a snowfall the probability that any road is blocked is 𝑝𝑝 , and is
independent of the conditions of any other road. The probability that, after a snowfall, it is
possible to travel from any village to any other village by some route is 𝑃𝑃. Show that
𝑃𝑃 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝2 (6𝑝𝑝3 − 12𝑝𝑝2 + 3𝑝𝑝 + 4).

[STEP 3, 1998Q13]
Write down the probability of obtaining 𝑘𝑘 heads in 𝑛𝑛 tosses of a fair coin. Now suppose that 𝑘𝑘
is known but 𝑛𝑛 is unknown. A maximum likelihood estimator (MLE) of 𝑛𝑛 is defined to be a
value (which must be an integer) of 𝑛𝑛 which maximizes the probability of 𝑘𝑘 heads.
A friend has thrown a fair coin a number of times. She tells you that she has observed one head.
Show that in this case there are two MLEs of the number of tosses she has made.
She now tells you that in a repeat of the exercise she has observed 𝑘𝑘 heads. Find the two MLEs
of the number of tosses she has made.
She next uses a coin biased with probability 𝑝𝑝 (known) of showing a head, and again tells you
that she has observed 𝑘𝑘 heads. Find the MLEs of the number of tosses made. What is the
condition for the MLE to be unique?
1998
[Link]

7
[STEP 3, 1998Q14]
A hostile naval power possesses a large, unknown number 𝑁𝑁 of submarines. Interception of
radio signals yields a small number 𝑛𝑛 of their identification numbers 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛𝑛), which
are taken to be independent and uniformly distributed over the continuous range from 0 to 𝑁𝑁.
Show that 𝑍𝑍1 and 𝑍𝑍2 , defined by
𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛 + 1 2
𝑍𝑍1 = Max{𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2 , … , 𝑋𝑋𝑛𝑛 } and 𝑍𝑍2 = � 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ,
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1

both have means equal to 𝑁𝑁.

Calculate the variance of 𝑍𝑍1 and of 𝑍𝑍2 . Which estimator do you prefer, and why?

STEP 3 Past Paper 1998 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

1998
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 1998

STEP 3 1999
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 1999
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1999 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 1999Q1]
Consider the cubic equation
𝑥𝑥 3 − 𝑝𝑝𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 − 𝑟𝑟 = 0,
where 𝑝𝑝 ≠ 0 and 𝑟𝑟 ≠ 0.
(i) If the three roots can be written in the form 𝑎𝑎𝑘𝑘 −1, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 for some constants 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑘𝑘,
𝑞𝑞
show that one root is and that 𝑞𝑞 3 − 𝑟𝑟𝑝𝑝3 = 0.
𝑝𝑝

𝑞𝑞3 𝑞𝑞 𝑞𝑞 2
(ii) If 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑝𝑝3 , show that is a root and that the product of the other two roots is � � . Deduce
𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝
that the roots are in geometric progression.
(iii) Find a necessary and sufficient condition involving 𝑝𝑝 , 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 for the roots to be in
arithmetic progression.

[STEP 3, 1999Q2]
(i) Let 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = (1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )e𝑥𝑥 . Show that 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) ≥ 0 and sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) . Hence, or
otherwise, show that the equation
(1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )e𝑥𝑥 = 𝑘𝑘,
where 𝑘𝑘 is a constant, has exactly one real root if 𝑘𝑘 > 0 and no real roots if 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 0. 1999
[Link]
(ii) Determine the number of real roots of the equation
2
(e𝑥𝑥 − 1) − 𝑘𝑘 tan −1
𝑥𝑥 = 0
2 2
in the cases (a) 0 < 𝑘𝑘 ≤ and (b) < 𝑘𝑘 < 1.
π π

[STEP 3, 1999Q3]
Justify, by means of a sketch, the formula
𝑛𝑛 2
1 𝑚𝑚
lim � � 𝑓𝑓 �1 + �� = � 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥.
𝑛𝑛→∞ 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 1
𝑚𝑚=1

Show that
1 1 1
lim � + + ⋯+ � = ln 2.
𝑛𝑛→∞ 𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑛𝑛 + 2 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑛𝑛
Evaluate
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
lim � + 2 +⋯+ 2 �.
𝑛𝑛→∞ 𝑛𝑛 2 + 1 𝑛𝑛 + 4 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑛𝑛2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 1999

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1999Q4]
A polyhedron is a solid bounded by 𝐹𝐹 plane faces, which meet in 𝐸𝐸 edges and 𝑉𝑉 vertices. You
may assume Euler's formula, that 𝑉𝑉 − 𝐸𝐸 + 𝐹𝐹 = 2.
In a regular polyhedron the faces are equal regular 𝑚𝑚-sided polygons, 𝑛𝑛 of which meet at each
vertex. Show that
4𝑛𝑛
𝐹𝐹 = ,
ℎ
where ℎ = 4 − (𝑛𝑛 − 2)(𝑚𝑚 − 2).
By considering the possible values of ℎ, or otherwise, prove that there are only five regular
polyhedra, and find 𝑉𝑉, 𝐸𝐸 and 𝐹𝐹 for each.

[STEP 3, 1999Q5]
The sequence 𝑢𝑢0 , 𝑢𝑢1 , 𝑢𝑢2 , … is defined by
𝑢𝑢0 = 1, 𝑢𝑢1 = 1, 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1 = 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 + 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
Prove that
2 2 2
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 = 2(𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1 + 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛2 ).
Using induction, or otherwise, prove the following result:
2 2 2
𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛 = 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 and 𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛+1 = 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1
1999
for any positive integer 𝑛𝑛. [Link]

[STEP 3, 1999Q6]
A closed curve is given by the equation
2 2 2
𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 = 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 (∗)
where 𝑛𝑛 is an odd integer and 𝑎𝑎 is a positive constant. Find a parametrization 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑥𝑥(𝑡𝑡), 𝑦𝑦 =
𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡) which describes the curve anticlockwise as 𝑡𝑡 ranges from 0 to 2π.
Sketch the curve in the case 𝑛𝑛 = 3, justifying the main features of your sketch.
The area 𝐴𝐴 enclosed by such a curve is given by the formula
1 2π d𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡) d𝑥𝑥(𝑡𝑡)
𝐴𝐴 = � �𝑥𝑥(𝑡𝑡) − 𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡) � d𝑡𝑡.
2 0 d𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡
Use this result to find the area enclosed by (∗) for 𝑛𝑛 = 3.

STEP 3 Past Paper 1999 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 1999Q7]
Let 𝑎𝑎 be a non-zero real number and define a binary operation on the set of real numbers by
𝑥𝑥 ∗ 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎.
Show that the operation ∗ is associative.
Show that (𝐺𝐺, ∗) is a group, where 𝐺𝐺 is the set of all real numbers except for one number which
you should identify.
Find a subgroup of (𝐺𝐺, ∗) which has exactly 2 elements.

[STEP 3, 1999Q8]
The function 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥) is defined for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0 and satisfies the conditions
d𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦 = 0 and = 1 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥
When 𝑥𝑥 is in the range 2(𝑛𝑛 − 1)π < 𝑥𝑥 < 2𝑛𝑛π, where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer, 𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡) satisfies the
differential equation
d2 𝑦𝑦
+ 𝑛𝑛2 𝑦𝑦 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥 2
d𝑦𝑦
Both 𝑦𝑦 and are continuous at 𝑥𝑥 = 2𝑛𝑛π for 𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, ….
d𝑥𝑥

(i) Find 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥) for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π. 1999

1 [Link]
(ii) Show that 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥) = sin 2𝑥𝑥 for 2π ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 4π, and find 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥) for all 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0. 4
2

(iii) Show that

∞ ∞
2
1
� 𝑦𝑦 d𝑥𝑥 = π � .
0 𝑛𝑛2
𝑛𝑛=1

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 1999

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 1999Q9]
The gravitational force between two point particles of masses 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑚𝑚′ is mutually attractive
and has magnitude
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑚𝑚′
𝑟𝑟 2
where 𝐺𝐺 is a constant and 𝑟𝑟 is the distance between them.
A particle of unit mass lies on the axis of a thin uniform circular ring of radius 𝑟𝑟 and mass 𝑚𝑚, at
a distance 𝑥𝑥 from its centre. Explain why the net force on the particle is directed towards the
centre of the ring and show that its magnitude is
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
3.
(𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟 2 )2
The particle now lies inside a thin hollow spherical shell of uniform density, mass 𝑀𝑀 and radius
𝑎𝑎, at a distance 𝑏𝑏 from its centre. Show that the particle experiences no gravitational force due
to the shell.

[STEP 3, 1999Q10]
A chain of mass 𝑚𝑚 and length 𝑙𝑙 is composed of 𝑛𝑛 small smooth links. It is suspended vertically
over a horizontal table with its end just touching the table, and released so that it collapses
1999
inelastically onto the table. Calculate the change in momentum of the (𝑘𝑘 + 1)th link [Link]
the
5
bottom of the chain as it falls onto the table.
Write down an expression for the total impulse sustained by the table in this way from the
whole chain. By approximating the sum by an integral, show that this total impulse is
approximately
2
𝑚𝑚�2𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
3
when 𝑛𝑛 is large.

[STEP 3, 1999Q11]
Calculate the moment of inertia of a uniform thin circular hoop of mass 𝑚𝑚 and radius 𝑎𝑎 about
an axis perpendicular to the plane of the hoop through a point on its circumference.
The hoop, which is rough, rolls with speed 𝑣𝑣 on a rough horizontal table straight towards the
edge and rolls over the edge without initially losing contact with the edge. Show that the hoop
will lose contact with the edge when it has rotated about the edge of the table through an angle
𝜃𝜃, where
1 𝑣𝑣 2
cos 𝜃𝜃 = + .
2 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎

STEP 3 Past Paper 1999 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 1999Q12]
In the game of endless cricket the scores 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 of the two sides are such that
(𝑗𝑗 + 𝑘𝑘)𝜆𝜆𝑗𝑗+𝑘𝑘
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑗𝑗, 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑘𝑘) = e−1 ,
𝑗𝑗! 𝑘𝑘!
for some positive constant 𝜆𝜆, where 𝑗𝑗, 𝑘𝑘 = 0, 1, 2, ….
(i) Find P(𝑋𝑋 + 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑛𝑛) for each 𝑛𝑛 > 0.
(ii) Show that 2𝜆𝜆e2𝜆𝜆−1 = 1.
(iii) Show that 2𝑥𝑥e2𝑥𝑥−1 is an increasing function of 𝑥𝑥 for 𝑥𝑥 > 0 and deduce that the equation in
(ii) has at most one solution and hence determine 𝜆𝜆.
(iv) Calculate the expectation E(2 𝑋𝑋+𝑌𝑌 ).

[STEP 3, 1999Q13]
The cakes in our canteen each contain exactly four currants, each currant being randomly
placed in the cake. I take a proportion 𝑋𝑋 of a cake where 𝑋𝑋 is a random variable with density
function
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1 where 𝐴𝐴 is a constant. 1999
[Link]

(i) What is the expected number of currants in my portion? 6

(ii) If I find all four currants in my portion, what is the probability that I took more than half
the cake?

[STEP 3, 1999Q14]
In the basic version of Horizons (H1) the player has a maximum of 𝑛𝑛 turns, where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1. At
each turn, she has a probability 𝑝𝑝 of success, where 0 < 𝑝𝑝 < 1. If her first success is at the 𝑟𝑟th
turn, where 1 ≤ 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 𝑛𝑛, she collects 𝑟𝑟 pounds and then withdraws from the game. Otherwise,
her winnings are nil. Show that in H1, her expected winnings are
𝑝𝑝−1 [1 + 𝑛𝑛𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛+1 − (𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛 ] pounds,
where 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝.
The rules of H2 are the same as those of H1, except that 𝑛𝑛 is randomly selected from a Poisson
distribution with parameter 𝜆𝜆. If 𝑛𝑛 = 0 her winnings are nil. Otherwise she plays H1 with the
selected 𝑛𝑛. Show that in H2, her expected winnings are
1
�1 − e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 � − 𝜆𝜆𝑞𝑞e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 pounds.
𝑝𝑝

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 1999

STEP 3 2000
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2000
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2000 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2000Q1]
Sketch on the same axes the two curves 𝐶𝐶1 and 𝐶𝐶2 , given by
𝐶𝐶1 : 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = 1,
2 2
𝐶𝐶2 : 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 = 2.
The curves intersect at 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄. Given that the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃 are (𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) (which you need not
evaluate), write down the coordinates of 𝑄𝑄 in terms of 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏.
The tangent to 𝐶𝐶1 through 𝑃𝑃 meets the tangent to 𝐶𝐶2 through 𝑄𝑄 at the point 𝑀𝑀, and the tangent
to 𝐶𝐶2 through 𝑃𝑃 meets the tangent to 𝐶𝐶1 through 𝑄𝑄 at 𝑁𝑁. Show that the coordinates of 𝑀𝑀 are
(−𝑏𝑏, 𝑎𝑎) and write down the coordinates of 𝑁𝑁.
Show that 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is a square.

[STEP 3, 2000Q2]
Use the substitution 𝑥𝑥 = 2 − cos 𝜃𝜃 to evaluate the integral
1
2
𝑥𝑥 − 1 2
� � � d𝑥𝑥.
3 3 − 𝑥𝑥
2

Show that, for 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏,

𝑞𝑞 1 2000
𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎 2 (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎)�π + 3√3 − 6� [Link]
� � � d𝑥𝑥 = ,
𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑥𝑥 12 2

3𝑎𝑎+𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎+𝑏𝑏
where 𝑝𝑝 = and 𝑞𝑞 = .
4 2

[STEP 3, 2000Q3]
π
Given that 𝑎𝑎 = e𝐢𝐢 3 , prove that 1 + 𝛼𝛼 2 = 𝛼𝛼.
A triangle in the Argand plane has vertices 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, and 𝐶𝐶 represented by the complex numbers 𝑝𝑝,
𝑞𝑞𝛼𝛼 2 and −𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 respectively, where 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 are positive real numbers. Sketch the triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
Three equilateral triangles 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (each lettered clockwise) are erected on sides
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 respectively. Show that the complex number representing 𝑁𝑁 is (1 − 𝛼𝛼)𝑝𝑝 − 𝛼𝛼 2 𝑟𝑟
and find similar expressions for the complex numbers representing 𝐿𝐿 and 𝑀𝑀.
Show that lines 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿, 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 and 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 all meet at the origin, and that these three line segments have
the common length 𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 + 𝑟𝑟.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2000

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2000Q4]
The function 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is defined by
𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 − 2)(𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎)
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = .
𝑥𝑥 2 − 1
Prove algebraically that the line 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑐𝑐 intersects the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) if |𝑎𝑎| ≥ 1, but there
are values of 𝑐𝑐 for which there are no points of intersection if |𝑎𝑎| < 1.
Find the equation of the oblique asymptote of the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥). Sketch the graph in the two
1
cases (i) 𝑎𝑎 < −1; and (ii) −1 < 𝑎𝑎 < − 2. (You need not calculate the turning points.)

[STEP 3, 2000Q5]

Given two non-zero vectors 𝐚𝐚 = �𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎1 � and 𝐛𝐛 = �𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏1 � we define ∆(𝐚𝐚, 𝐛𝐛) by ∆(𝐚𝐚, 𝐛𝐛) = 𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏2 − 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏1 .
2 2

Let 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 be points with position vectors 𝐚𝐚, 𝐛𝐛 and 𝐜𝐜, respectively, no two of which are
parallel. Let 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 be points with position vectors 𝐩𝐩, 𝐪𝐪 and 𝐫𝐫, respectively, none of which
are parallel.
(i) Show that there exists a 2 × 2 matrix 𝐌𝐌 such that 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are the images of 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 under
the transformation represented by 𝐌𝐌.
(ii) Show that ∆(𝐚𝐚, 𝐛𝐛)𝐜𝐜 + ∆(𝐜𝐜, 𝐚𝐚)𝐛𝐛 + ∆(𝐛𝐛, 𝐜𝐜)𝐚𝐚 = 𝟎𝟎.
Hence, or otherwise, prove that a necessary and sufficient condition for the points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄,
2000
and 𝑅𝑅 to be the images of points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 under the transformation [Link]
by
some 2 × 2 matrix 𝐌𝐌 is that 3

∆(𝐚𝐚, 𝐛𝐛): ∆(𝐛𝐛, 𝐜𝐜): ∆(𝐜𝐜, 𝐚𝐚) = ∆(𝐩𝐩, 𝐪𝐪): ∆(𝐪𝐪, 𝐫𝐫): ∆(𝐫𝐫, 𝐩𝐩).

[STEP 3, 2000Q6]
Given that
𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑝𝑝𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 + 𝑟𝑟 = (𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏)(𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑐𝑐),
express 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐.
Show also that 𝑎𝑎2 is a root of the cubic equation
𝑢𝑢3 + 2𝑝𝑝𝑢𝑢2 + (𝑝𝑝2 − 4𝑟𝑟)𝑢𝑢 − 𝑞𝑞 2 = 0.
Explain why this equation always has a non-negative root, and verify that 𝑢𝑢 = 9 is a root in the
case 𝑝𝑝 = −1, 𝑞𝑞 = −6, 𝑟𝑟 = 15.
Hence, or otherwise, express
𝑦𝑦 4 − 8𝑦𝑦 3 + 23𝑦𝑦 2 − 34𝑦𝑦 + 39
as a product of two quadratic factors.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2000 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2000Q7]
Given that
1 1 1 1
e=1+ + + + ⋯ + + ⋯,
1! 2! 3! 𝑟𝑟!
Use the binomial theorem to show that
1 𝑛𝑛
�1 + � < e
𝑛𝑛
for any positive integer 𝑛𝑛.
The product 𝑃𝑃(𝑛𝑛) is defined, for any positive integer 𝑛𝑛, by
3 5 9 2𝑛𝑛 + 1
𝑃𝑃(𝑛𝑛) = ∙ ∙ ∙ ⋯∙ .
2 4 8 2𝑛𝑛
Use the arithmetic-geometric mean inequality,
𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑎𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 1
≥ (𝑎𝑎1 ∙ 𝑎𝑎2 ∙ ⋯ ∙ 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 )𝑛𝑛 ,
𝑛𝑛
to show that 𝑃𝑃(𝑛𝑛) < e for all 𝑛𝑛.
Explain briefly why 𝑃𝑃(𝑛𝑛) tends to a limit as 𝑛𝑛 → ∞. Show that this limit, 𝐿𝐿, satisfies 2 < 𝐿𝐿 ≤ e.

[STEP 3, 2000Q8]
The sequence 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 is defined by 𝑎𝑎0 = 1, 𝑎𝑎1 = 1, and 2000
[Link]
2 4
1+ 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−1
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2).
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−2
Prove by induction that
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = 3𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−1 − 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−2 (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2).
Hence show that
𝛼𝛼 2𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝛼𝛼 −(2𝑛𝑛−1)
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1),
√5
1+√5
where 𝛼𝛼 = .
2

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2000

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2000Q9]
Two small discs of masses 𝑚𝑚 and 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇 lie on a smooth horizontal surface. The disc of mass 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇
is at rest, and the disc of mass 𝑚𝑚 is projected towards it with velocity 𝐮𝐮. After the collision, the
�. The collision is perfectly elastic.
disc of mass 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇 moves in the direction given by unit vector 𝐧𝐧
�
2𝐮𝐮.𝐧𝐧
(i) Show that the speed of the disc of mass 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇 after the collision is 1+𝜇𝜇.

(ii) Given that the two discs have equal kinetic energy after the collision, find an expression
� and 𝐮𝐮 and show that 3 − √8 ≤ 𝜇𝜇 ≤ 3 + √8.
for the cosine of the angle between 𝐧𝐧

[STEP 3, 2000Q10]
A sphere of radius 𝑎𝑎 and weight 𝑊𝑊 rests on horizontal ground. A thin uniform beam of weight
3√3𝑊𝑊 and length 2𝑎𝑎 is freely hinged to the ground at 𝑋𝑋, which is a distance √3𝑎𝑎 from the point
of contact of the sphere with the ground. The beam rests on the sphere, lying in the same
vertical plane as the centre of the sphere. The coefficients of friction between the beam and the
sphere and between the sphere and the ground are 𝜇𝜇1 and 𝜇𝜇2 respectively.
Given that the sphere is on the point of slipping at its contacts with both the ground and the
beam, find the values of 𝜇𝜇1 and 𝜇𝜇2 .

2000
[STEP 3, 2000Q11] [Link]

5
A thin beam is fixed at a height 2𝑎𝑎 above a horizontal plane. A uniform straight rod 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 of
length 9𝑎𝑎 and mass 𝑚𝑚 is supported by the beam at 𝐶𝐶. Initially, the rod is held so that it is
horizontal and perpendicular to the beam. The distance 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is 3𝑎𝑎, and the coefficient of friction
between the beam and the rod is 𝜇𝜇.
The rod is now released. Find the minimum value of 𝜇𝜇 for which 𝐵𝐵 strikes the horizontal plane
before slipping takes place at 𝐶𝐶.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2000 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2000Q12]
In a lottery, any one of 𝑁𝑁 numbers, where 𝑁𝑁 is large, is chosen at random and independently
for each player by machine. Each week there are 2𝑁𝑁 players and one winning number is drawn.
Write down an exact expression for the probability that there are three or fewer winners in a
week, given that you hold a winning ticket that week. Using the fact that
𝑎𝑎 𝑛𝑛
�1 − � ≈ e−𝑎𝑎
𝑛𝑛
2
for 𝑛𝑛 much larger than 𝑎𝑎, or otherwise, show that this probability is approximately .
3

Discuss briefly whether this probability would increase or decrease if the numbers were
chosen by the players.
Show that the expected number of winners in a week, given that you hold a winning ticket that
week, is 3 − 𝑁𝑁 −1 .

[STEP 3, 2000Q13]
A set of 𝑛𝑛 dice is rolled repeatedly. For each die the probability of showing a six is 𝑝𝑝. Show that
the probability that the first of the dice to show a six does so on the 𝑟𝑟th roll is
𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (𝑞𝑞−𝑛𝑛 − 1)
where 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝. 2000
[Link]

Determine, and simplify, an expression for the probability generating function for this 6
distribution, in terms of 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑛𝑛. The first of the dice to show a six does so on the 𝑅𝑅th roll. Find
1 36
the expected value of 𝑅𝑅 and show that, in the case 𝑛𝑛 = 2, 𝑝𝑝 = , this value is .
6 11

Show that the probability that the last of the dice to show a six does so on the 𝑟𝑟th roll is
(1 − 𝑞𝑞 𝑟𝑟 )𝑛𝑛 − (1 − 𝑞𝑞 𝑟𝑟−1 )𝑛𝑛 .
Find, for the case 𝑛𝑛 = 2, the probability generating function. The last of the dice to show a six
1
does so on the 𝑆𝑆th roll. Find the expected value of 𝑆𝑆 and evaluate this when 𝑝𝑝 = .
6

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2000

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2000Q14]
The random variable 𝑋𝑋 takes only the values 𝑥𝑥1 and 𝑥𝑥2 (where 𝑥𝑥1 ≠ 𝑥𝑥2 ), and the random
variable 𝑌𝑌 takes only the values 𝑦𝑦1 and 𝑦𝑦2 (where 𝑦𝑦1 ≠ 𝑦𝑦2 ). Their joint distribution is given by
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦1 ) = 𝑎𝑎; P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦2 ) = 𝑞𝑞 − 𝑎𝑎; P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥2 , 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦1 ) = 𝑝𝑝 − 𝑎𝑎.
Show that if E(𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋) = E(𝑋𝑋)E(𝑌𝑌) then
(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝)(𝑥𝑥1 − 𝑥𝑥2 )(𝑦𝑦1 − 𝑦𝑦2 ) = 0.
Hence show that two random variables each taking only two distinct values are independent if
E(𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋) = E(𝑋𝑋)E(𝑌𝑌).
Give a joint distribution for two random variables 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵, each taking the three values −1, 0
1
and 1 with probability , which have E(𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴) = E(𝐴𝐴)E(𝐵𝐵), but which are not independent.
3

2000
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2000 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2000
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2000

STEP 3 2001
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2001
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2001 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2001Q1]
d𝑦𝑦 1
Given that 𝑦𝑦 = ln�𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 2 + 1�, show that = .
d𝑥𝑥 √𝑥𝑥 2 +1

Prove by induction that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0,

(𝑥𝑥 2 + 1)𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+2 + (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛+1 + 𝑛𝑛2 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 = 0,
d𝑛𝑛 𝑦𝑦
where 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 = and 𝑦𝑦 0 = 𝑦𝑦.
d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛

Using this result in the case 𝑥𝑥 = 0, or otherwise, show that the Maclaurin series for 𝑦𝑦 begins
𝑥𝑥 3 3𝑥𝑥 5
𝑥𝑥 − +
6 40
and find the next non-zero term.

[STEP 3, 2001Q2]

Show that cosh−1 𝑥𝑥 = ln�𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 2 − 1�.

Show that the area of the region defined by the inequalities 𝑦𝑦 2 ≥ 𝑥𝑥 2 − 8 and 𝑥𝑥 2 ≥ 25𝑦𝑦 2 − 16
72
is ln 2.
5

2001
[STEP 3, 2001Q3] [Link]

2
Consider the equation
𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0,
where 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are real numbers.
(i) Show that the roots of the equation are real and positive if and only if 𝑏𝑏 > 0 and 𝑏𝑏 2 ≥ 4𝑐𝑐 >
0, and sketch the region of the 𝑏𝑏-𝑐𝑐 plane in which these conditions hold.
(ii) Sketch the region of the 𝑏𝑏-𝑐𝑐 plane in which the roots of the equation are real and less than
1 in magnitude.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2001

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2001Q4]
π
In this question, the function sin−1 is defined to have domain −1 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1 and range − ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤
2
π π
and the function tan−1 is defined to have the real numbers as its domain and range − <
2 2
π
𝑥𝑥 < .
2

(i) Let
2𝑥𝑥
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = , −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞.
1 + 𝑥𝑥 2
Sketch the graph of 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) and state the range of 𝑔𝑔.
(ii) Let
2𝑥𝑥
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = sin−1 � �, −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞.
1 + 𝑥𝑥 2
Show that 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 2 tan−1 𝑥𝑥 for −1 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1 and 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = π − 2 tan−1 𝑥𝑥 for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 1.
Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥).

[STEP 3, 2001Q5]
Show that the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 = 0 has exactly one real solution if 𝑝𝑝 ≥ 0.
A parabola 𝐶𝐶 is given parametrically by
𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡 2 , 𝑦𝑦 = 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑎𝑎 > 0). 2001
[Link]

Find an equation which must be satisfied by 𝑡𝑡 at points on 𝐶𝐶 at which the normal passes 3
through the point (ℎ, 𝑘𝑘). Hence show that, if ℎ ≤ 2𝑎𝑎, exactly one normal to 𝐶𝐶 will pass through
(ℎ, 𝑘𝑘).
Find, in Cartesian form, the equation of the locus of the points from which exactly two normal
can be drawn to 𝐶𝐶. Sketch the locus.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2001 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2001Q6]
The plane
𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧
+ + =1
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐
1 1 1
meets the co-ordinate axes at the points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶. The point 𝑀𝑀 has coordinates � 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐�
2 2 2
and 𝑂𝑂 is the origin.
1 1 1
Show that 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 meets the plane at the centroid �3 𝑎𝑎, 3 𝑏𝑏, 3 𝑐𝑐� of triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴. Show also that the
perpendiculars to the plane from 𝑂𝑂 and from 𝑀𝑀 meet the plane at the orthocentre and at the
circumcentre of triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 respectively.
Hence prove that the centroid of a triangle lies on the line segment joining its orthocentre and
circumcentre, and that it divides this line segment in the ratio 2 ∶ 1.
[The orthocentre of a triangle is the point at which the three altitudes intersect; the
circumcentre of a triangle is the point equidistant from the three vertices.]

[STEP 3, 2001Q7]
1
Sketch the graph of the function ln 𝑥𝑥 − 2 𝑥𝑥 2 .

Show that the differential equation

d𝑦𝑦 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
= 2 2001
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 − 1 [Link]

4
describes a family of parabolas each of which passes through the points (1, 0) and (−1, 0) and
has its vertex on the 𝑦𝑦-axis.
Hence find the equation of the curve that passes through the point (1, 1) and intersects each of
the above parabolas orthogonally. Sketch this curve.
[Two curves intersect orthogonally if their tangents at the point of intersection are
perpendicular.]

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2001

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2001Q8]
(i) Prove that the equations
|𝑧𝑧 − (1 + 𝐢𝐢)|2 = 2 (∗)
and
|𝑧𝑧 − (1 − 𝐢𝐢)|2 = 2|𝑧𝑧 − 1|2
describe the same locus in the complex 𝑧𝑧-plane. Sketch this locus.
(ii) Prove that the equation
𝑧𝑧 − 2 π
arg � �= (∗∗)
𝑧𝑧 4
describes part of this same locus, and show on your sketch which part.
(iii) The complex number 𝑤𝑤 is related to 𝑧𝑧 by
2
𝑤𝑤 = .
𝑧𝑧
Determine the locus produced in the complex 𝑤𝑤-plane if 𝑧𝑧 satisfies (∗). Sketch this locus
and indicate the part of this locus that corresponds to (∗∗).

2001
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2001 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2001Q9]
𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 are parallel, thin, horizontal fixed beams. 𝐵𝐵1 is a vertical distance 𝑑𝑑 sin 𝛼𝛼 above 𝐵𝐵2 ,
π
and a horizontal distance 𝑑𝑑 cos 𝛼𝛼 from 𝐵𝐵2 , where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < . A long heavy plank is held so that
2
it rests on the two beams, perpendicular to each, with its centre of gravity at 𝐵𝐵1 . The coefficients
of friction between the plank and 𝐵𝐵1 and 𝐵𝐵2 are 𝜇𝜇1 and 𝜇𝜇2 , respectively, where 𝜇𝜇1 < 𝜇𝜇2 and
𝜇𝜇1 + 𝜇𝜇2 = 2 tan 𝛼𝛼.
The plank is released and slips over the beams experiencing a force of resistance from each
beam equal to the limiting frictional force (i.e. the product of the appropriate coefficient of
friction and the normal reaction). Show that it will come to rest with its centre of gravity over
𝐵𝐵2 in a time
1
𝑑𝑑 2
π� � .
𝑔𝑔(𝜇𝜇2 − 𝜇𝜇1 ) cos 𝛼𝛼

[STEP 3, 2001Q10]
Three ships 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 move with velocities 𝐯𝐯1, 𝐯𝐯2 and 𝐮𝐮 respectively. The velocities of 𝐴𝐴 and
𝐵𝐵 relative to 𝐶𝐶 are equal in magnitude and perpendicular. Write down conditions that 𝐮𝐮, 𝐯𝐯1 and
𝐯𝐯2 must satisfy and show that
2 2
1 1 2001
�𝐮𝐮 − (𝐯𝐯 + 𝐯𝐯2 )� =� (𝐯𝐯 − 𝐯𝐯2 )�
2 1 2 1 [Link]

6
and
1
�𝐮𝐮 − (𝐯𝐯1 + 𝐯𝐯2 )� ∙ (𝐯𝐯1 − 𝐯𝐯2 ) = 0.
2
Explain why these equations determine, for given 𝐯𝐯1 and 𝐯𝐯2 , two possible velocities for 𝐶𝐶 ,
provided 𝐯𝐯1 ≠ 𝐯𝐯2.
If 𝐯𝐯1 and 𝐯𝐯2 are equal in magnitude and perpendicular, show that if 𝐮𝐮 ≠ 𝟎𝟎 then 𝐮𝐮 = 𝐯𝐯1 + 𝐯𝐯2.

[STEP 3, 2001Q11]
A uniform cylinder of radius 𝑎𝑎 rotates freely about its axis, which is fixed and horizontal. The
moment of inertia of the cylinder about its axis is 𝐼𝐼. A light string is wrapped around the
cylinder and supports a mass 𝑚𝑚 which hangs freely. A particle of mass 𝑀𝑀 is fixed to the surface
of the cylinder. The system is held at rest with the particle vertically below the axis of the
cylinder, and then released. Find, in terms of 𝐼𝐼, 𝑎𝑎, 𝑀𝑀, 𝑚𝑚, 𝑔𝑔 and 𝜃𝜃, the angular velocity of the
cvlinder when it has rotated through angle 𝜃𝜃.
𝑚𝑚
Show that the cylinder will rotate without coming to a halt if 𝑀𝑀 > sin 𝛼𝛼, where 𝛼𝛼 satisifes 𝛼𝛼 =
1
tan 𝛼𝛼 and 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < π.
2

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2001

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2001Q12]
A bag contains 𝑏𝑏 black balls and 𝑤𝑤 white balls. Balls are drawn at random from the bag and
when a white ball is drawn it is put aside.
(i) If the black balls drawn are also put aside, find an expression for the expected number of
black balls that have been drawn when the last white ball is removed.
(ii) If instead the black balls drawn are put back into the bag, prove that the expected number
𝑏𝑏
of times a black ball has been drawn when the first white ball is removed is . Hence write
𝑤𝑤
down, in the form of a sum, an expression for the expected number of times a black ball
has been drawn when the last white ball is removed.

[STEP 3, 2001Q13]
In a game for two players, a fair coin is tossed repeatedly. Each player is assigned a sequence
of heads and tails and the player whose sequence appears first wins. Four players, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and
𝐷𝐷 take turns to play the game. Each time they play, 𝐴𝐴 is assigned the sequence TTH (i.e. Tail
then Tail then Head), 𝐵𝐵 is assigned THH, 𝐶𝐶 is assigned HHT and 𝐷𝐷 is assigned HTT.
(i) 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 play the game. Let 𝑝𝑝𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 , 𝑝𝑝𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 , 𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 and 𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 be the probabilities of 𝐴𝐴 winning the
game given that the first two tosses of the coin show HH, HT, TH and TT respectively.
1 1 2
Explain why 𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 1, and why 𝑝𝑝𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 2 𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 + 2 𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 . Show that 𝑝𝑝𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 𝑝𝑝𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 3 and that
2001
1 2
𝑝𝑝𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = . Deduce that the probability that 𝐴𝐴 wins the game is . [Link]
3 3
7
(ii) 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 play the game. Find the probability that 𝐵𝐵 wins.
(iii) Show that if 𝐶𝐶 plays 𝐷𝐷, then 𝐶𝐶 is more likely to win than 𝐷𝐷, but that if 𝐷𝐷 plays 𝐴𝐴, then 𝐷𝐷 is
more likely to win than 𝐴𝐴.

[STEP 3, 2001Q14]
1
A random variable 𝑋𝑋 is distributed uniformly on [0, 𝑎𝑎]. Show that the variance of 𝑋𝑋 is 12 𝑎𝑎2 .

A sample, 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 of two independent values of the random variable is drawn, and the
1
variance 𝑉𝑉 of the sample is determined. Show that 𝑉𝑉 = (𝑋𝑋1 − 𝑋𝑋2 )2 , and hence prove that 2𝑉𝑉
4
is an unbiased estimator of the variance of 𝑋𝑋.
1 2
Find an exact expression for the probability that the value of 𝑉𝑉 is less than 𝑎𝑎 and estimate
12
the value of this probability correct to one significant figure.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2001 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2001
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2001

STEP 3 2002
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2002
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2002 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2002Q1]
ln 𝑥𝑥
Find the area of the region between the curve 𝑦𝑦 = and the 𝑥𝑥-axis, for 1 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 𝑎𝑎. What
𝑥𝑥
happens to this area as 𝑎𝑎 tends to infinity?
ln 𝑥𝑥
Find the volume of the solid obtained when the region between the curve 𝑦𝑦 = and the 𝑥𝑥-
𝑥𝑥
axis, for 1 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 𝑎𝑎 , is rotated through 2π radians about the 𝑥𝑥 -axis. What happens to this
volume as 𝑎𝑎 tends to infinity?

[STEP 3, 2002Q2]
𝑎𝑎+𝑏𝑏
Prove that arctan 𝑎𝑎 + arctan 𝑏𝑏 = arctan � � when 0 < 𝑎𝑎 < 1 and 0 < 𝑏𝑏 < 1.
1−𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎

Prove by induction that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,

𝑛𝑛
1 𝑛𝑛
� arctan � � = arctan � �
𝑟𝑟 2 + 𝑟𝑟 + 1 𝑛𝑛 + 2
𝑟𝑟=1

and hence find

∞
1
� arctan � �.
𝑟𝑟 2 + 𝑟𝑟 + 1
𝑟𝑟=1
2002
Hence prove that [Link]

∞ 2
1 π
� arctan � 2 �= .
𝑟𝑟 − 𝑟𝑟 + 1 2
𝑟𝑟=1

[STEP 3, 2002Q3]
Let

𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑎𝑎 √𝑥𝑥 − √𝑥𝑥 − 𝑏𝑏,

Where 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 𝑏𝑏 > 0 and 𝑎𝑎 > 1. Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥). Hence show that the equation 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑐𝑐,
where 𝑐𝑐 > 0, has no solution when 𝑐𝑐 2 < 𝑏𝑏(𝑎𝑎2 − 1). Find conditions on 𝑐𝑐 2 in terms of 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏
for the equation to have exactly one or exactly two solutions.

Solve the equations (i) 3√𝑥𝑥 − √𝑥𝑥 − 2 = 4 and (ii) 3√𝑥𝑥 − √𝑥𝑥 − 3 = 5.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2002

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2002Q4]
Show that if 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 are positive and 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑥𝑥 2 = 𝑦𝑦 3 − 𝑦𝑦 2 then 𝑥𝑥 < 𝑦𝑦.
Show further that if 0 < 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 𝑦𝑦 − 1, then 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑥𝑥 2 < 𝑦𝑦 3 − 𝑦𝑦 2 .
Prove that there does not exist a pair of positive integers such that the difference of their cubes
is equal to the sum of their squares.
Find all the pairs of integers such that the difference of their cubes is equal to the sum of their
squares.

[STEP 3, 2002Q5]
Give a condition that must be satisfied by 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 for it to be possible to write the quadratic
polynomial 𝑝𝑝𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 + 𝑟𝑟 in the form 𝑝𝑝(𝑥𝑥 + ℎ)2 , for some ℎ.
Obtain an equation, which you need not simplify, that must be satisfied by 𝑡𝑡 if it is possible to
write
2
1
�𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑡𝑡� − (𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑏𝑏𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑐𝑐𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑒𝑒)
2
in the form 𝑘𝑘(𝑥𝑥 + ℎ)2, for some 𝑘𝑘 and ℎ.
Hence, or otherwise, write 𝑥𝑥 4 + 6𝑥𝑥 3 + 9𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑥𝑥 − 7 as a product of two quadratic factors.

2002
[STEP 3, 2002Q6] [Link]

3
Find all the solution curves of the differential equation

d𝑦𝑦 4
𝑦𝑦 4 � � = (𝑦𝑦 2 − 1)2
d𝑥𝑥
that pass through either of the points
√3
(i) �0, 2
�,

√5
(ii) �0, 2
�.

Show also that 𝑦𝑦 = 1 and 𝑦𝑦 = −1 are solutions of the differential equation. Sketch all these
solution curves on a single set of axes.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2002 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2002Q7]
π
Given that 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽 are acute angles, show that 𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽 = if and only if cos2 𝛼𝛼 + cos2 𝛽𝛽 = 1.
2

In the 𝑥𝑥 -𝑦𝑦 plane, the point 𝐴𝐴 has coordinates (0, 𝑠𝑠) and the point 𝐶𝐶 has coordinates (𝑠𝑠, 0),
where 𝑠𝑠 > 0. The point 𝐵𝐵 lies in the first quadrant (𝑥𝑥 > 0, 𝑦𝑦 > 0). The lengths of 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 are respectively 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐.
Show that
(𝑠𝑠 2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑎𝑎2 )2 + (𝑠𝑠 2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑐𝑐 2 )2 = 4𝑠𝑠 2 𝑏𝑏 2
and hence that
(2𝑠𝑠 2 − 𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑐𝑐 2 )2 + (2𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑐𝑐 2 )2 = 4𝑎𝑎2 𝑐𝑐 2 .
Deduce that
(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐)2 ≤ 2𝑏𝑏 2 ≤ (𝑎𝑎 + 𝑐𝑐)2 .

[STEP 3, 2002Q8]
Four complex numbers 𝑢𝑢1 , 𝑢𝑢2 , 𝑢𝑢3 and 𝑢𝑢4 have unit modulus, and arguments 𝜃𝜃1 , 𝜃𝜃2 , 𝜃𝜃3 and 𝜃𝜃4 ,
respectively, with −π < 𝜃𝜃1 < 𝜃𝜃2 < 𝜃𝜃3 < 𝜃𝜃4 < π.
Show that
1
arg(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢2 ) = (𝜃𝜃1 + 𝜃𝜃2 − π) + 2𝑛𝑛π
2 2002
[Link]
where 𝑛𝑛 = 0 or 1. Deduce that
4
arg�(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢2 )(𝑢𝑢4 − 𝑢𝑢3 )� = arg�(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢4 )(𝑢𝑢3 − 𝑢𝑢2 )� + 2𝑛𝑛π
for some integer 𝑛𝑛.
Prove that
|(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢2 )(𝑢𝑢4 − 𝑢𝑢3 )| + |(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢4 )(𝑢𝑢3 − 𝑢𝑢2 )| = |(𝑢𝑢1 − 𝑢𝑢3 )(𝑢𝑢4 − 𝑢𝑢2 )|.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2002

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2002Q9]
A tall container made of light material of negligible thickness has the form of a prism, with a
square base of area 𝑎𝑎2 . It contains a volume 𝑘𝑘𝑎𝑎3 of fluid of uniform density. The container is
held so that it stands on a rough plane, which is inclined at angle 𝜃𝜃 to the horizontal, with two
1
of the edges of the base of the container horizontal. In the case 𝑘𝑘 > tan 𝜃𝜃, show that the centre
2
of mass of the fluid is at a distance 𝑥𝑥 from the lower side of the container and at a distance 𝑦𝑦
from the base of the container, where
𝑥𝑥 1 tan 𝜃𝜃 𝑦𝑦 𝑘𝑘 tan2 𝜃𝜃
= − , = + .
𝑎𝑎 2 12𝑘𝑘 𝑎𝑎 2 24𝑘𝑘
1
Determine the corresponding coordinates in the case 𝑘𝑘 < tan 𝜃𝜃.
2
1
The container is now released. Given that 𝑘𝑘 < , show that the container will topple if 𝜃𝜃 > 45°.
2

[STEP 3, 2002Q10]
A light hollow cylinder of radius 𝑎𝑎 can rotate freely about its axis of symmetry, which is fixed
and horizontal. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is fixed to the cylinder, and a second particle, also of mass
𝑚𝑚, moves on the rough inside surface of the cylinder. Initially, the cylinder is at rest, with the
fixed particle on the same horizontal level as its axis and the second particle at rest vertically
below this axis. The system is then released. Show that, if 𝜃𝜃 is the angle through which2002 the
cylinder has rotated, then [Link]

5
𝑔𝑔
𝜃𝜃̈ = (cos 𝜃𝜃 − sin 𝜃𝜃),
2𝑎𝑎
provided that the second particle does not slip.
3+√3
Given that the coefficient of friction is 6
, show that the second particle starts to slip when
the cylinder has rotated through 60°.

[STEP 3, 2002Q11]
A particle moves on a smooth triangular horizontal surface 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 with angle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 30°. The
surface is bounded by two vertical walls 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the coefficient of restitution between
the particle and the walls is 𝑒𝑒, where 𝑒𝑒 < 1. The particle, which is initially at point 𝑃𝑃 on the
surface and moving with velocity 𝑢𝑢1 , strikes the wall 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 at 𝑀𝑀1 , with angle 𝑃𝑃𝑀𝑀1 𝐴𝐴 = 𝜃𝜃 , and
𝑣𝑣
rebounds, with velocity 𝑣𝑣1 , to strike the wall 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 at 𝑁𝑁1 , with angle 𝑀𝑀1 𝑁𝑁1 𝐵𝐵 = 𝜃𝜃. Find 𝑒𝑒 and 𝑢𝑢1 in
1
terms of 𝜃𝜃.
The motion continues, with the particle striking side 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 at 𝑀𝑀2 , 𝑀𝑀3 , … and striking side 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 at
𝑁𝑁2 , 𝑁𝑁3 , …. Show that, if 𝜃𝜃 < 60°, the particle reaches 𝑂𝑂 in a finite time.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2002 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2002Q12]
In a game, a player tosses a biased coin repeatedly until two successive tails occur, when the
game terminates. For each head which occurs the player wins £1. If 𝐸𝐸 is the expected number
of tosses of the coin in the course of a game, and 𝑝𝑝 is the probability of a head, explain why
𝐸𝐸 = 𝑝𝑝(1 + 𝐸𝐸) + (1 − 𝑝𝑝)𝑝𝑝(2 + 𝐸𝐸) + 2(1 − 𝑝𝑝)2
and hence determine 𝐸𝐸 in terms of 𝑝𝑝. Find also, in terms of 𝑝𝑝, the expected winnings in the
course of a game.
A second game is played, with the same rules, except that the player continues to toss the coin
until 𝑟𝑟 successive tails occur. Show that the expected number of tosses in the course of a game
1−𝑞𝑞𝑟𝑟
is given by the expression 𝑝𝑝𝑞𝑞𝑟𝑟
, where 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝.

[STEP 3, 2002Q13]
A continuous random variable is said to have an exponential distribution with parameter 𝜆𝜆 if
its density function is 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = 𝜆𝜆e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 (0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 < ∞). If 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 , which are independent random
variables, have exponential distributions with parameters 𝜆𝜆1 and 𝜆𝜆2 respectively, find an
expression for the probability that either 𝑋𝑋1 or 𝑋𝑋2 (or both) is less than 𝑥𝑥. Prove that if 𝑋𝑋 is the
random variable whose value is the lesser of the values of 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 , then 𝑋𝑋 also has an
exponential distribution.
2002
Route A and Route B buses run from my house to my college. The time between buses on each [Link]

6
route has an exponential distribution and the mean time between buses is 15 minutes for Route
A and 30 minutes for Route B. The timings of the buses on the two routes are independent. If I
emerge from my house one day to see a Route A bus and a Route B bus just leaving the stop,
show that the median wait for the next bus to my college will be approximately 7 minutes.

[STEP 3, 2002Q14]
Prove that, for any two discrete random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌,
Var[𝑋𝑋 + 𝑌𝑌] = Var[𝑋𝑋] + Var[𝑌𝑌] + 2Cov[𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌],
where Var[𝑋𝑋] is the variance of 𝑋𝑋 and Cov[𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌] is the covariance of 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌.
When a Grandmaster plays a sequence of 𝑚𝑚 games of chess, she is, independently, equally
likely to win, lose or draw each game. If the values of the random variables 𝑊𝑊, 𝐿𝐿 and 𝐷𝐷 are the
numbers of her wins, losses and draws respectively, justify briefly the following claims:
(i) 𝑊𝑊 + 𝐿𝐿 + 𝐷𝐷 has variance 0.
(ii) 𝑊𝑊 + 𝐿𝐿 has a binomial distribution.
Cov[𝑊𝑊,𝐿𝐿]
Find the value of .
�Var[𝑊𝑊]Var[𝐿𝐿]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2002

STEP 3 2003
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2003
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2003 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2003Q1]
Given that 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎 > 0 and 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏 > 0, and that 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑎𝑎, show that

d 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎 √𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎
arcsin � �=
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏 (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏)√𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 2𝑥𝑥
d 𝑥𝑥+𝑎𝑎
and find arcosh � �.
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥+𝑏𝑏

Hence, or otherwise, integrate, for 𝑥𝑥 > −1,

1
(i) ∫ (𝑥𝑥+1) d𝑥𝑥,
√𝑥𝑥+3
1
(ii) ∫ (𝑥𝑥+3) d𝑥𝑥.
√𝑥𝑥+1

d 1 d 1
[You may use the results arcsin 𝑥𝑥 = and arcosh 𝑥𝑥 = .]
d𝑥𝑥 √1−𝑥𝑥 2 d𝑥𝑥 √𝑥𝑥 2 −1

[STEP 3, 2003Q2]
1×3×⋯×(2𝑟𝑟−1)
Show that 2𝑟𝑟𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 = 𝑟𝑟!
× 2𝑟𝑟 , for 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 1.
1
(i) Give the first four terms of the binomial series for (1 − 𝑝𝑝)−2 .
By choosing a suitable value for 𝑝𝑝 in this series, or otherwise, show that 2003
[Link]
∞ 2𝑟𝑟
𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 2
� 𝑟𝑟 = √2.
8
𝑟𝑟=0

(ii) Show that

∞
(2𝑟𝑟 + 1) 2𝑟𝑟𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 3
� 𝑟𝑟
= �√5� .
5
𝑟𝑟=0

[Note: 𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 is an alternative notation for �𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟� for 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 1, and 0𝐶𝐶0 = 1.]
𝑛𝑛

[STEP 3, 2003Q3]
If 𝑚𝑚 is a positive integer, show that (1 + 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚 + (1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚 ≠ 0 for any real 𝑥𝑥.
The function 𝑓𝑓 is defined by
(1 + 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚 − (1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = .
(1 + 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚 + (1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚
Find and simplify an expression for 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥).
1
In the case 𝑚𝑚 = 5, sketch the curves 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑦𝑦 = .
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2003

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2003Q4]
A curve is defined parametrically by
𝑥𝑥 = 𝑡𝑡 2 , 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑡𝑡(1 + 𝑡𝑡 2 ).
The tangent at the point with parameter 𝑡𝑡, where 𝑡𝑡 ≠ 0, meets the curve again at the point with
parameter 𝑇𝑇, where 𝑇𝑇 ≠ 𝑡𝑡. Show that
1 − 𝑡𝑡 2
𝑇𝑇 = and 3𝑡𝑡 2 ≠ 1.
2𝑡𝑡
Given a point 𝑃𝑃0 on the curve, with parameter 𝑡𝑡0 , a sequence of points 𝑃𝑃0 , 𝑃𝑃1 , 𝑃𝑃2 , … on the curve
7π
is constructed such that the tangent at 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 meets the curve again at 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖+1 . If 𝑡𝑡0 = tan , show that
18
𝑃𝑃3 = 𝑃𝑃0 but 𝑃𝑃1 ≠ 𝑃𝑃0 . Find a second value of 𝑡𝑡0 , with 𝑡𝑡0 > 0, for which 𝑃𝑃3 = 𝑃𝑃0 but 𝑃𝑃1 ≠ 𝑃𝑃0 .

[STEP 3, 2003Q5]
Find the coordinates of the turning point on the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐. Sketch the curve in
the case that the equation 𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 has two distinct real roots. Use your sketch to
determine necessary and sufficient conditions on 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 for the equation 𝑥𝑥 2 − 2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 to
have two distinct real roots. Determine necessary and sufficient conditions on 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 for this
equation to have two distinct positive roots.
Find the coordinates of the turning points on the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑏𝑏 2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑐𝑐 (with 𝑏𝑏 > 0) and
hence determine necessary and sufficient conditions on 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 for the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑏𝑏 2 𝑥𝑥 +
𝑐𝑐 = 0 to have three distinct real roots. Determine necessary and sufficient conditions on 2003 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏
[Link]
and 𝑐𝑐 for the equation (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎)3 − 3𝑏𝑏 2 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑎𝑎) + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 to have three distinct positive roots. 3
Show that the equation 2𝑥𝑥 3 − 9𝑥𝑥 2 + 7𝑥𝑥 − 1 = 0 has three distinct positive roots.

[STEP 3, 2003Q6]
Show that
1 1 1
2 sin 𝜃𝜃 cos 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = sin �𝑟𝑟 + � 𝜃𝜃 − sin �𝑟𝑟 − � 𝜃𝜃.
2 2 2
Hence, or otherwise, find all solutions of the equation
cos 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + cos(𝑎𝑎 + 1)𝜃𝜃 + ⋯ + cos(𝑏𝑏 − 2)𝜃𝜃 + cos(𝑏𝑏 − 1)𝜃𝜃 = 0,
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are positive integers with 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏 − 1.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2003 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2003Q7]
In the 𝑥𝑥 -𝑦𝑦 plane, the point 𝐴𝐴 has coordinates (𝑎𝑎, 0) and the point 𝐵𝐵 has coordinates (0, 𝑏𝑏),
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are positive. The point 𝑃𝑃, which is distinct from 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵, has coordinates (𝑠𝑠, 𝑡𝑡).
𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 are the feet of the perpendiculars from 𝑃𝑃 to the 𝑥𝑥-axis and 𝑦𝑦-axis respectively, and 𝑁𝑁
is the foot of the perpendicular from 𝑃𝑃 to the line 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴. Show that the coordinates (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) of 𝑁𝑁 are
given by
𝑎𝑎𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑎𝑎(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑏𝑏(𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)
𝑥𝑥 = , 𝑦𝑦 = .
𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2
𝑡𝑡−𝑏𝑏 𝑡𝑡
Show that, if � �� = −1, then 𝑁𝑁 lies on the line 𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋.
𝑠𝑠 𝑠𝑠−𝑎𝑎

Give a geometrical interpretation of this result.

[STEP 3, 2003Q8]
(i) Show that the gradient at a point (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) on the curve
(𝑦𝑦 + 2𝑥𝑥)3 (𝑦𝑦 − 4𝑥𝑥) = 𝑐𝑐,
where 𝑐𝑐 is a constant, is given by
d𝑦𝑦 16𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦
= .
d𝑥𝑥 2𝑦𝑦 − 5𝑥𝑥
(ii) By considering the derivative with respect to 𝑥𝑥 of (𝑦𝑦 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)𝑛𝑛 (𝑦𝑦 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏), or otherwise, find
the general solutions of the differential equation 2003
[Link]
d𝑦𝑦 10𝑥𝑥 − 4𝑦𝑦 4
= .
d𝑥𝑥 3𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2003

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2003Q9]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is constrained to move on a vertical circle of smooth wire with centre 𝑂𝑂
and of radius 𝑎𝑎. 𝐿𝐿 is the lowest point of the circle and 𝐻𝐻 the highest and ∠𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 𝜃𝜃. The particle
is attached to 𝐻𝐻 by an elastic string of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 where
𝛼𝛼 > 1. Show that, if 𝛼𝛼 > 2, there is an equilibrium position with 0 < 𝜃𝜃 < π.
π
Given that 𝛼𝛼 = 2 + √2, and that 𝜃𝜃 = + 𝜙𝜙, show that
2

𝑔𝑔�√2 + 1�
𝜙𝜙̈ ≈ 𝜙𝜙
2𝑎𝑎
when 𝜙𝜙 is small.
For this value of 𝛼𝛼 , explain briefly what happens to the particle if it is given a small
π
displacement when 𝜃𝜃 = .
2

[STEP 3, 2003Q10]
A particle moves along the 𝑥𝑥-axis in such a way that its acceleration is 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑥𝑥̇ where 𝑘𝑘 is a positive
constant. When 𝑡𝑡 = 0, 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑑𝑑 (where 𝑑𝑑 > 0) and 𝑥𝑥̇ = 𝑈𝑈.
(i) Find 𝑥𝑥 as a function of 𝑡𝑡 in the case 𝑈𝑈 = 𝑘𝑘𝑑𝑑 2 and show that 𝑥𝑥 tends to infinity as 𝑡𝑡 tends to
π
.
2𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 2003
[Link]
(ii) If 𝑈𝑈 < 0, find 𝑥𝑥 as a function of 𝑡𝑡 and show that it tends to a limit, which you should state
5
in terms of 𝑑𝑑 and 𝑈𝑈, as 𝑡𝑡 tends to infinity.

[STEP 3, 2003Q11]
Point 𝐵𝐵 is a distance 𝑑𝑑 due south of point 𝐴𝐴 on a horizontal plane. Particle 𝑃𝑃 is at rest at 𝐵𝐵 at
𝑡𝑡 = 0, when it begins to move with constant acceleration 𝑎𝑎 in a straight line with fixed bearing
𝛽𝛽. Particle 𝑄𝑄 is projected from point 𝐴𝐴 at 𝑡𝑡 = 0 and moves in a straight line with constant speed
𝑣𝑣. Show that if the direction of projection of 𝑄𝑄 can be chosen so that 𝑄𝑄 strikes 𝑃𝑃, then
𝑣𝑣 2 ≥ 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎(1 − cos 𝛽𝛽).
Show further that if 𝑣𝑣 2 > 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎(1 − cos 𝛽𝛽) then the direction of projection of 𝑄𝑄 can be chosen so
that 𝑄𝑄 strikes 𝑃𝑃 before 𝑃𝑃 has moved a distance 𝑑𝑑.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2003 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2003Q12]
Brief interruptions to my work occur on average every ten minutes and the number of
interruptions in any given time period has a Poisson distribution. Given that an interruption
has just occurred, find the probability that I will have less than 𝑡𝑡 minutes to work before the
next interruption. If the random variable 𝑇𝑇 is the time I have to work before the next
interruption, find the probability density function of 𝑇𝑇.
I need an uninterrupted half hour to finish an important paper. Show that the expected number
of interruptions before my first uninterrupted period of half an hour or more is e3 − 1. Find
also the expected length of time between interruptions that are less than half an hour apart.
Hence write down the expected wait before my first uninterrupted period of half an hour or
more.

[STEP 3, 2003Q13]
In a rabbit warren, underground chambers 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 are at the vertices of a square, and
burrows join 𝐴𝐴 to 𝐵𝐵, 𝐵𝐵 to 𝐶𝐶, 𝐶𝐶 to 𝐷𝐷 and 𝐷𝐷 to 𝐴𝐴. Each of the chambers also has a tunnel to the
surface. A rabbit finding itself in any chamber runs along one of the two burrows to a
neighbouring chamber, or leaves the burrow through the tunnel to the surface. Each of these
three possibilities is equally likely.
Let 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 , 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 , 𝑝𝑝𝐶𝐶 and 𝑝𝑝𝐷𝐷 be the probabilities of a rabbit leaving the burrow through the tunnel
2003
from chamber 𝐴𝐴, given that it is currently in chamber 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 or 𝐷𝐷, respectively. [Link]

1 1 1 6
(i) Explain why 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 = + 𝑝𝑝𝐵𝐵 + 𝑝𝑝𝐷𝐷 .
3 3 3

(ii) Determine 𝑝𝑝𝐴𝐴 .

(iii) Find the probability that a rabbit which starts in chamber 𝐴𝐴 does not visit chamber 𝐶𝐶,
given that it eventually leaves the burrow through the tunnel in chamber 𝐴𝐴.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2003

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2003Q14]
Write down the probability generating function for the score on a standard, fair six-faced die
whose faces are labelled 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Hence show that the probability generating function for
the sum of the scores on two standard, fair six-faced dice, rolled independently, can be written
as
1 2
𝑡𝑡 (1 + 𝑡𝑡 2 )(1 − 𝑡𝑡 + 𝑡𝑡 2 )2 (1 + 𝑡𝑡 + 𝑡𝑡 2 )2 .
36
Write down, in factorised form, the probability generating functions for the scores on two fair
six-faced dice whose faces are labelled with the numbers 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4 and 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and
hence show that when these dice are rolled independently, the probability of any given sum of
the scores is the same as for the two standard fair six-faced dice.
Standard, fair four-faced dice are tetrahedra whose faces are labelled 1, 2, 3, 4, the score being
taken from the face which is not visible after throwing, and each score being equally likely. Find
all the ways in which two fair four-faced dice can have their faces labelled with positive integers
if the probability of any given sum of the scores is to be the same as for the two standard fair
four-faced dice.

2003
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2003 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2003
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2003

STEP 3 2004
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2004
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2004 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2004Q1]
Show that
𝑎𝑎
sinh 𝑥𝑥 1 √2 cosh 𝑎𝑎 − 1 1 √2 + 1
� d𝑥𝑥 = ln � � + ln � �
0 2 cosh2 𝑥𝑥 − 1 2√2 √2 cosh 𝑎𝑎 + 1 2√2 √2 − 1
and find
𝑎𝑎
cosh 𝑥𝑥
� d𝑥𝑥.
0 1 + 2 sinh2 𝑥𝑥
Hence show that
∞
cosh 𝑥𝑥 − sinh 𝑥𝑥 π 1 √2 + 1
� 2
d𝑥𝑥 = − ln � �.
0 1 + 2 sinh 𝑥𝑥 2√2 2√2 √2 − 1
𝑥𝑥
By substituting 𝑢𝑢 = e in this result, or otherwise, find
∞
1
� d𝑢𝑢.
1 1 + 𝑢𝑢4

[STEP 3, 2004Q2]
The equation of a curve is 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) where
2004
16(2𝑥𝑥 + 1)2 [Link]
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 − 4 − .
𝑥𝑥 2 (𝑥𝑥 − 4) 2

(i) Write down the equations of the vertical and oblique asymptotes to the curve and show
that the oblique asymptote is a tangent to the curve.
(ii) Show that the equation 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 0 has a double root.
(iii) Sketch the curve.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2004

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2004Q3]
Given that 𝑓𝑓 ′′ (𝑥𝑥) > 0 when 𝑎𝑎 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 𝑏𝑏, explain with the aid of a sketch why
𝑏𝑏
𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓(𝑎𝑎) + 𝑓𝑓(𝑏𝑏)
(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎)𝑓𝑓 � � < � 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 < (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎) .
2 𝑎𝑎 2
By choosing suitable 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥), show that
4 1 1 1 1 1
2
< − < � 2+ �,
(2𝑛𝑛 − 1) 𝑛𝑛 − 1 𝑛𝑛 2 𝑛𝑛 (𝑛𝑛 − 1)2
where 𝑛𝑛 is an integer greater than 1.
Deduce that
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4� 2
+ 2 + 2 + ⋯ � < 1 < + � 2 + 2 + 2 + ⋯ �.
3 5 7 2 2 3 4
Show that
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
� 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + ⋯� < 2 + 2 + 2 + ⋯
2 3 4 5 6 3 5 7
and hence show that
∞
3 1 7
<� 2< .
2 𝑛𝑛 4
𝑛𝑛=1

2004
[STEP 3, 2004Q4] [Link]

π 3
The triangle 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is isosceles, with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and angle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 2𝛼𝛼 where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < . The semi-
2
circle 𝐶𝐶0 has its centre at the midpoint of the base 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 of the triangle, and the sides 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
of the triangle are both tangent to the semi-circle. 𝐶𝐶1 , 𝐶𝐶2 , 𝐶𝐶3 , … are circles such that 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 is tangent
to 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛−1 and to sides 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 of the triangle.
Let 𝑟𝑟𝑛𝑛 be the radius of 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 . Show that
𝑟𝑟𝑛𝑛+1 1 − sin 𝛼𝛼
= .
𝑟𝑟𝑛𝑛 1 + sin 𝛼𝛼
Let 𝑆𝑆 be the total area of the semi-circle 𝐶𝐶0 and circles 𝐶𝐶1 , 𝐶𝐶2 , 𝐶𝐶3 , …. Show that
1 + sin2 𝛼𝛼 2
𝑆𝑆 = π𝑟𝑟0 .
4 sin 𝛼𝛼
Show that there are values of 𝛼𝛼 for which 𝑆𝑆 is more than four fifths of the area of triangle 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2004 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2004Q5]
Show that if cos(𝑥𝑥 − 𝛼𝛼) = cos 𝛽𝛽 then either tan 𝑥𝑥 = tan(𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽) or tan 𝑥𝑥 = tan(𝛼𝛼 − 𝛽𝛽) . By
choosing suitable values of 𝑥𝑥, 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽, give an example to show that if tan 𝑥𝑥 = tan(𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽), then
cos(𝑥𝑥 − 𝛼𝛼) need not equal to cos 𝛽𝛽.
4
Let 𝜔𝜔 be the acute angle such that tan 𝜔𝜔 = .
3

(i) For 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π, solve the equation

cos 𝑥𝑥 − 7 sin 𝑥𝑥 = 5
giving both solutions in terms of 𝜔𝜔.
(ii) For 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π, solve the equation
2 cos 𝑥𝑥 + 11 sin 𝑥𝑥 = 10
showing that one solution is twice the other and giving both in terms of 𝜔𝜔.

[STEP 3, 2004Q6]
Given a sequence 𝑤𝑤0 , 𝑤𝑤1 , 𝑤𝑤2 , … , the sequence 𝐹𝐹1 , 𝐹𝐹2 , … is defined by
2
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 = 𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛2 + 𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛−1 − 4𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛 𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛−1 .
Show that 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 − 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛−1 = (𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛 − 𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛−2 )(𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛 + 𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛−2 − 4𝑤𝑤𝑛𝑛−1 ) for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.
(i) The sequence 𝑢𝑢0 , 𝑢𝑢1 , 𝑢𝑢2 , … has 𝑢𝑢0 = 1, and 𝑢𝑢1 = 2 and satisfies
2004
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 = 4𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 − 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−2 (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2). [Link]

4
2
Prove that 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛2 + 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 = 4𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 − 3 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
(ii) A sequence 𝑣𝑣0 , 𝑣𝑣1 , 𝑣𝑣2 , … has 𝑣𝑣0 = 1 and satisfies
2
𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛2 + 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛−1 = 4𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛−1 − 3 (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1). (∗)
(a) Find 𝑣𝑣1 and prove that, for each 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2, either 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 = 4𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛−1 − 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛−2 or 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 = 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛−2 .
(b) Show that the sequence, with period 2, defined by
1 for 𝑛𝑛 even
𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 = �
2 for 𝑛𝑛 odd
satisfies (∗).
(c) Find a sequence 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 with period 4 which has 𝑣𝑣0 = 1, and satisfies (∗).

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2004

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2004Q7]
For 𝑛𝑛 = 1,2,3, …, let
1
𝑡𝑡 𝑛𝑛−1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � 𝑛𝑛
d𝑡𝑡.
0 (𝑡𝑡 + 1)
𝑡𝑡 1
By considering the greatest value taken by for 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 1 show that 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 < 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 .
𝑡𝑡+1 2
1
Show also that 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 = − + 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 .
𝑛𝑛2𝑛𝑛
1
Deduce that 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 < .
𝑛𝑛2𝑛𝑛−1

Prove that
𝑛𝑛
1
ln 2 = � + 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1
𝑟𝑟2𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟=1
2 17
and hence show that < ln 2 < .
3 24

[STEP 3, 2004Q8]
Show that if
d𝑦𝑦 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)
= 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑦𝑦 +
d𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦
2004
then the substitution 𝑢𝑢 = 𝑦𝑦 2 gives a linear differential equation for 𝑢𝑢(𝑥𝑥). [Link]

5
Hence or otherwise solve the differential equation
d𝑦𝑦 𝑦𝑦 1
= − .
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦
Determine the solution curves of this equation which pass through (1, 1), (2, 2) and (4, 4) and
sketch graphs of all three curves on the same axes.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2004 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2004Q9]
A circular hoop of radius 𝑎𝑎 is free to rotate about a fixed horizontal axis passing through a point
𝑃𝑃 on its circumference. The plane of the hoop is perpendicular to this axis. The hoop hangs in
equilibrium with its centre, 𝑂𝑂, vertically below 𝑃𝑃. The point 𝐴𝐴 on the hoop is vertically below
𝑂𝑂, so that 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is a diameter of the hoop.
A mouse 𝑀𝑀 runs at constant speed 𝑢𝑢 round the rough inner surface of the lower part of the
hoop. Show that the mouse can choose its speed so that the hoop remains in equilibrium with
diameter 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 vertical.
Describe what happens to the hoop when the mouse passes the point at which angle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 =
2 arctan 𝜇𝜇, where 𝜇𝜇 is the coefficient of friction between mouse and hoop.

[STEP 3, 2004Q10]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to points 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵, where 𝐴𝐴 is a distance 9𝑎𝑎 vertically above
𝐵𝐵, by elastic strings, each of which has modulus of elasticity 6𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. The string 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 has natural
length 6𝑎𝑎 and the string 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 has natural length 2𝑎𝑎. Let 𝑥𝑥 be the distance 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
The system is released from rest with 𝑃𝑃 on the vertical line 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝑥𝑥 = 6𝑎𝑎. Show that the
4𝑔𝑔 𝑔𝑔
acceleration 𝑥𝑥̈ of 𝑃𝑃 is (7𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥) for 6𝑎𝑎 < 𝑥𝑥 < 7𝑎𝑎 and 𝑎𝑎 (7𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥) for 7𝑎𝑎 < 𝑥𝑥 < 9𝑎𝑎.
𝑎𝑎 2004
[Link]
Find the time taken for the particle to reach 𝐵𝐵. 6

[STEP 3, 2004Q11]
Particles 𝑃𝑃, of mass 2, and 𝑄𝑄, of mass 1, move along a line. Their distances from a fixed point
are 𝑥𝑥1 and 𝑥𝑥2 , respectively where 𝑥𝑥2 > 𝑥𝑥1 . Each particle is subject to a repulsive force from the
2
other of magnitude , where 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑥𝑥2 − 𝑥𝑥1 .
𝑧𝑧 3

Initially, 𝑥𝑥1 = 0, 𝑥𝑥2 = 1, 𝑄𝑄 is at rest and 𝑃𝑃 moves towards 𝑄𝑄 with speed 1. Show that 𝑧𝑧 obeys
d2 𝑧𝑧 3
the equation = .
d𝑡𝑡 2 𝑧𝑧 3

d2 𝑧𝑧 d𝑣𝑣 d𝑧𝑧
By first writing = 𝑣𝑣 , where 𝑣𝑣 = , show that 𝑧𝑧 = √4𝑡𝑡 2 − 2𝑡𝑡 + 1.
d𝑡𝑡 2 d𝑧𝑧 d𝑡𝑡

By considering the equation satisfied by 2𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥2 , find 𝑥𝑥1 and 𝑥𝑥2 in terms of 𝑡𝑡.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2004

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2004Q12]
A team of 𝑚𝑚 players, numbered from 1 to 𝑚𝑚, puts on a set of a 𝑚𝑚 shirts, similarly numbered
from 1 to 𝑚𝑚. The players change in a hurry, so that the shirts are assigned to them randomly,
one to each player.
Let 𝐶𝐶𝑖𝑖 be the random variable that takes the value 1 if player 𝑖𝑖 is wearing shirt 𝑖𝑖 , and 0
1
otherwise. Show that E[𝐶𝐶1 ] = and find Var[𝐶𝐶1 ] and Cov[𝐶𝐶1 , 𝐶𝐶2 ].
𝑚𝑚

Let 𝑁𝑁 = 𝐶𝐶1 + 𝐶𝐶2 + ⋯ + 𝐶𝐶𝑚𝑚 be the random variable whose value is the number of players who
are wearing the correct shirt. Show that E[𝑁𝑁] = Var[𝑁𝑁] = 1.
Explain why a Normal approximation to 𝑁𝑁 is not likely to be appropriate for any 𝑚𝑚, but that a
Poisson approximation might be reasonable.
In the case 𝑚𝑚 = 4, find, by listing equally likely possibilities or otherwise, the probability that
no player is wearing the correct shirt and verify that an appropriate Poisson approximation to
72
𝑁𝑁 gives this probability with a relative error of about 2%. [Use e ≈ 2 .]
100

[STEP 3, 2004Q13]
A men’s endurance competition has an unlimited number of rounds. In each round, a
competitor has, independently, a probability 𝑝𝑝 of making it through the round; otherwise, he
fails the round. Once a competitor fails a round, he drops out of the competition; before2004
he
[Link]
drops out, he takes part in every round. The grand prize is awarded to any competitor who
7
makes it through a round which all the other remaining competitors fail; if all the remaining
competitors fail at the same round the grand prize is not awarded.
If the competition begins with three competitors, find the probability that:
(i) all three drop out in the same round.
(ii) two of them drop out in round 𝑟𝑟 (with 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 2) and the third in an earlier round.
(iii) the grand prize is awarded.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2004 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2004Q14]
In this question, Φ(𝑧𝑧) is the cumulative distribution function of a standard normal random
variable.
A random variable is known to have a Normal distribution with mean 𝜇𝜇 and standard deviation
either 𝜎𝜎0 or 𝜎𝜎1 , where 𝜎𝜎0 < 𝜎𝜎1. The mean, 𝑋𝑋�, of a random sample of 𝑛𝑛 values of 𝑋𝑋 is to be used
to test the hypothesis 𝐻𝐻0 ∶ 𝜎𝜎 = 𝜎𝜎0 against the alternative 𝐻𝐻1 ∶ 𝜎𝜎 = 𝜎𝜎1.
Explain carefully why it is appropriate to use a two sided test of the form: accept 𝐻𝐻0 if 𝜇𝜇 − 𝑐𝑐 <
𝑋𝑋� < 𝜇𝜇 + 𝑐𝑐, otherwise accept 𝐻𝐻1 .
Given that the probability of accepting 𝐻𝐻1 when 𝐻𝐻0 is true is 𝛼𝛼, determine 𝑐𝑐 in terms of 𝑛𝑛, 𝜎𝜎0
𝛼𝛼
and 𝑧𝑧𝛼𝛼 , where 𝑧𝑧𝛼𝛼 is defined by Φ(𝑧𝑧𝛼𝛼 ) = 1 − .
2

The probability of accepting 𝐻𝐻0 when 𝐻𝐻1 is true is denoted by 𝛽𝛽. Show that 𝛽𝛽 is independent of
𝑛𝑛.
Given that Φ(1.960) ≈ 0.975 and that Φ(0.063) ≈ 0.525 , determine, approximately, the
𝜎𝜎
minimum value of 𝜎𝜎1 if 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽 are both to be less than 0.05.
0

2004
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2004

STEP 3 2005
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2005
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2005 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2005Q1]
π
Show that sin 𝐴𝐴 = cos 𝐵𝐵 if and only if 𝐴𝐴 = (4𝑛𝑛 + 1) ± 𝐵𝐵 for some integers 𝑛𝑛.
2

Show also that |sin 𝑥𝑥 ± cos 𝑥𝑥| ≤ √2 for all values of 𝑥𝑥 and deduce that there are no solutions to
the equation sin(sin 𝑥𝑥) = cos(cos 𝑥𝑥).
Sketch, on the same axes, the graphs of 𝑦𝑦 = sin(sin 𝑥𝑥) and 𝑦𝑦 = cos(cos 𝑥𝑥). Sketch, not on the
previous axes, the graph of 𝑦𝑦 = sin(2 sin 𝑥𝑥).

[STEP 3, 2005Q2]
d𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥
Find the general solution of the differential equation =− , where 𝑎𝑎 ≠ 0, and show that
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 2 +𝑎𝑎 2
2 (𝑥𝑥 2 2) 2
it can be written in the form 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑎𝑎 = 𝑐𝑐 , where 𝑐𝑐 is an arbitrary constant. Sketch this
curve.
d
Find an expression for d𝑥𝑥 (𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 ) and show that

d2 2 2)
𝑐𝑐 2 8𝑐𝑐 2 𝑥𝑥 2
(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = 2 �1 − � + .
d𝑥𝑥 2 (𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 )2 (𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 )3

(i) Show that, if 0 < 𝑐𝑐 < 𝑎𝑎2 , the points on the curve whose distance from the origin is least
𝑐𝑐
are �0, ± �.
𝑎𝑎
2005
(ii) If 𝑐𝑐 > 𝑎𝑎2 , determine the points on the curve whose distance from the origin is least. [Link]

[STEP 3, 2005Q3]
Let 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + 𝑠𝑠 . Find an expression for 𝑓𝑓�𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)� and hence
find a necessary and sufficient condition on 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 for it to be possible to write the quartic
expression 𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑏𝑏𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑑𝑑 in the form 𝑓𝑓�𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)�, for some choice of values of 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟
and 𝑠𝑠.
Show further that this condition holds if and only if it is possible to write the quartic expression
𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑏𝑏𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑑𝑑 in the form (𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 + 𝑤𝑤)2 − 𝑘𝑘, for some choice of values of 𝑣𝑣, 𝑤𝑤 and
𝑘𝑘.
Find the roots of the quartic equation 𝑥𝑥 4 − 4𝑥𝑥 3 + 10𝑥𝑥 2 − 12𝑥𝑥 + 4 = 0.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2005

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2005Q4]
The sequence 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 (𝑛𝑛 = 1,2, …) satisfies the recurrence relation
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+2 = (𝑘𝑘𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 − 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛+1 )
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛
where 𝑘𝑘 is a constant.
If 𝑢𝑢1 = 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑢𝑢2 = 𝑏𝑏, where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are non-zero and 𝑏𝑏 ≠ 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, prove by induction that
𝑏𝑏
𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛 = � � 𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛−1
𝑎𝑎
𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛+1 = 𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛
for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, where 𝑐𝑐 is a constant to be found in terms of 𝑘𝑘, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏. Hence express 𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛 and 𝑢𝑢2𝑛𝑛−1
in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑛𝑛.
Find conditions on 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑘𝑘 in the three cases:
(i) the sequence 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 is geometric.
(ii) the sequence 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 has period 2.
(iii) the sequence 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 has period 4.

[STEP 3, 2005Q5]
Let 𝑃𝑃 be the point on the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 (where 𝑎𝑎 is non-zero) at which the gradient
is 𝑚𝑚. Show that the equation of the tangent at 𝑃𝑃 is 2005
[Link]

(𝑚𝑚 − 𝑏𝑏)2 3
𝑦𝑦 − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑐𝑐 − .
4𝑎𝑎
Show that the curves 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎1 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏1 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑐𝑐1 and 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑐𝑐2 (where 𝑎𝑎1 and 𝑎𝑎2 are non-
zero) have a common tangent with gradient 𝑚𝑚 if and only if
(𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑎𝑎1 )𝑚𝑚2 + 2(𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏2 − 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏1 )𝑚𝑚 + 4𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎2 (𝑐𝑐2 − 𝑐𝑐1 ) + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏12 − 𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏22 = 0.
Show that, in the case 𝑎𝑎1 ≠ 𝑎𝑎2 , the two curves have exactly one common tangent if and only if
they touch each other. In the case 𝑎𝑎1 = 𝑎𝑎2 , find a necessary and sufficient condition for the two
curves to have exactly one common tangent.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2005 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2005Q6]
In this question, you may use without proof the results

4 cosh3 𝑦𝑦 − 3 cosh 𝑦𝑦 = cosh(3𝑦𝑦) and arcosh 𝑦𝑦 = ln �𝑦𝑦 + �𝑦𝑦 2 − 1�.

[Note: arcosh 𝑦𝑦 is another notation for cosh−1 𝑦𝑦]

1
Show that the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 = 2𝑎𝑎3 cosh 𝑇𝑇 is satisfied by 2𝑎𝑎 cosh � 𝑇𝑇� and hence that, if
3
1
𝑏𝑏
𝑐𝑐 2 ≥ 𝑏𝑏 3 one of the roots of the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 2𝑐𝑐 is 𝑢𝑢 + where 𝑢𝑢 = �𝑐𝑐 + √𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑏𝑏 3 �3 .
𝑢𝑢

Show that the other two roots of the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 2𝑐𝑐 are the roots of the quadratic
𝑏𝑏 𝑏𝑏2
equation 𝑥𝑥 2 + �𝑢𝑢 + � 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑢𝑢2 + 𝑢𝑢2 − 𝑏𝑏 = 0, and fine these roots in terms of 𝑢𝑢, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝜔𝜔, where
𝑢𝑢
1
𝜔𝜔 = �−1 + 𝐢𝐢√3�.
2

Solve completely the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 6𝑥𝑥 = 6.

[STEP 3, 2005Q7]
1 𝑚𝑚
Show that if ∫ d𝑢𝑢 = 𝐹𝐹(𝑢𝑢) + 𝑐𝑐, then ∫ d𝑥𝑥 = 𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚 ) + 𝑐𝑐, where 𝑚𝑚 ≠ 0.
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢(𝑢𝑢) 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚 )

Find:
1
(i) ∫ 𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥.
𝑥𝑥 −𝑥𝑥
2005
1
(ii) ∫ 𝑛𝑛 2 d𝑥𝑥. [Link]
√𝑥𝑥 +𝑥𝑥
4

[STEP 3, 2005Q8]
In this question, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑐𝑐 are distinct non-zero complex numbers. The complex conjugate of any
complex number 𝑧𝑧 is denoted by 𝑧𝑧 ∗ .
Show that
|𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐|2 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎∗ + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∗ − 𝑎𝑎𝑐𝑐 ∗ − 𝑐𝑐𝑎𝑎∗
and hence prove that the triangle 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 in the Argand diagram, whose vertices are represented
by 0, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑐𝑐 respectively, is right angled at 𝐴𝐴 if and only if 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ∗ = 𝑎𝑎𝑐𝑐 ∗ + 𝑐𝑐𝑎𝑎 ∗.
𝑎𝑎
Points 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑃𝑃′ in the Argand diagram are represented by the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 and ,
𝑏𝑏∗
where 𝑏𝑏 is a non-zero complex number. A circle in the Argand diagram has centre 𝐶𝐶 and passes
through the point 𝐴𝐴, and is such that 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is tangent to the circle. Show that the point 𝑃𝑃 lies on
the circle if and only if point 𝑃𝑃′ lies on the circle.
𝑎𝑎
Conversely, show that if the points represented by the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏∗ , for some
non-zero complex number 𝑏𝑏 with 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ∗ ≠ 1, both lie on a circle centre 𝐶𝐶 in the Argand diagram
which passes through 𝐴𝐴, then 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is a tangent to the circle.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2005

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2005Q9]
Two particles, 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵, move without friction along a horizontal line which is perpendicular to
a vertical wall. The coefficient of restitution between the two particles is 𝑒𝑒 and the coefficient
of restitution between particle 𝐵𝐵 and the wall is also 𝑒𝑒, where 0 < 𝑒𝑒 < 1. The mass of particle
𝐴𝐴 is 4𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 (with 𝑚𝑚 > 0), and the mass of particle 𝐵𝐵 is (1 − 𝑒𝑒 2 )𝑚𝑚.
Initially, 𝐴𝐴 is moving towards the wall with speed (1 − 𝑒𝑒)𝑣𝑣 (where 𝑣𝑣 > 0) and 𝐵𝐵 is moving
away from the wall and towards 𝐴𝐴 with speed 2𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒. The two particles collide at a distance 𝑑𝑑
from the wall. Find the speeds of 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 after the collision.
When 𝐵𝐵 strikes the wall, it rebounds along the same line. Show that a second collision will take
place, at a distance 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 from the wall.
Deduce that further collisions will take place. Find the distance from the wall at which the 𝑛𝑛th
collision takes place, and show that the times between successive collisions are equal.

[STEP 3, 2005Q10]
Two thin discs, each of radius 𝑟𝑟 and mass 𝑚𝑚, are held on a rough horizontal surface with their
π𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
centres a distance 6𝑟𝑟 apart. A thin light elastic band, of natural length 2π𝑟𝑟 and modulus , is
12
wrapped once round the discs, its straight sections being parallel. The contact between the
elastic band and the discs is smooth. The coefficient of friction between each disc and the
2005
horizontal surface is 𝜇𝜇, so that each disc experiences a force due to friction equal to 𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇,
[Link]
whether the disc is at rest or sliding. 5
The discs are released simultaneously. If the discs collide, they rebound and a half of their total
kinetic energy is lost in the collision.
2
(i) Show that the discs start sliding, but come to rest before colliding, if and only if < 𝜇𝜇 < 1.
3

(ii) Show that, if the discs collide at least once, their total kinetic energy just before the first
4
collision is 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(2 − 3𝜇𝜇).
3
4 5
(iii) Show that if 9 > 𝜇𝜇2 > 27 the discs come to rest exactly once after the first collision.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2005 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2005Q11]
A horizontal spindle rotates freely in a fixed bearing. Three light rods are each attached by one
end to the spindle so that they rotate in vertical plane. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is fixed to the other
end of each of the three rods. The rods have lengths 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐, with 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑐𝑐 and the angle
2
between any pair of rods is π. The angle between the rod of length 𝑎𝑎 and the vertical axis is 𝜃𝜃,
3
as shown in the diagram.

Find an expression for the energy of the system and show that, if the system is in equilibrium,
then
(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐)√3 2005
tan 𝜃𝜃 = − . [Link]

2𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐 6
Deduce that there are exactly two equilibrium positions and determine which of the two
equilibrium positions is stable.
Show that, for the system to make complete revolutions, it must pass through its position of
stable equilibrium with an angular velocity of at least

4𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
� ,
𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 + 𝑐𝑐 2

where 2𝑅𝑅 2 = (𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏)2 + (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐)2 + (𝑐𝑐 − 𝑎𝑎)2 .

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2005

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2005Q12]
Five independent timers time a runner as she runs four laps of a track. Four of the timers
measure the individual lap times, the results of the measurements being the random variables
𝑇𝑇1 to 𝑇𝑇4 , each of which has variance 𝜎𝜎 2 and expectation equal to the true time for the lap. The
fifth timer measures the total time for the race, the result of the measurement being the random
variable 𝑇𝑇 which has variance 𝜎𝜎 2 and expectation equal to the true race time (which is equal
to the sum of the four true lap times).
Find a random variable 𝑋𝑋 of the form 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏(𝑇𝑇1 + 𝑇𝑇2 + 𝑇𝑇3 + 𝑇𝑇4 ), where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are constants
independent of the true lap times, with the properties that:
(i) whatever the true lap times, the expectation of 𝑋𝑋 is equal to the true race time,
(ii) the variance of 𝑋𝑋 is as small as possible.
Find also a random variable 𝑌𝑌 of the form 𝑐𝑐𝑇𝑇 + 𝑑𝑑(𝑇𝑇1 + 𝑇𝑇2 + 𝑇𝑇3 + 𝑇𝑇4 ) , where 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑 are
constants independent of the true lap times, with the property that, whatever the true lap times,
the expectation of 𝑌𝑌 2 is equal to 𝜎𝜎 2 .
In one particular race, 𝑇𝑇 takes the value 220 seconds and (𝑇𝑇1 + 𝑇𝑇2 + 𝑇𝑇3 + 𝑇𝑇4 ) takes the value
220.5 seconds. Use the random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 to estimate an interval in which true race
time lies.

[STEP 3, 2005Q13] 2005

[Link]

7
A pack of cards consists of 𝑛𝑛 + 1 cards, which are printed with the integers from 0 to 𝑛𝑛. A game
consists of drawing cards repeatedly at random from the pack until the card printed with 0 is
drawn, at which point the game ends. After each draw, the player receives £1 if the card drawn
shows any of the integers from 1 to 𝑤𝑤 inclusive but receives nothing if the card drawn shows
any of the integers from 𝑤𝑤 + 1 to 𝑛𝑛 inclusive.
(i) In one version of the game, each card drawn is replaced immediately and randomly in the
pack. Explain clearly why the probability that the player wins a total of exactly £3 is equal
to the probability of the following event occurring: out of the first four cards drawn which
show numbers in the range 0 to 𝑤𝑤, the numbers on the first three are non-zero and the
number on the fourth is zero. Hence show that the probability that the player wins a total
𝑤𝑤 3
of exactly £3 is equal to (𝑤𝑤+1)4 .

Write down the probability that the player wins a total of exactly £𝑟𝑟 and hence find the
expected total win.
(ii) In another version of the game, each card drawn is removed from the pack. Show that the
expected total win in this version is half of the expected total win in the other version.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2005 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2005Q14]
In this question, you may use the result
∞
𝑡𝑡 𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚! (𝑛𝑛 − 𝑚𝑚)!
� 𝑛𝑛+2
d𝑡𝑡 = ,
0 (𝑡𝑡 + 𝑘𝑘) (𝑛𝑛 + 1)! 𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛−𝑚𝑚+1
where 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑛𝑛 are positive integers with 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 𝑚𝑚, and where 𝑘𝑘 > 0.
The random variable 𝑉𝑉 has density function
𝐶𝐶𝑘𝑘 𝑎𝑎+1 𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = (0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 < ∞),
(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑘𝑘)2𝑎𝑎+2
(2𝑎𝑎+1)!
where 𝑎𝑎 is a positive integer. Show that 𝐶𝐶 = .
𝑎𝑎!𝑎𝑎!

Show, by means of a suitable substitution, that

𝑣𝑣
𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎 ∞
𝑢𝑢𝑎𝑎
� d𝑥𝑥 = � d𝑢𝑢
0 (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑘𝑘)2𝑎𝑎+2 𝑘𝑘 2 (𝑢𝑢 + 𝑘𝑘)2𝑎𝑎+2
𝑣𝑣

and deduce that the median value of 𝑉𝑉 is 𝑘𝑘. Find the expected value of 𝑉𝑉.
The random variable 𝑉𝑉 represents the speed of randomly chosen gas molecule. The time taken
𝑠𝑠
for such a particle to travel a fixed distance 𝑠𝑠 is given by the random variable 𝑇𝑇 = .
𝑉𝑉

Show that
∞
𝐶𝐶𝑘𝑘 𝑎𝑎+1 𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎
P(𝑇𝑇 < 𝑡𝑡) = � d𝑥𝑥 (∗)
𝑠𝑠 (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑘𝑘)2𝑎𝑎+2 2005
𝑡𝑡 [Link]

8𝑠𝑠
and hence find the density function of 𝑇𝑇. You may find it helpful to make the substitution 𝑢𝑢 =
𝑥𝑥
in the integral (∗).
Hence show that the product of the median time and the median speed is equal to the distance
𝑠𝑠, but that the product of the expected time and the expected speed is greater than 𝑠𝑠.

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2005

STEP 3 2006
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2006
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2006 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2006Q1]
Sketch the curve with cartesian equation
2𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 − 5)
𝑦𝑦 =
𝑥𝑥 2 − 4
and give the equations of the asymptotes and of the tangent to the curve at the origin.
Hence determine the number of real roots of the following equations:
(i) 3𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 − 5) = (𝑥𝑥 2 − 4)(𝑥𝑥 + 3).

(ii) 4𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 − 5) = (𝑥𝑥 2 − 4)(5𝑥𝑥 − 2).

(iii) 4𝑥𝑥 2 (𝑥𝑥 2 − 5)2 = (𝑥𝑥 2 − 4)2 (𝑥𝑥 2 + 1).

[STEP 3, 2006Q2]
Let
1 1
π
2 cos2 𝜃𝜃 2
π
sec 2 𝜃𝜃
𝐼𝐼 = � d𝜃𝜃 and 𝐽𝐽 = � 2 2
d𝜃𝜃
− π 1 − sin 𝜃𝜃 sin 2𝛼𝛼 − π 1 + tan 𝜃𝜃 cos 2𝛼𝛼
1 1
2 2
1
where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < π.
4
1 1 2006
π cos2 𝜃𝜃 π 2
(i) Show that 𝐼𝐼 = ∫21 d𝜃𝜃 and hence that 2𝐼𝐼 = ∫21 2 d𝜃𝜃. [Link]
− π 1+sin 𝜃𝜃 sin 2𝛼𝛼 − π 1+tan 𝜃𝜃 cos2 2𝛼𝛼 2
2 2

(ii) Find 𝐽𝐽.

1
(iii) By considering 𝐼𝐼 sin2 2𝛼𝛼 + 𝐽𝐽 cos2 2𝛼𝛼, or otherwise, show that 𝐼𝐼 = π sec 2 𝛼𝛼.
2
1 1
(iv) Evaluate 𝐼𝐼 in the case π < 𝛼𝛼 < π.
4 2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2006

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2006Q3]
(i) Let
∞ ∞
𝑛𝑛
1
tan 𝑥𝑥 = � 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 and cot 𝑥𝑥 = + � 𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛
𝑥𝑥
𝑛𝑛=0 𝑛𝑛=0
1
for 0 < 𝑥𝑥 < 2
π. Explain why 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = 0 for even 𝑛𝑛.

Prove the identity

cot 𝑥𝑥 − tan 𝑥𝑥 ≡ 2 cot 2𝑥𝑥
and show that
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = (1 − 2𝑛𝑛+1 )𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 .
1 1
(ii) Let cosec 𝑥𝑥 = + ∑∞ 𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛=0 𝑐𝑐𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 for 0 < 𝑥𝑥 < π. By considering cot 𝑥𝑥 + tan 𝑥𝑥, or otherwise,
𝑥𝑥 2
show that
𝑐𝑐𝑛𝑛 = (2−𝑛𝑛 − 1)𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 .
(iii) Show that
∞ 2 ∞ 2
𝑛𝑛 2 𝑛𝑛
�1 + 𝑥𝑥 � 𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 � + 𝑥𝑥 = �1 + 𝑥𝑥 � 𝑐𝑐𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 � .
𝑛𝑛=0 𝑛𝑛=0

Deduce from this and the previous results that 𝑎𝑎1 = 1, and find 𝑎𝑎3 .
2006
[Link]

3
[STEP 3, 2006Q4]
The function 𝑓𝑓 satisfies the identity
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦) ≡ 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦) (∗)
for all 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 . Show that 2𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) ≡ 𝑓𝑓(2𝑥𝑥) and deduce that 𝑓𝑓 ′′ (0) = 0 . By considering the
Maclaurin Series for 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥), find the most general function that satisfies (∗).
[Do not consider issues of existence or convergence of Maclaurin series in this question.]
(i) By considering the function 𝐺𝐺, defined by ln�𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)� = 𝐺𝐺(𝑥𝑥), find the most general function
that, for all 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦, satisfies the identity
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)𝑔𝑔(𝑦𝑦) ≡ 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦).
(ii) By considering the function 𝐻𝐻, defined by ℎ(e𝑢𝑢 ) = 𝐻𝐻(𝑢𝑢), find the most general function
that satisfies, for all positive 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦, the identity
ℎ(𝑥𝑥) + ℎ(𝑦𝑦) ≡ ℎ(𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥).
(iii) Find the most general function 𝑡𝑡 that, for all 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦, satisfies the identity
𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑡𝑡(𝑦𝑦) ≡ 𝑡𝑡(𝑧𝑧),
𝑥𝑥+𝑦𝑦
where 𝑧𝑧 = .
1−𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥

STEP 3 Past Paper 2006 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2006Q5]
Show that the distinct complex numbers 𝛼𝛼, 𝛽𝛽 and 𝛾𝛾 represent the vertices of an equilateral
triangle (in clockwise or anti-clockwise order) if and only if
𝛼𝛼 2 + 𝛽𝛽 2 + 𝛾𝛾 2 − 𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽 − 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 − 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 = 0.
Show that the roots of the equation
𝑧𝑧 3 + 𝑎𝑎𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 (∗)
represent the vertices of an equilateral triangle if and only if 𝑎𝑎2 = 3𝑏𝑏.
Under the transformation 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞, where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are given complex numbers with 𝑝𝑝 ≠ 0,
the equation (∗) becomes
𝑤𝑤 3 + 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤 2 + 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶 = 0. (∗∗)
Show that if the roots of equation (∗) represent the vertices of an equilateral triangle, then the
roots of equation (∗∗) also represent the vertices of an equilateral triangle.

[STEP 3, 2006Q6]
Show that in polar coordinates the gradient of any curve at the point (𝑟𝑟, 𝜃𝜃) is
d𝑟𝑟
tan 𝜃𝜃 + 𝑟𝑟
d𝜃𝜃 .
d𝑟𝑟
− 𝑟𝑟 tan 𝜃𝜃
d𝜃𝜃
2006
A mirror is designed so that if an incident ray of light is parallel to a fixed line 𝐿𝐿 the reflected
[Link]

ray passes through a fixed point 𝑂𝑂 on 𝐿𝐿. Prove that the mirror intersects any plane containing 4
𝐿𝐿 in a parabola. You should assume that the angle between the incident ray and the normal to
the mirror is the same as the angle between the reflected ray and the normal.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2006

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2006Q7]
(i) Solve the equation 𝑢𝑢2 + 2𝑢𝑢 sinh 𝑥𝑥 − 1 = 0 giving 𝑢𝑢 in terms of 𝑥𝑥.
Find the solution of the differential equation

d𝑦𝑦 2 d𝑦𝑦
� � + 2 sinh 𝑥𝑥 − 1 = 0
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
d𝑦𝑦
that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 0 and > 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥

(ii) Find the solution, not identically zero, of the differential equation

d𝑦𝑦 2 d𝑦𝑦
sinh 𝑦𝑦 � � +2 − sinh 𝑦𝑦 = 0
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0, expressing your solution in the form cosh 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥). Show
that the asymptotes to the solution curve are 𝑦𝑦 = ±(−𝑥𝑥 + ln 4).

[STEP 3, 2006Q8]
∆ is an operation that takes polynomials in 𝑥𝑥 to polynomials in 𝑥𝑥; that is, given any polynomial
ℎ(𝑥𝑥), there is a polynomial called ∆ℎ(𝑥𝑥) which is obtained from ℎ(𝑥𝑥) using the rules that define
∆. These rules are as follows:
(i) ∆𝑥𝑥 = 1.
(ii) ∆�𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)� = ∆𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) + ∆𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) for any polynomials 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥). 2006
[Link]

(iii) ∆�𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆(𝑥𝑥)� = 𝜆𝜆∆𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) for any constant 𝜆𝜆 and any polynomial 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥). 5

(iv) ∆�𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)� = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)∆𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)∆𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) for any polynomials 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥).
Using these rules show that, if 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is a polynomial of degree zero (that is, a constant), then
∆𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 0. Calculate ∆𝑥𝑥 2 and ∆𝑥𝑥 3 .
dℎ(𝑥𝑥)
Prove that ∆ℎ(𝑥𝑥) = d𝑥𝑥
for any polynomial ℎ(𝑥𝑥). You should make it clear whenever you use
one of the above rules in your proof.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2006 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2006Q9]
A long, light, inextensible string passes through a small, smooth ring fixed at the point 𝑂𝑂. One
end of the string is attached to a particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 which hangs freely below 𝑂𝑂. The other
end is attached to a bead, 𝐵𝐵, also of mass 𝑚𝑚, which is threaded on a smooth rigid wire fixed in
the same vertical plane as 𝑂𝑂. The distance 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is 𝑟𝑟, the distance 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 is ℎ and the height of the
bead above the horizontal plane through 𝑂𝑂 is 𝑦𝑦, as shown in the diagram.

The shape of the wire is such that the system can be in static equilibrium for all positions of the
bead. By considering potential energy, show that the equation of the wire is 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑟𝑟 = 2ℎ. 2006
[Link]

The bead is initially at 𝐻𝐻. It is then projected along the wire with initial speed 𝑉𝑉. Show that, 6in
the subsequent motion,
ℎ𝑟𝑟̇
𝜃𝜃̇ = −
𝑟𝑟√𝑟𝑟ℎ − ℎ2
𝑦𝑦
where 𝜃𝜃 is given by 𝜃𝜃 = arcsin � �.
𝑟𝑟
1
𝑟𝑟−ℎ 2
Hence show that the speed of the particle 𝑃𝑃 is 𝑉𝑉 � � .
2𝑟𝑟−ℎ

[Note that arcsin 𝜃𝜃 is another notation for sin−1 𝜃𝜃.]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2006

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2006Q10]
A disc rotates freely in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis through its centre. The moment
of inertia of the disc about this axis is 𝑚𝑚𝑘𝑘 2 (where 𝑘𝑘 > 0). Along one diameter is a smooth
narrow groove in which a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 slides freely. At time 𝑡𝑡 = 0, the disc is rotating
with angular speed Ω, and the particle is a distance 𝑎𝑎 from the axis and is moving with speed 𝑉𝑉
along the groove, towards the axis, where 𝑘𝑘 2 𝑉𝑉 2 = Ω2 𝑎𝑎2 (𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 ).
Show that, at a later time 𝑡𝑡, while the particle is still moving towards the axis, the angular speed
𝜔𝜔 of the disc and the distance 𝑟𝑟 of the particle from the axis are related by

Ω(𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 ) d𝑟𝑟 2 Ω2 𝑟𝑟 2 (𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 )2

𝜔𝜔 = and � � = .
𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑟𝑟 2 d𝑡𝑡 𝑘𝑘 2 (𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑟𝑟 2 )
Deduce that
d𝑟𝑟 1
𝑘𝑘 = −𝑟𝑟(𝑘𝑘 2 + 𝑟𝑟 2 )2 ,
d𝜃𝜃
where 𝜃𝜃 is the angle through which the disc has turned by time 𝑡𝑡.
𝑘𝑘
By making the substitution 𝑢𝑢 = , or otherwise, show that 𝑟𝑟 sinh(𝜃𝜃 + 𝛼𝛼) = 𝑘𝑘, where sinh 𝛼𝛼 =
𝑟𝑟
𝑘𝑘
. Deduce that the particle never reaches the axis.
𝑎𝑎

[STEP 3, 2006Q11]
A lift of mass 𝑀𝑀 and its counterweight of mass 𝑀𝑀 are connected by a light inextensible cable 2006
[Link]
which passes over a fixed frictionless pulley. The lift is constrained to move vertically between
7
smooth guides. The distance between the floor and the ceiling of the lift is ℎ. Initially, the lift is
at rest, and the distance between the top of the lift and the pulley is greater than ℎ. A small tile
of mass 𝑚𝑚 becomes detached from the ceiling of the lift and falls to the floor of the lift. Show
that the speed of the tile just before the impact is

(2𝑀𝑀 − 𝑚𝑚)𝑔𝑔ℎ
� .
𝑀𝑀

The coefficient of restitution between the tile and the floor of the lift is 𝑒𝑒. Given that the
magnitude of the impulsive force on the lift due to tension in the cable is equal to the magnitude
of the impulsive force on the counterweight due to tension in the cable, show that the loss of
energy of the system due to the impact is 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ(1 − 𝑒𝑒 2 ). Comment on this result.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2006 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2006Q12]
Fifty times a year, 1024 tourists disembark from a cruise liner at a port. From there they must
travel to the city centre either by bus or by taxi. Tourists are equally likely to be directed to the
bus station or to the taxi rank. Each bus of the bus company holds 32 passengers, and the
company currently runs 15 buses. The company makes a profit of £1 for each passenger carried.
It carries as many passengers as it can, with any excess being (eventually) transported by taxi.
Show that the largest annual licence fee, in pounds, that the company should consider paying
to be allowed to run an extra bus is approximately
800
1600Φ(2) − (1 − e−2 ),
√2π
1
1 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑡𝑡 2
where Φ(𝑥𝑥) = ∫ e 2 d𝑡𝑡.
√2π −∞

[You should not consider continuity corrections.]

[STEP 3, 2006Q13]
Two points are chosen independently at random on the perimeter (including the diameter) of
a semicircle of unit radius. The area of the triangle whose vertices are these two points and the
midpoint of the diameter is denoted by the random variable 𝐴𝐴. Show that the expected value
of 𝐴𝐴 is (2 + π)−1 .
2006
[Link]

8
[STEP 3, 2006Q14]
For any random variables 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 state the relationship between E(𝑎𝑎𝑋𝑋1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑋𝑋2 ) and E(𝑋𝑋1 )
and E(𝑋𝑋2 ), where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are constants. If 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 are independent, state the relationship
between E(𝑋𝑋1 𝑋𝑋2 ) and E(𝑋𝑋1 ) and E(𝑋𝑋2 ).
An industrial process produces rectangular plates. The length and the breadth of the plates are
modelled by independent random variables 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 with non-zero means 𝜇𝜇1 and 𝜇𝜇2 and
non-zero standard deviations 𝜎𝜎1 and 𝜎𝜎2 , respectively. Using the results in the paragraph above,
and without quoting a formula for Var(𝑎𝑎𝑋𝑋1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑋𝑋2 ), find the means and standard deviations of
the perimeter 𝑃𝑃 and area 𝐴𝐴 of the plates. Show that 𝑃𝑃 and 𝐴𝐴 are not independent.
The random variable 𝑍𝑍 is defined by 𝑍𝑍 = 𝑃𝑃 − 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼, where 𝛼𝛼 is a constant. Show that 𝑍𝑍 and 𝐴𝐴 are
not independent if
2(𝜇𝜇1 𝜎𝜎22 + 𝜇𝜇2 𝜎𝜎12 )
𝛼𝛼 ≠ .
𝜇𝜇12 𝜎𝜎22 + 𝜇𝜇22 𝜎𝜎12 + 𝜎𝜎12 𝜎𝜎22
Given that 𝑋𝑋1 and 𝑋𝑋2 can each take values 1 and 3 only, and that they each take these values
1
with probability , show that 𝑍𝑍 and 𝐴𝐴 are not independent for any value of 𝛼𝛼.
2

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2006

STEP 3 2007
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2007
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 14 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2007 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2007Q1]
In this question, do not consider the special cases in which the denominators of any of your
expressions are zero.
Express tan(𝜃𝜃1 + 𝜃𝜃2 + 𝜃𝜃3 + 𝜃𝜃4 ) in terms of 𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑖 , where 𝑡𝑡1 = tan 𝜃𝜃1 , etc.
Given that tan 𝜃𝜃1 , tan 𝜃𝜃2, tan 𝜃𝜃3 and tan 𝜃𝜃4 are the four roots of the equation
𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡 4 + 𝑏𝑏𝑡𝑡 3 + 𝑐𝑐𝑡𝑡 2 + 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑒𝑒 = 0
(where 𝑎𝑎 ≠ 0), find an expression in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐, 𝑑𝑑 and 𝑒𝑒 for tan(𝜃𝜃1 + 𝜃𝜃2 + 𝜃𝜃3 + 𝜃𝜃4 ).
The four real numbers 𝜃𝜃1 , 𝜃𝜃2 , 𝜃𝜃3 and 𝜃𝜃4 lie in the range 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃𝑖𝑖 < 2π and satisfy the equation
𝑝𝑝 cos 2𝜃𝜃 + cos(𝜃𝜃 − 𝛼𝛼) + 𝑝𝑝 = 0,
where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝛼𝛼 are independent of 𝜃𝜃. Show that 𝜃𝜃1 + 𝜃𝜃2 + 𝜃𝜃3 + 𝜃𝜃4 = 𝑛𝑛π for some integer 𝑛𝑛.

[STEP 3, 2007Q2]
(2𝑛𝑛)! 1
(i) Show that [Link]. … . (2𝑛𝑛 − 1) = and that, for |𝑥𝑥| < ,
2𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛! 4
∞
1 (2𝑛𝑛)! 𝑛𝑛
=1+� 𝑥𝑥 .
√1 − 4𝑥𝑥 (𝑛𝑛!)2
𝑛𝑛=1

(ii) By differentiating the above result, deduce that 2007

[Link]
∞ 𝑛𝑛 2
(2𝑛𝑛)! 6
� � � = 60.
𝑛𝑛! (𝑛𝑛 − 1)! 25
𝑛𝑛=1

(iii) Show that

∞
2𝑛𝑛+1 (2𝑛𝑛)!
� = 1.
32𝑛𝑛 (𝑛𝑛 + 1)! 𝑛𝑛!
𝑛𝑛=1

[STEP 3, 2007Q3]
A sequence of numbers, 𝐹𝐹1 , 𝐹𝐹2 , …, is defined by 𝐹𝐹1 = 1, 𝐹𝐹2 = 1, and
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛−2 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 3.
(i) Write down the values of 𝐹𝐹3 , 𝐹𝐹4 , … , 𝐹𝐹8 .
2 2
(ii) Prove that 𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘+3 𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘+1 − 𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘+2 = −𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘+2 𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘 + 𝐹𝐹2𝑘𝑘+1 .
2 2
(iii) Prove by induction or otherwise that 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛+1 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛−1 − 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛 = 1 and deduce that 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛 + 1 is
divisible by 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛+1 .
2
(vi) Prove that 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛−1 + 1 is divisible by 𝐹𝐹2𝑛𝑛+1 .

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2007

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2007Q4]
A curve is given parametrically by
1
𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎 �cos 𝑡𝑡 + ln tan 𝑡𝑡� ,
2
𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎 sin 𝑡𝑡,
1 d𝑦𝑦
where 0 < 𝑡𝑡 < π and 𝑎𝑎 is a positive constant. Show that = tan 𝑡𝑡 and sketch the curve.
2 d𝑥𝑥

Let 𝑃𝑃 be the point with parameter 𝑡𝑡 and let 𝑄𝑄 be the point where the tangent to the curve at 𝑃𝑃
meets the 𝑥𝑥-axis. Show that 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑎𝑎.
The radius of curvature, 𝜌𝜌, at 𝑃𝑃 is defined by
3
(𝑥𝑥̇ 2 + 𝑦𝑦̇ 2 )2
𝜌𝜌 = ,
|𝑥𝑥̇ 𝑦𝑦̈ − 𝑦𝑦̇ 𝑥𝑥̈ |
where the dots denote differentiation with respect to 𝑡𝑡. Show that 𝜌𝜌 = 𝑎𝑎 cot 𝑡𝑡.
The point 𝐶𝐶 lies on the normal to the curve at 𝑃𝑃, a distance 𝜌𝜌 from 𝑃𝑃 and above the curve. Show
that 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 is parallel to the 𝑦𝑦-axis.

[STEP 3, 2007Q5]

Let 𝑦𝑦 = ln(𝑥𝑥 2 − 1), where 𝑥𝑥 > 1, and let 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃 be functions of 𝑥𝑥 determined by 𝑟𝑟 = √𝑥𝑥 2 − 1
and coth 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑥𝑥. Show that
2007
d𝑦𝑦 2 cosh 𝜃𝜃 d2 𝑦𝑦 2 cosh 2𝜃𝜃 [Link]

= and = − , 3
d𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟 d𝑥𝑥 2 𝑟𝑟 2
d3 𝑦𝑦
and find an expression in terms of 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃 for .
d𝑥𝑥 3
d𝑛𝑛 𝑦𝑦
Find, with proof, a similar formula for d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 in terms of 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃.

[STEP 3, 2007Q6]
The distinct points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄, 𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆 in the Argand diagram lie on a circle of radius 𝑎𝑎 centred at the
origin and are represented by the complex numbers 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠, respectively. Show that
𝑝𝑝 − 𝑞𝑞
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = −𝑎𝑎2 .
𝑝𝑝∗ − 𝑞𝑞 ∗
Deduce that, if the chords 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 and 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 are perpendicular, then 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = 0.
The distinct points 𝐴𝐴1 , 𝐴𝐴2 , … , 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 (where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 3) lie on a circle. The points 𝐵𝐵1 , 𝐵𝐵2 , … , 𝐵𝐵𝑛𝑛 lie on the
same circle and are chosen so that the chords 𝐵𝐵1 𝐵𝐵2 , 𝐵𝐵2 𝐵𝐵3 , … , 𝐵𝐵𝑛𝑛 𝐵𝐵1 are perpendicular,
respectively, to the chords 𝐴𝐴1 𝐴𝐴2 , 𝐴𝐴2 𝐴𝐴3 , … , 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 𝐴𝐴1 . Show that, for 𝑛𝑛 = 3 , there are only two
choices of 𝐵𝐵1 for which this is possible. What is the corresponding result for 𝑛𝑛 = 4? State the
corresponding results for values of 𝑛𝑛 greater than 4.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2007 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2007Q7]
The functions 𝑠𝑠(𝑥𝑥) (0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 < 1) and 𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥) (𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0), and the real number 𝑝𝑝, are defined by
𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 ∞
1 1 1
𝑠𝑠(𝑥𝑥) = � d𝑢𝑢, 𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥) = � d𝑢𝑢, 𝑝𝑝 = 2 � d𝑢𝑢.
0 √1 − 𝑢𝑢2 0 1 + 𝑢𝑢2 0 1 + 𝑢𝑢2
For this question, do not evaluate any of the above integrals explicitly in terms of inverse
trigonometric functions or the number π.
∞ 1 1
(i) Use the substitution 𝑢𝑢 = 𝑣𝑣 −1 to show that 𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥) = ∫1 1+𝑣𝑣 2 d𝑣𝑣. Hence evaluate 𝑡𝑡 � � + 𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥)
𝑥𝑥
𝑥𝑥
1
in terms of 𝑝𝑝 and deduce that 2𝑡𝑡(1) = 𝑝𝑝.
2
𝑢𝑢 d𝑢𝑢 1
(ii) Let 𝑦𝑦 = . Express 𝑢𝑢 in terms of 𝑦𝑦, and show that = .
√1+𝑢𝑢2 d𝑦𝑦 �(1−𝑦𝑦2 )3

By making a substitution in the integral for 𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥), show that

𝑥𝑥
𝑡𝑡(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑠𝑠 � �.
√1 + 𝑥𝑥 2
1 1
Deduce that 𝑠𝑠 � � = 𝑝𝑝.
2 √ 4
1
𝑢𝑢+ 1 √3 1 1 1
√3
(iii) Let 𝑧𝑧 = 1 . Show that 𝑡𝑡 � 3� = ∫1 2 d𝑧𝑧, and hence that 3𝑡𝑡 �√3� = 𝑝𝑝.
1− 𝑢𝑢 √ √3
1+𝑧𝑧 2
√3

[STEP 3, 2007Q8] 2007

[Link]
(i) Find functions 𝑎𝑎(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥) such that 𝑢𝑢 = 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑢𝑢 = e−𝑥𝑥 both satisfy the equation 4

d2 𝑢𝑢 d𝑢𝑢
2
+ 𝑎𝑎(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥)𝑢𝑢 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
For these functions 𝑎𝑎(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥), write down the general solution of the equation.
1 d𝑢𝑢
Show that the substitution 𝑦𝑦 = 3𝑢𝑢 d𝑥𝑥 transforms the equation

d𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 1
+ 3𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑦𝑦 = (∗)
d𝑥𝑥 1 + 𝑥𝑥 3(1 + 𝑥𝑥)
into
d2 𝑢𝑢 𝑥𝑥 d𝑢𝑢 1
+ − 𝑢𝑢 = 0
d𝑥𝑥 2 1 + 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 1 + 𝑥𝑥
and hence show that the solution of equation (∗) that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0 is given by
1−e−𝑥𝑥
𝑦𝑦 = 3(𝑥𝑥+e−𝑥𝑥).

(ii) Find the solution of the equation

d𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 1
+ 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑦𝑦 =
d𝑥𝑥 1 − 𝑥𝑥 1 − 𝑥𝑥
that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 2 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2007

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2007Q9]
Two small beads, 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵, each of mass 𝑚𝑚, are threaded on a smooth horizontal circular hoop
of radius 𝑎𝑎 and centre 𝑂𝑂. The angle 𝜃𝜃 is the acute angle determined by 2𝜃𝜃 = ∠𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
The beads are connected by a light straight spring. The energy stored in the spring is
𝑚𝑚𝑘𝑘 2 𝑎𝑎2 (𝜃𝜃 − 𝛼𝛼)2 ,
π π
where 𝑘𝑘 and 𝛼𝛼 are constants satisfying 𝑘𝑘 > 0 and 4 < 𝛼𝛼 < 2 .

The spring is held in compression with 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛽𝛽 and then released. Find the period of oscillations
in the two cases that arise according to the value of 𝛽𝛽 and state the value of 𝛽𝛽 for which
oscillations do not occur.

[STEP 3, 2007Q10]
A particle is projected from a point on a plane that is inclined at an angle 𝜙𝜙 to the horizontal.
The position of the particle at time 𝑡𝑡 after it is projected is (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦), where (0, 0) is the point of
projection, 𝑥𝑥 measures distance up the line of greatest slope and 𝑦𝑦 measures perpendicular
distance from the plane. Initially, the velocity of the particle is given by (𝑥𝑥̇ , 𝑦𝑦̇ ) =
π
(𝑉𝑉 cos 𝜃𝜃 , 𝑉𝑉 sin 𝜃𝜃), where 𝑉𝑉 > 0 and 𝜙𝜙 + 𝜃𝜃 < . Write down expressions for 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦.
2

The particle bounces on the plane and returns along the same path to the point of projection.
Show that 2007
[Link]

2 tan 𝜙𝜙 tan 𝜃𝜃 = 1 5

and that
𝑉𝑉 2 cos 2 𝜃𝜃
𝑅𝑅 = ,
2𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜙𝜙
where 𝑅𝑅 is the range along the plane.
Show further that
2𝑉𝑉 2
= 3 sin 𝜙𝜙 + cosec 𝜙𝜙
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑉𝑉 2
and deduce that the largest possible value of 𝑅𝑅 is .
√3𝑔𝑔

STEP 3 Past Paper 2007 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2007Q11]
(i) A wheel consists of a thin light circular rim attached by light spokes of length 𝑎𝑎 to a small
hub of mass 𝑚𝑚. The wheel rolls without slipping on a rough horizontal table directly
towards a straight edge of the table. The plane of the wheel is vertical throughout the
motion. The speed of the wheel is 𝑢𝑢, where 𝑢𝑢2 < 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎.
Show that, after the wheel reaches the edge of the table and while it is still in contact with
the table, the frictional force on the wheel is zero. Show also that the hub will fall a vertical
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎−𝑢𝑢2
distance before the rim loses contact with the table.
3𝑔𝑔
𝑚𝑚
(ii) Two particles, each of mass , are attached to a light circular hoop of radius 𝑎𝑎, at the ends
2
of a diameter. The hoop rolls without slipping on a rough horizontal table directly towards
a straight edge of the table. The plane of the hoop is vertical throughout the motion. When
the centre of the hoop is vertically above the edge of the table it has speed 𝑢𝑢, where 𝑢𝑢2 <
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, and one particle is vertically above the other.
Show that, after the hoop reaches the edge of the table and while it is still in contact with
the table, the frictional force on the hoop is non-zero and deduce that the hoop will slip
before it loses contact with the table.

2007
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2007

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2007Q12]
I choose a number from the integers 1, 2, … , (2𝑛𝑛 − 1) and the outcome is the random variable
𝑁𝑁. Calculate E(𝑁𝑁) and E(𝑁𝑁 2 ).
I then repeat a certain experiment 𝑁𝑁 times, the outcome of the 𝑖𝑖 th experiment being the
random variable 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 (1 ≤ 𝑖𝑖 ≤ 𝑁𝑁). For each 𝑖𝑖, the random variable 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 has mean 𝜇𝜇 and variance
𝜎𝜎 2 , and 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 is independent of 𝑋𝑋𝑗𝑗 for 𝑖𝑖 ≠ 𝑗𝑗 and also independent of 𝑁𝑁. The random variable 𝑌𝑌 is
1
defined by 𝑌𝑌 = ∑𝑁𝑁
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 .Show that E(𝑌𝑌) = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 and that Cov(𝑌𝑌, 𝑁𝑁) = 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 − 1)𝜇𝜇.
3

Find Var(𝑌𝑌) in terms of 𝑛𝑛, 𝜎𝜎 2 and 𝜇𝜇.

[STEP 3, 2007Q13]
A frog jumps towards a large pond. Each jump takes the frog either 1 m or 2 m nearer to the
pond. The probability of a 1 m jump is 𝑝𝑝 and the probability of a 2 m jumps is 𝑞𝑞, where 𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 =
1, the occurrence of long and short jumps being independent.
1
(i) Let 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 (𝑗𝑗) be the probability that the frog, starting at a point �𝑛𝑛 − � m away from the edge
2
of the pond, lands in the pond for the first time on its 𝑗𝑗th jump. Show that 𝑝𝑝2 (2) = 𝑝𝑝.
1
(ii) Let 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 be the expected number of jumps, starting at a point �𝑛𝑛 − 2� m away from the edge
of the pond, required to land in the pond for the first time. Write down the values of 𝑢𝑢12007 . By
2
finding first the relevant values of 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 (𝑚𝑚), calculate 𝑢𝑢2 and show that 𝑢𝑢3 = 3 − 2𝑞𝑞 + 𝑞𝑞 [Link]
.
7
(iii) Given that 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 can be expressed in the form 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 = 𝐴𝐴(−𝑞𝑞)𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝐵𝐵 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶, where 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶
are constants (independent of 𝑛𝑛), show that 𝐶𝐶 = (1 + 𝑞𝑞)−1 and find 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 in terms of 𝑞𝑞.
𝑛𝑛
Hence show that, for large 𝑛𝑛, 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 ≈ and explain carefully why this result is to be
𝑝𝑝+2𝑞𝑞
expected.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2007 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2007Q14]
(i) My favourite dartboard is a disc of unit radius and centre 𝑂𝑂. I never miss the board, and
the probability of my hitting any given area of the dartboard is proportional to the area.
Each throw is independent of any other throw. I throw a dart 𝑛𝑛 times (where 𝑛𝑛 > 1). Find
the expected area of the smallest circle, with centre 𝑂𝑂, that encloses all the 𝑛𝑛 holes made
by my dart.
Find also the expected area of the smallest circle, with centre 𝑂𝑂, that encloses all the
(𝑛𝑛 − 1) holes nearest to 𝑂𝑂.
(ii) My other dartboard is a square of side 2 units, with centre 𝑄𝑄. I never miss the board, and
the probability of my hitting any given area of the dartboard is proportional to the area.
Each throw is independent of any other throw. I throw a dart 𝑛𝑛 times (where 𝑛𝑛 > 1). Find
the expected area of the smallest square, with centre 𝑄𝑄, that encloses all the 𝑛𝑛 holes made
by my dart.
(iii) Determine, without detailed calculations, whether the expected area of the smallest circle,
with centre 𝑄𝑄, on my square dartboard that encloses all the 𝑛𝑛 holes made by my darts is
larger or smaller than that for my circular dartboard.

2007
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2007

STEP 3 2008
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2008
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2008 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2008Q1]
Find all values of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 that satisfy the simultaneous equations
𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 = 1
1
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
3
1
𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦 2 =
5
1
𝑎𝑎𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑏𝑏𝑦𝑦 3 = .
7
[Hint: you may wish to start by multiplying the second equation by 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦.]

[STEP 3, 2008Q2]
Let 𝑆𝑆𝑘𝑘 (𝑛𝑛) ≡ ∑𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟=0 𝑟𝑟 𝑘𝑘 , where 𝑘𝑘 is a positive integer, so that
1 1
𝑆𝑆1 (𝑛𝑛) ≡ 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1) and 𝑆𝑆2 (𝑛𝑛) ≡ 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1)(2𝑛𝑛 + 1).
2 6
(i) By considering ∑𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟=0[(𝑟𝑟 + 1)𝑘𝑘 − 𝑟𝑟 𝑘𝑘 ], show that
𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘
𝑘𝑘𝑆𝑆𝑘𝑘−1 (𝑛𝑛) = (𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑘𝑘 − (𝑛𝑛 + 1) − � � 𝑆𝑆𝑘𝑘−2 (𝑛𝑛) − � � 𝑆𝑆𝑘𝑘−3 (𝑛𝑛) − ⋯ − � � 𝑆𝑆 (𝑛𝑛). (∗)
2 3 𝑘𝑘 − 1 1
Obtain simplified expressions for 𝑆𝑆3 (𝑛𝑛) and 𝑆𝑆4 (𝑛𝑛). 2008
[Link]

(ii) Explain, using (∗), why 𝑆𝑆𝑘𝑘 (𝑛𝑛) is a polynomial of degree 𝑘𝑘 + 1 in 𝑛𝑛 . Show that in this
2
polynomial the constant term is zero and the sum of the coefficients is 1.

[STEP 3, 2008Q3]
The point 𝑃𝑃(𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜃𝜃 , 𝑏𝑏 sin 𝜃𝜃), where 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏 > 0, lies on the ellipse
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 2
+ = 1.
𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏 2
The point 𝑆𝑆(−e𝑎𝑎, 0), where 𝑏𝑏 2 = 𝑎𝑎2 (1 − e2 ), is a focus of the ellipse. The point 𝑁𝑁 is the foot of
the perpendicular from the origin, 𝑂𝑂, to the tangent to the ellipse at 𝑃𝑃. The lines 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
intersect at 𝑇𝑇. Show that the 𝑦𝑦-coordinate of 𝑇𝑇 is
𝑏𝑏 sin 𝜃𝜃
.
1 + e cos 𝜃𝜃
Show that 𝑇𝑇 lies on the circle with centre 𝑆𝑆 and radius 𝑎𝑎.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2008

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2008Q4]
𝑦𝑦
(i) Show, with the aid of a sketch, that 𝑦𝑦 > tanh �2 � for 𝑦𝑦 > 0 and deduce that

𝑥𝑥 − 1
arcosh 𝑥𝑥 > for 𝑥𝑥 > 1. (∗)
√𝑥𝑥 2 − 1
𝑥𝑥−1
(ii) By integrating (∗), show that arcosh 𝑥𝑥 > 2 for 𝑥𝑥 > 1.
√𝑥𝑥 2 −1

√𝑥𝑥 2 −1
(iii) Show that arcosh 𝑥𝑥 > 3 for 𝑥𝑥 > 1.
𝑥𝑥+2

[Note: arcosh 𝑥𝑥 is another notation for cosh−1 𝑥𝑥.]

[STEP 3, 2008Q5]
The functions 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥), for 𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, …, satisfy the recurrence relation
𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) − 2𝑥𝑥𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) + 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛−1 (𝑥𝑥) = 0 (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1). (∗)
Show by induction that
2
�𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥)� − 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛−1 (𝑥𝑥)𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥),
2
where 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = �𝑇𝑇1 (𝑥𝑥)� − 𝑇𝑇0 (𝑥𝑥)𝑇𝑇2 (𝑥𝑥).
In the case 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) ≡ 0 , determine (with proof) an expression for 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑇𝑇0 (𝑥𝑥)
𝑇𝑇 (𝑥𝑥)
(assumed to be non-zero) and 𝑟𝑟(𝑥𝑥), where 𝑟𝑟(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑇𝑇1 (𝑥𝑥). Find the two possible expressions2008
for
0
[Link]
𝑟𝑟(𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑥𝑥.
3

[STEP 3, 2008Q6]
d𝑦𝑦
In this question, 𝑝𝑝 denotes d𝑥𝑥 .

(i) Given that

𝑦𝑦 = 𝑝𝑝2 + 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥,
show by differentiating with respect to 𝑥𝑥 that
d𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥
= −2 − .
d𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝
2
Hence show that 𝑥𝑥 = − 3 𝑝𝑝 + 𝐴𝐴𝑝𝑝−2 , where 𝐴𝐴 is an arbitrary constant.

Find 𝑦𝑦 in terms of 𝑥𝑥 if 𝑝𝑝 = −3 when 𝑥𝑥 = 2.

(ii) Given instead that
𝑦𝑦 = 2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 + 𝑝𝑝 ln 𝑝𝑝,
1 1 1
and that 𝑝𝑝 = 1 when 𝑥𝑥 = − , show that 𝑥𝑥 = − ln 𝑝𝑝 − and find 𝑦𝑦 in terms of 𝑥𝑥.
4 2 4

STEP 3 Past Paper 2008 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2008Q7]
The points 𝐴𝐴 , 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 in the Argand diagram are the vertices of an equilateral triangle
described anticlockwise. Show that the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 representing 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶
satisfy

2𝑐𝑐 = (𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏) + 𝐢𝐢√3(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎).

Find a similar relation in the case that 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are the vertices of an equilateral triangle
described clockwise.
(i) The quadrilateral 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 lies in the Argand diagram. Show that points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄, 𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆 can be
chosen so that 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 , 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 , 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 are equilateral triangles and 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is a
parallelogram.
(ii) The triangle 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 lies in the Argand diagram. Show that the centroids 𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝑊𝑊 of the
equilateral triangles drawn externally on the sides of 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 are the vertices of an
equilateral triangle.
[Note: The centroid of a triangle with vertices represented by the complex numbers 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦
1
and 𝑧𝑧 is the point represented by (𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧)].
3

[STEP 3, 2008Q8]
(i) The coefficients in the series
1 1 1 2008
𝑆𝑆 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥 3 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟 + ⋯
3 6 12 [Link]

4
satisfy a recurrence relation of the form 𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟+1 + 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 = 0. Write down the value of 𝑝𝑝.
By considering (1 + 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝)𝑆𝑆, find an expression for the sum to infinity of 𝑆𝑆 (assuming that it
exists). Find also an expression for the sum of the first 𝑛𝑛 + 1 terms of 𝑆𝑆.
(ii) The coefficients in the series
𝑇𝑇 = 2 + 8𝑥𝑥 + 18𝑥𝑥 2 + 37𝑥𝑥 3 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟 + ⋯
satisfy a recurrence relation of the form 𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟+2 + 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟+1 + 𝑞𝑞𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 = 0. Find an expression for
the sum to infinity of 𝑇𝑇 (assuming that it exists). By expressing 𝑇𝑇 in partial fractions, or
otherwise, find an expression for the sum of the first 𝑛𝑛 + 1 terms of 𝑇𝑇.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2008

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2008Q9]
A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is initially at rest on a rough horizontal surface. The particle experiences
a force 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 sin π𝑡𝑡 , where 𝑡𝑡 is time, acting in a fixed horizontal direction. The coefficient of
friction between the particle and the surface is 𝜇𝜇. Given that the particle starts to move first at
𝑡𝑡 = 𝑇𝑇0 , state the relation between 𝑇𝑇0 and 𝜇𝜇.
(i) For 𝜇𝜇 = 𝜇𝜇0 , the particle comes to rest for the first time at 𝑡𝑡 = 1. Sketch the acceleration-
time graph for 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 1. Show that
1
1 + (1 − 𝜇𝜇02 )2 − 𝜇𝜇0 π + 𝜇𝜇0 arcsin 𝜇𝜇0 = 0.
(ii) For 𝜇𝜇 = 𝜇𝜇0 sketch the acceleration-time graph for 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 3. Describe the motion of the
particle in this case and in the case 𝜇𝜇 = 0.
[Note: arcsin 𝑥𝑥 is another notation for sin−1 𝑥𝑥.]

[STEP 3, 2008Q10]
A long string consists of 𝑛𝑛 short light strings joined together, each of natural length 𝑙𝑙 and
modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆. It hangs vertically at rest, suspended from one end. Each of the short
strings has a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 attached to its lower end. The short strings are numbered 1 to
𝑛𝑛, the 𝑛𝑛th short string being at the top. By considering the tension in the 𝑟𝑟th short string,
determine the length of the long string. Find also the elastic energy stored in the long string.
2008
[Link]
A uniform heavy rope of mass 𝑀𝑀 and natural length 𝐿𝐿0 has modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆. The rope
5
hangs vertically at rest, suspended from one end. Show that the length, 𝐿𝐿, of the rope is given
by
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝐿𝐿 = 𝐿𝐿0 �1 + �,
2𝜆𝜆
and find an expression in terms of 𝐿𝐿, 𝐿𝐿0 and 𝜆𝜆 for the elastic energy stored in the rope.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2008 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2008Q11]
A circular wheel of radius 𝑟𝑟 has moment of inertia 𝐼𝐼 about its axle, which is fixed in a horizontal
position. A light string is wrapped around the circumference of the wheel and a particle of mass
𝑚𝑚 hangs from the free end. The system is released from rest and the particle descends. The
string does not slip on the wheel.
As the particle descends, the wheel turns through 𝑛𝑛1 revolutions, and the string then detaches
from the wheel. At this moment, the angular speed of the wheel is 𝜔𝜔0 . The wheel then turns
through a further 𝑛𝑛2 revolutions, in time 𝑇𝑇, before coming to rest. The couple on the wheel due
to resistance is constant.
Show that
1
𝜔𝜔 𝑇𝑇 = 2π𝑛𝑛2
2 0
and
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑛𝑛1 𝑇𝑇 2 − 4π𝑚𝑚𝑟𝑟 2 𝑛𝑛22
𝐼𝐼 = .
4π𝑛𝑛2 (𝑛𝑛1 + 𝑛𝑛2 )

2008
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2008

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2008Q12]
Let 𝑋𝑋 be a random variable with a Laplace distribution, so that its probability density function
is given by
1
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = e−|𝑥𝑥| , − ∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞. (∗)
2
Sketch 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥). Show that its moment generating function 𝑀𝑀𝑋𝑋 (𝜃𝜃) is given by 𝑀𝑀𝑋𝑋 (𝜃𝜃) = (1 − 𝜃𝜃 2 )−1
and hence find the variance of 𝑋𝑋.
A frog is jumping up and down, attempting to land on the same spot each time. In fact, in each
of 𝑛𝑛 successive jumps he always lands on a fixed straight line but when he lands from the 𝑖𝑖th
jump (𝑖𝑖 = 1,2, … , 𝑛𝑛) his displacement from the point from which he jumped is 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 cm, where 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖
has the distribution (∗). His displacement from his starting point after 𝑛𝑛 jumps is 𝑌𝑌cm (so that
𝑌𝑌 = ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ). Each jump is independent of the others.
𝑌𝑌
Obtain the moment generating function for and, by considering its logarithm, show that
√2𝑛𝑛
1
this moment generating function tends to exp � 𝜃𝜃 2 � as 𝑛𝑛 → ∞.
2
1
Given that exp � 𝜃𝜃 2 � is the moment generating function of the standard Normal random
2
variable, estimate the least number of jumps such that there is a 5% chance that the frog lands
25 cm or more from his starting point.

2008
[Link]

[STEP 3, 2008Q13] 7

A box contains 𝑛𝑛 pieces of string, each of which has two ends. I select two string ends at random
and tie them together. This creates either a ring (if the two ends are from the same string) or a
longer piece of string. I repeat the process of tying together string ends chosen at random until
there are none left.
Find the expected number of rings created at the first step and hence obtain an expression for
the expected number of rings created by the end of the process. Find also an expression for the
variance of the number of rings created.
1 1
Given that ln 20 ≈ 3 and that 1 + + ⋯ + ≈ ln 𝑛𝑛 for large 𝑛𝑛, determine approximately the
2 𝑛𝑛
expected number of rings created in the case 𝑛𝑛 = 40 000.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2008 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2008
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2008

STEP 3 2009
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2009
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2009 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2009Q1]
The points 𝑆𝑆, 𝑇𝑇, 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑉𝑉 have coordinates (𝑠𝑠, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚), (𝑡𝑡, 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚), (𝑢𝑢, 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛) and (𝑣𝑣, 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛), respectively.
The lines 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 and 𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 meet the line 𝑦𝑦 = 0 at the points with coordinates (𝑝𝑝, 0) and (𝑞𝑞, 0) ,
respectively. Show that
(𝑚𝑚 − 𝑛𝑛)𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑝𝑝 = ,
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
and write down a similar expression for 𝑞𝑞.
Given that 𝑆𝑆 and 𝑇𝑇 lie on the circle 𝑥𝑥 2 + (𝑦𝑦 − 𝑐𝑐)2 = 𝑟𝑟 2 , find a quadratic equation satisfied by 𝑠𝑠
and by 𝑡𝑡, and hence determine 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 and 𝑠𝑠 + 𝑡𝑡 in terms of 𝑚𝑚, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑟𝑟.
Given that 𝑆𝑆, 𝑇𝑇, 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑉𝑉 lie on the above circle, show that 𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 = 0.

[STEP 3, 2009Q2]
(i) Let 𝑦𝑦 = ∑∞ 𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛=0 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 , where the coefficients 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 are independent of 𝑥𝑥 and are such that this
series and all others in this question converge. Show that
∞

𝑦𝑦 = � 𝑛𝑛𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−1 ,
′

𝑛𝑛=1

and write down a similar expression for 𝑦𝑦′′.

2009
[Link]
Write out explicitly each of the three series as far as the term containing 𝑎𝑎3 .
2
(ii) It is given that 𝑦𝑦 satisfies the differential equation
𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 ′′ − 𝑦𝑦 ′ + 4𝑥𝑥 3 𝑦𝑦 = 0.
By substituting the series of part (i) into the differential equation and comparing
coefficients, show that 𝑎𝑎1 = 0.
Show that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 4.
4
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = − 𝑎𝑎 ,
𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 − 2) 𝑛𝑛−4
and that, if 𝑎𝑎0 = 1 and 𝑎𝑎2 = 0, then 𝑦𝑦 = cos(𝑥𝑥 2 ).
Find the corresponding result when 𝑎𝑎0 = 0 and 𝑎𝑎2 = 1.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2009

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2009Q3]
The function 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) is defined, for 𝑡𝑡 ≠ 0, by
𝑡𝑡
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = .
e𝑡𝑡 −1
(i) By expanding e𝑡𝑡 , show that lim 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = 1. Find 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑡𝑡) and evaluate lim 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑡𝑡).
𝑡𝑡→0 𝑡𝑡→0
1
(ii) Show that 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) + 2 𝑡𝑡 is an even function. [Note: A function 𝑔𝑔(𝑡𝑡) is said to be even if 𝑔𝑔(𝑡𝑡) ≡
𝑔𝑔(−𝑡𝑡).]
(iii) Show with the aid of a sketch that e𝑡𝑡 (1 − 𝑡𝑡) ≤ 1 and deduce that 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑡𝑡) ≠ 0 for 𝑡𝑡 ≠ 0.
Sketch the graph of 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡).

[STEP 3, 2009Q4]
For any given (suitable) function 𝑓𝑓, the Laplace transform of 𝑓𝑓 is the function 𝐹𝐹 defined by
∞
𝐹𝐹(𝑠𝑠) = � e−𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) d𝑡𝑡 (𝑠𝑠 > 0).
0

(i) Show that the Laplace transform of e−𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡), where 𝑏𝑏 > 0, is 𝐹𝐹(𝑠𝑠 + 𝑏𝑏).
𝑠𝑠
(ii) Show that the Laplace transform of 𝑓𝑓(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎), where 𝑎𝑎 > 0, is 𝑎𝑎−1 𝐹𝐹 �𝑎𝑎�.

(iii) Show that the Laplace transform of 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑡𝑡) is 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠(𝑠𝑠) − 𝑓𝑓(0).

2009
1 [Link]
(iv) In the case 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = sin 𝑡𝑡, show that 𝐹𝐹(𝑠𝑠) = .
𝑠𝑠2 +1 3
−𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Using only these four results, find the Laplace transform of e cos 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞, where 𝑝𝑝 > 0 and 𝑞𝑞 > 0.

[STEP 3, 2009Q5]
The numbers 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 and 𝑧𝑧 satisfy
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧 = 1
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 = 2
2

𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑦𝑦 3 + 𝑧𝑧 3 = 3.
Show that
1
𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 + 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = − .
2
Show also that 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑥𝑥 2 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑦𝑦 2 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑦𝑦 2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑧𝑧 2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑧𝑧 2 𝑦𝑦 = −1, and hence that
1
𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = .
6
Let 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 = 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑧𝑧 𝑛𝑛 . Use the above results to find numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 such that the relation
𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛+1 = 𝑎𝑎𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 + 𝑏𝑏𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝑐𝑐𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛−2 ,
holds for all 𝑛𝑛.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2009 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2009Q6]
1
Show that �e𝐢𝐢𝛽𝛽 − e𝐢𝐢𝛼𝛼 � = 2 sin 2 (𝛽𝛽 − 𝛼𝛼) for 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < 𝛽𝛽 < 2π. Hence show that

�e𝐢𝐢𝛼𝛼 − e𝐢𝐢𝛽𝛽 ��e𝐢𝐢𝛾𝛾 − e𝐢𝐢𝛿𝛿 � + �e𝐢𝐢𝛽𝛽 − e𝐢𝐢𝛾𝛾 ��e𝐢𝐢𝛼𝛼 − e𝐢𝐢𝛿𝛿 � = �e𝐢𝐢𝛼𝛼 − e𝐢𝐢𝛾𝛾 ��e𝐢𝐢𝛽𝛽 − e𝐢𝐢𝛿𝛿 �,
where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < 𝛽𝛽 < 𝛾𝛾 < 𝛿𝛿 < 2π.
Interpret this result as a theorem about cyclic quadrilaterals.

[STEP 3, 2009Q7]
(i) The functions 𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) are defined for 𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, …, by
1 d𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥)
𝑓𝑓0 (𝑥𝑥) = and 𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) = .
1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 d𝑥𝑥
Prove, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, that
(1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) + 2(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) + 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛−1 (𝑥𝑥) = 0.
(ii) The functions 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) are defined for 𝑛𝑛 = 0, 1, 2, …, by
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = (1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )𝑛𝑛+1 𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥).
Find expressions for 𝑃𝑃0 (𝑥𝑥), 𝑃𝑃1 (𝑥𝑥) and 𝑃𝑃2 (𝑥𝑥).
Prove, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0, that
d𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) 2009
𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑥𝑥) − (1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 ) + 2(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = 0,
d𝑥𝑥 [Link]

4
and that 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) is a polynomial of degree 𝑛𝑛.

[STEP 3, 2009Q8]
Let 𝑚𝑚 be a positive integer and let 𝑛𝑛 be a non-negative integer.
(i) Use the result lim e−𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑡𝑡 𝑛𝑛 = 0 to show that
𝑡𝑡→∞

lim 𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚 (ln 𝑥𝑥)𝑛𝑛 = 0.

𝑥𝑥→0

By writing 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 as e𝑥𝑥 ln 𝑥𝑥 show that

lim 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 = 1.
𝑥𝑥→0
1
(ii) Let 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = ∫0 𝑥𝑥 𝑚𝑚 (ln 𝑥𝑥)𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥. Show that
𝑛𝑛 + 1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 = − 𝐼𝐼
𝑚𝑚 + 1 𝑛𝑛
and hence evaluate 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 .
(iii) Show that
1
𝑥𝑥
1 2 1 3 1 4
� 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = 1 − � � + � � − � � + ⋯.
0 2 3 4

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2009

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2009Q9]
A particle is projected under gravity from a point 𝑃𝑃 and passes through a point 𝑄𝑄. The angles
of the trajectory with the positive horizontal direction at 𝑃𝑃 and at 𝑄𝑄 are 𝜃𝜃 and 𝜙𝜙, respectively.
The angle of elevation of 𝑄𝑄 from 𝑃𝑃 is 𝛼𝛼.
(i) Show that tan 𝜃𝜃 + tan 𝜙𝜙 = 2 tan 𝛼𝛼.
(ii) It is given that there is a second trajectory from 𝑃𝑃 to 𝑄𝑄 with the same speed of projection.
The angles of this trajectory with the positive horizontal direction at 𝑃𝑃 and at 𝑄𝑄 are 𝜃𝜃 ′ and
𝜙𝜙 ′ , respectively. By considering a quadratic equation satisfied by tan 𝜃𝜃 , show that
tan(𝜃𝜃 + 𝜃𝜃 ′ ) = − cot 𝛼𝛼. Show also that 𝜃𝜃 + 𝜃𝜃 ′ = π + 𝜙𝜙 + 𝜙𝜙 ′ .

[STEP 3, 2009Q10]
A light spring is fixed at its lower end and its axis is vertical. When a certain particle 𝑃𝑃 rests on
the top of the spring, the compression is 𝑑𝑑. When, instead, 𝑃𝑃 is dropped onto the top of the
spring from a height ℎ above it, the compression at time 𝑡𝑡 after 𝑃𝑃 hits the top of the spring is 𝑥𝑥.
Obtain a second-order differential equation relating 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑡𝑡 for 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 𝑇𝑇, where 𝑇𝑇 is the time
at which 𝑃𝑃 first loses contact with the spring.
Find the solution of this equation in the form
𝑥𝑥 = 𝐴𝐴 + 𝐵𝐵 cos(𝜔𝜔𝜔𝜔) + 𝐶𝐶 sin(𝜔𝜔𝜔𝜔),
2009
where the constants 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝜔𝜔 are to be given in terms of 𝑑𝑑, 𝑔𝑔 and ℎ as appropriate. [Link]

5
Show that

𝑑𝑑 2ℎ
𝑇𝑇 = � �2π − 2 arctan � �.
𝑔𝑔 𝑑𝑑

STEP 3 Past Paper 2009 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2009Q11]
A comet in deep space picks up mass as it travels through a large stationary dust cloud. It is
subject to a gravitational force of magnitude 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 acting in the direction of its motion. When it
entered the cloud, the comet had mass 𝑀𝑀 and speed 𝑉𝑉. After a time 𝑡𝑡, it has travelled a distance
𝑥𝑥 through the cloud, its mass is 𝑀𝑀(1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏), where 𝑏𝑏 is a positive constant, and its speed is 𝑣𝑣.
(i) In the case when 𝑓𝑓 = 0, write down an equation relating 𝑉𝑉, 𝑥𝑥, 𝑣𝑣 and 𝑏𝑏. Hence find an
expression for 𝑥𝑥 in terms of 𝑏𝑏, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝑡𝑡.
(ii) In the case when 𝑓𝑓 is a non-zero constant, use Newton’s second law in the form
force = rate of change of momentum
to show that
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑉𝑉
𝑣𝑣 = .
1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
Hence find an expression for 𝑥𝑥 in terms of 𝑏𝑏, 𝑉𝑉, 𝑓𝑓 and 𝑡𝑡.
Show that it is possible, if 𝑏𝑏, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝑓𝑓 are suitably chosen, for the comet to move with
constant speed. Show also that, if the comet does not move with constant speed, its speed
tends to a constant as 𝑡𝑡 → ∞.

2009
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2009

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2009Q12]
(i) Albert tosses a fair coin 𝑘𝑘 times, where 𝑘𝑘 is a given positive integer. The number of heads
he gets is 𝑋𝑋1 . He then tosses the coin 𝑋𝑋1 times, getting 𝑋𝑋2 heads. He then tosses the coin 𝑋𝑋2
times, geting 𝑋𝑋3 heads. The random variables 𝑋𝑋4 , 𝑋𝑋5 , … are defined similarly. Write down
E(𝑋𝑋1 ).
1
By considering E(𝑋𝑋2 |𝑋𝑋1 = 𝑥𝑥1 ), or otherwise, show that E(𝑋𝑋2 ) = 𝑘𝑘.
4

Find ∑∞
𝑖𝑖=1 E(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ).

(ii) Bertha has 𝑘𝑘 fair coins. She tosses the first coin until she gets a tail. The number of heads
she gets before the first tail is 𝑌𝑌1 . She then tosses the second coin until she gets a tail and
the number of heads she gets with this coin before the first tail is 𝑌𝑌2 . The random variables
𝑌𝑌3 , 𝑌𝑌4 , … , 𝑌𝑌𝑘𝑘 are defined similarly, and 𝑌𝑌 = ∑𝑘𝑘𝑖𝑖=1 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 .
Obtain the probability generating function of 𝑌𝑌 , and use it to find E(𝑌𝑌) , Var(𝑌𝑌) and
P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑟𝑟).

[STEP 3, 2009Q13]
(i) The point 𝑃𝑃 lies on the circumference of a circle of unit radius and centre 𝑂𝑂. The angle, 𝜃𝜃,
between 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the positive 𝑥𝑥-axis is a random variable, uniformly distributed on the
interval 0 ≤ 𝜃𝜃 < 2π. The cartesian coordinates of 𝑃𝑃 with respect to 𝑂𝑂 are (𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌). Find2009
the
probability density function for 𝑋𝑋, and calculate Var(𝑋𝑋). [Link]

7
Show that 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 are uncorrelated and discuss briefly whether they are independent.
(ii) The points 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛𝑛) are chosen independently on the circumference of the circle,
as in part (i), and have cartesian coordinates (𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 , 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 ). The point 𝑃𝑃� has coordinates (𝑋𝑋�, 𝑌𝑌�),
1 1
where 𝑋𝑋� = ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 and 𝑌𝑌� = ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 . Show that 𝑋𝑋� and 𝑌𝑌� are uncorrelated.
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛

2
Show that, for large 𝑛𝑛, 𝑃𝑃 ��
|𝑋𝑋| ≤ � � ≈ 0.95.
𝑛𝑛

STEP 3 Past Paper 2009 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2009
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2009

STEP 3 2010
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2010
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2010 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2010Q1]
Let 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑥𝑥2 , … , 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 and 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 be any fixed real numbers. The numbers 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are defined by
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
1 1
𝐴𝐴 = � 𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘 , 𝐵𝐵 = �(𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘 − 𝐴𝐴)2 ,
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
𝑘𝑘=1 𝑘𝑘=1

and the numbers 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 are defined by

𝑛𝑛+1 𝑛𝑛+1
1 1
𝐶𝐶 = � 𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘 , 𝐷𝐷 = �(𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘 − 𝐶𝐶)2 .
𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑛𝑛 + 1
𝑘𝑘=1 𝑘𝑘=1

(i) Express 𝐶𝐶 in terms of 𝐴𝐴, 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 and 𝑛𝑛.

(ii) Show that
𝑛𝑛
1
𝐵𝐵 = � 𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘2 − 𝐴𝐴2 .
𝑛𝑛
𝑘𝑘=1

(iii) Express 𝐷𝐷 in terms of 𝐵𝐵, 𝐴𝐴, 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 and 𝑛𝑛.

Hence show that (𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝐷𝐷 ≥ 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 for all values of 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 , but that 𝐷𝐷 < 𝐵𝐵 if and only if

(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝐵𝐵 (𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝐵𝐵

𝐴𝐴 − � < 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 < 𝐴𝐴 + � .
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
2010
[Link]

2
[STEP 3, 2010Q2]
In this question, 𝑎𝑎 is a positive constant.
(i) Express cosh 𝑎𝑎 in terms of exponentials.
By using partial fractions, prove that
1
1 𝑎𝑎
� d𝑥𝑥 = .
0 𝑥𝑥 2 + 2𝑥𝑥 cosh 𝑎𝑎 + 1 2 sinh 𝑎𝑎
(ii) Find, expressing your answers in terms of hyperbolic functions,
∞
1
� d𝑥𝑥
1 𝑥𝑥 2 + 2𝑥𝑥 sinh 𝑎𝑎 − 1
and
∞
1
� d𝑥𝑥.
0 𝑥𝑥 4 + 2𝑥𝑥 2 cosh 𝑎𝑎 +1

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2010

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2010Q3]
For any given positive integer 𝑛𝑛, a number 𝑎𝑎 (which may be complex) is said to be a primitive
𝑛𝑛th root of unity if 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 = 1 and there is no integer 𝑚𝑚 such that 0 < 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑎𝑎𝑚𝑚 = 1. Write
down the two primitive 4th roots of unity.
Let 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) be the polynomial such that the roots of the equation 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = 0 are the primitive 𝑛𝑛th
roots of unity, the coefficient of the highest power of 𝑥𝑥 is one and the equation has no repeated
roots. Show that 𝐶𝐶4 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 2 + 1.
(i) Find 𝐶𝐶1 (𝑥𝑥) , 𝐶𝐶2 (𝑥𝑥) , 𝐶𝐶3 (𝑥𝑥) , 𝐶𝐶5 (𝑥𝑥) and 𝐶𝐶6 (𝑥𝑥) , giving your answers as unfactorised
polynomials.
(ii) Find the value of 𝑛𝑛 for which 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 4 + 1.
(iii) Given that 𝑝𝑝 is prime, find an expression for 𝐶𝐶𝑝𝑝 (𝑥𝑥), giving your answer as an unfactorised
polynomial.
(iv) Prove that there are no positive integers 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 such that 𝐶𝐶𝑞𝑞 (𝑥𝑥) ≡ 𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 (𝑥𝑥)𝐶𝐶𝑠𝑠 (𝑥𝑥).

[STEP 3, 2010Q4]
(i) The number 𝛼𝛼 is a common root of the equations 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 = 0 and 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑑𝑑 = 0
(that is, 𝛼𝛼 satisfies both equations). Given that 𝑎𝑎 ≠ 𝑐𝑐, show that
𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑
𝛼𝛼 = − .
𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐
2010
Hence, or otherwise, show that the equations have at least one common root if and only if
[Link]

3
(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑)2 − 𝑎𝑎(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑)(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐) + 𝑏𝑏(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐)2 = 0.
Does this result still hold if the condition 𝑎𝑎 ≠ 𝑐𝑐 is not imposed?
(ii) Show that the equations 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 = 0 and 𝑥𝑥 3 + (𝑎𝑎 + 1)𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 + 𝑟𝑟 = 0 have at least
one common root if and only if
(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑟𝑟)2 − 𝑎𝑎(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑟𝑟)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑞𝑞) + 𝑏𝑏(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑞𝑞)2 = 0.
Hence, or otherwise, find the values of 𝑏𝑏 for which the equations 2𝑥𝑥 2 + 5𝑥𝑥 + 2𝑏𝑏 = 0 and
2𝑥𝑥 3 + 7𝑥𝑥 2 + 5𝑥𝑥 + 1 = 0 have at least one common root.

[STEP 3, 2010Q5]
The vertices 𝐴𝐴 , 𝐵𝐵 , 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 of a square have coordinates (0, 0) , (𝑎𝑎, 0) , (𝑎𝑎, 𝑎𝑎) and (0, 𝑎𝑎) ,
respectively. The points 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 have coordinates (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, 0) and (0, 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) respectively, where 0 <
𝑚𝑚 < 𝑛𝑛 < 1. The line 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 produced meets 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 produced at 𝑅𝑅 and the line 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 produced meets 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
produced at 𝑆𝑆 . The line 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 produced meets the line 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 produced at 𝑇𝑇 . Show that 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 is
perpendicular to 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
Explain how, given a square of area 𝑎𝑎2 , a square of area 2𝑎𝑎2 may be constructed using only a
straight-edge.
[Note: a straight-edge is a ruler with no markings on it; no measurements (and no use of
compasses) are allowed in the construction.]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2010 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2010Q6]
The points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 lie on a sphere of unit radius centred at the origin, 𝑂𝑂, which is fixed.
Initially, 𝑃𝑃 is at 𝑃𝑃0 (1, 0, 0), 𝑄𝑄 is at 𝑄𝑄0 (0, 1, 0) and 𝑅𝑅 is at 𝑅𝑅0 (0, 0, 1).
(i) The sphere is then rotated about the 𝑧𝑧-axis, so that the line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 turns directly towards the
positive 𝑦𝑦-axis through an angle 𝜙𝜙. The position of 𝑃𝑃 after this rotation is denoted by 𝑃𝑃1 .
Write down the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃1 .
(ii) The sphere is now rotated about the line in the 𝑥𝑥-𝑦𝑦 plane perpendicular to 𝑂𝑂𝑃𝑃1 , so that the
line 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 turns directly towards the positive 𝑧𝑧-axis through an angle 𝜆𝜆. The position of 𝑃𝑃
after this rotation is denoted by 𝑃𝑃2 . Find the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃2 . Find also the coordinates of
the points 𝑄𝑄2 and 𝑅𝑅2 , which are the positions of 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 after the two rotations.
(iii) The sphere is now rotated for a third time, so that 𝑃𝑃 returns from 𝑃𝑃2 to its original position
𝑃𝑃0 . During the rotation, 𝑃𝑃 remains in the plane containing 𝑃𝑃0 , 𝑃𝑃2 and 𝑂𝑂. Show that the angle
of this rotation, 𝜃𝜃, satisfies
cos 𝜃𝜃 = cos 𝜙𝜙 cos 𝜆𝜆,
and find a vector in the direction of the axis about which this rotation takes place.

[STEP 3, 2010Q7]
Given that 𝑦𝑦 = cos(𝑚𝑚 arcsin 𝑥𝑥), for |𝑥𝑥| < 1, prove that
d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 ) 2
− 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑚𝑚2 𝑦𝑦 = 0. 2010
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 [Link]

d3 𝑦𝑦 d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦 d4 𝑦𝑦 d3 𝑦𝑦 4
Obtain a similar equation relating 3 , 2 and , and a similar equation relating 4 , 3 and
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
d2 𝑦𝑦
.
d𝑥𝑥 2

d𝑛𝑛+2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑛𝑛+1 𝑦𝑦 d𝑛𝑛 𝑦𝑦

Conjecture and prove a relation between , and .
d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛+2 d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛+1 d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛

Obtain the first three non-zero terms of the Maclaurin series for 𝑦𝑦. Show that, if 𝑚𝑚 is an even
integer, cos 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 may be written as a polynomial in sin 𝜃𝜃 beginning
𝑚𝑚2 sin2 𝜃𝜃 𝑚𝑚2 (𝑚𝑚2 − 22 ) sin4 𝜃𝜃 1
1− + − ⋯. �|𝜃𝜃| < π�
2! 4! 2
State the degree of the polynomial.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2010

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2010Q8]
Given that 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥)𝑅𝑅 ′ (𝑥𝑥) − 𝑄𝑄 ′ (𝑥𝑥)𝑅𝑅(𝑥𝑥), write down an expression for
𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥)
� 2 d𝑥𝑥
�𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥)�

(i) By choosing the function 𝑅𝑅(𝑥𝑥) to be of the form 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐𝑥𝑥 2 , find
5𝑥𝑥 2 − 4𝑥𝑥 − 3
� d𝑥𝑥.
(1 + 2𝑥𝑥 + 3𝑥𝑥 2 )2
Show that the choice of 𝑅𝑅(𝑥𝑥) is not unique and, by comparing the two functions 𝑅𝑅(𝑥𝑥)
corresponding to two different values of 𝑎𝑎, explain how the different choices are related.
(ii) Find the general solution of
d𝑦𝑦
(1 + cos 𝑥𝑥 + 2 sin 𝑥𝑥) + (sin 𝑥𝑥 − 2 cos 𝑥𝑥)𝑦𝑦 = 5 − 3 cos 𝑥𝑥 + 4 sin 𝑥𝑥.
d𝑥𝑥

2010
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2010 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2010Q9]

The diagram shows two particles, 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 , connected by a light inextensible string which
passes over a smooth block fixed to a horizontal table. The cross-section of the block is a
quarter circle with centre 𝑂𝑂, which is at the edge of the table, and radius 𝑎𝑎. The angle between
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the table is 𝜃𝜃. The masses of 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑀𝑀, respectively, where 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑀𝑀.
Initially, 𝑃𝑃 is held at rest on the table and in contact with the block, 𝑄𝑄 is vertically above 𝑂𝑂, and
the string is taut. Then 𝑃𝑃 is released. Given that, in the subsequent motion, 𝑃𝑃 remains in contact
1
with the block as 𝜃𝜃 increases from 0 to 2 π, find an expression, in terms of 𝑚𝑚, 𝑀𝑀, 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑔𝑔, for
the normal reaction of the block on 𝑃𝑃 and show that
𝑚𝑚 π − 1
≥ .
𝑀𝑀 3

2010
[STEP 3, 2010Q10] [Link]

6
A small bead 𝐵𝐵, of mass 𝑚𝑚, slides without friction on a fixed horizontal ring of radius 𝑎𝑎. The
centre of the ring is at 𝑂𝑂. The bead is attached by a light elastic string to a fixed point 𝑃𝑃 in the
plane of the ring such that 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 𝑏𝑏, where 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑎𝑎. The natural length of the elastic string is 𝑐𝑐,
where 𝑐𝑐 < 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎, and its modulus of elasticity is 𝜆𝜆. Show that the equation of motion of the
bead is
𝑎𝑎 sin 𝜙𝜙
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝜙𝜙̈ = −𝜆𝜆 � − 1� sin(𝜃𝜃 + 𝜙𝜙),
𝑐𝑐 sin 𝜃𝜃
where 𝜃𝜃 = ∠𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and 𝜙𝜙 = ∠𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑃𝑃.
Given that 𝜃𝜃 and 𝜙𝜙 are small, show that 𝑎𝑎(𝜃𝜃 + 𝜙𝜙) ≈ 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 . Hence find the period of small
oscillations about the equilibrium position 𝜃𝜃 = 𝜙𝜙 = 0.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2010

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2010Q11]
A bullet of mass 𝑚𝑚 is fired horizontally with speed 𝑢𝑢 into a wooden block of mass 𝑀𝑀 at rest on
a horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is 𝜇𝜇. While
the bullet is moving through the block, it experiences a constant force of resistance to its
motion of magnitude 𝑅𝑅, where 𝑅𝑅 > (𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚)𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇. The bullet moves horizontally in the block and
does not emerge from the other side of the block.
(i) Show that the magnitude, 𝑎𝑎, of the deceleration of the bullet relative to the block while the
bullet is moving through the block is given by
𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅 − (𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚)𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇
𝑎𝑎 = + .
𝑚𝑚 𝑀𝑀
(ii) Show that the common speed, 𝑣𝑣, of the block and bullet when the bullet stops moving
through the block satisfies
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 − (𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚)𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = .
𝑀𝑀
(iii) Obtain an expression, in terms of 𝑢𝑢, 𝑣𝑣 and 𝑎𝑎, for the distance moved by the block while the
bullet is moving through the block.
(iv) Show that the total distance moved by the block is
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
.
2(𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚)𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇
Describe briefly what happens if 𝑅𝑅 < (𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚)𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇.
2010
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2010 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2010Q12]
The infinite series 𝑆𝑆 is given by
𝑆𝑆 = 1 + (1 + 𝑑𝑑)𝑟𝑟 + (1 + 2𝑑𝑑)𝑟𝑟 2 + ⋯ + (1 + 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛)𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛 + ⋯,
for |𝑟𝑟| < 1. By considering 𝑆𝑆 − 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟, or otherwise, prove that
1 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑆𝑆 = + .
1 − 𝑟𝑟 (1 − 𝑟𝑟)2
Arthur and Boadicea shoot arrows at a target. The probability that an arrow shot by Arthur hits
the target is 𝑎𝑎; the probability that an arrow shot by Boadicea hits the target is 𝑏𝑏. Each shot is
independent of all others. Prove that the expected number of shots it takes Arthur to hit the
1
target is 𝑎𝑎.

Arthur and Boadicea now have a contest. They take alternate shots, with Arthur going first. The
winner is the one who hits the target first. The probability that Arthur wins the contest is 𝛼𝛼 and
the probability that Boadicea wins is 𝛽𝛽. Show that
𝑎𝑎
𝛼𝛼 = ,
1 − 𝑎𝑎′ 𝑏𝑏 ′
where 𝑎𝑎′ = 1 − 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏′ = 1 − 𝑏𝑏, and find 𝛽𝛽.
𝛼𝛼 𝛽𝛽
Show that the expected number of shots in the contest is 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 .
2010
[Link]

8
[STEP 3, 2010Q13]
In this question, Corr(𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉) denotes the product moment correlation coefficient between the
random variables 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑉𝑉, defined by
Cov(𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉)
Corr(𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉) ≡ .
�Var(𝑈𝑈)Var(𝑉𝑉)
The independent random variables 𝑍𝑍1 , 𝑍𝑍2 and 𝑍𝑍3 each have expectation 0 and variance 1. What
is the value of Corr(𝑍𝑍1 , 𝑍𝑍2 )?
Let 𝑌𝑌1 = 𝑍𝑍1 and let
1
2 )2
𝑌𝑌2 = 𝜌𝜌12 𝑍𝑍1 + (1 − 𝜌𝜌12 𝑍𝑍2 ,
where 𝜌𝜌12 is a given constant with −1 < 𝜌𝜌12 < 1. Find E(𝑌𝑌2 ), Var(𝑌𝑌2 ) and Corr(𝑌𝑌1 , 𝑌𝑌2 ).
Now let 𝑌𝑌3 = 𝑎𝑎𝑍𝑍1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑍𝑍2 + 𝑐𝑐𝑍𝑍3 , where 𝑎𝑎 , 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are real constants and 𝑐𝑐 ≥ 0 . Given that
E(𝑌𝑌3 ) = 0, Var(𝑌𝑌3 ) = 1, Corr(𝑌𝑌1 , 𝑌𝑌3 ) = 𝜌𝜌13 and Corr(𝑌𝑌2 , 𝑌𝑌3 ) = 𝜌𝜌23 , express 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 in terms
of 𝜌𝜌23 , 𝜌𝜌13 and 𝜌𝜌12 .
Given constants 𝜇𝜇𝑖𝑖 and 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖 , for 𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2 and 3, give expressions in terms of the 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 , for random
variables 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 such that E(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ) = 𝜇𝜇𝑖𝑖 , Var(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ) = 𝜎𝜎𝑖𝑖2 and Corr�𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 , 𝑋𝑋𝑗𝑗 � = 𝜌𝜌𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 .

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2010

STEP 3 2011
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2011
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2011 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2011Q1]
(i) Find the general solution of the differential equation
d𝑢𝑢 𝑥𝑥 + 2
−� � 𝑢𝑢 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 + 1
(ii) Show that substituting 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑧𝑧e−𝑥𝑥 (where 𝑧𝑧 is a function of 𝑥𝑥 ) into the second order
differential equation
d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦
(𝑥𝑥 + 1) + 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 = 0 (∗)
d𝑥𝑥 2 d𝑥𝑥
d𝑧𝑧
leads to a first order differential equation for . Find 𝑧𝑧 and hence show that the general
d𝑥𝑥
solution of (∗) is
𝑦𝑦 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 + 𝐵𝐵e−𝑥𝑥 ,
where 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are arbitrary constants.
(iii) Find the general solution of the differential equation
d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦
(𝑥𝑥 + 1) 2
+ 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 = (𝑥𝑥 + 1)2 .
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥

[STEP 3, 2011Q2]
2011
[Link]
The polynomial 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is defined by
2
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−1 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−1 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎1 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎0 ,
where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2 and the coefficients 𝑎𝑎0 , … , 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛−1 are integers, with 𝑎𝑎0 ≠ 0 . Suppose that the
𝑝𝑝
equation 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 0 has a rational root , where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are integers with no common factor
𝑞𝑞
𝑝𝑝
greater than 1, and 𝑞𝑞 > 0. By considering 𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛−1 𝑓𝑓 � �, find the value of 𝑞𝑞 and deduce that any
𝑞𝑞
rational root of the equation 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 0 must be an integer.
(i) Show that the 𝑛𝑛th root of 2 is irrational for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.
(ii) Show that the cubic equation
𝑥𝑥 3 − 𝑥𝑥 + 1 = 0
has no rational roots.
(iii) Show that the polynomial equation
𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 − 5𝑥𝑥 + 7 = 0
has no rational roots for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2011

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2011Q3]
Show that, provided 𝑞𝑞 2 ≠ 4𝑝𝑝3 , the polynomial
𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 (𝑝𝑝 ≠ 0, 𝑞𝑞 ≠ 0)
can be written in the form
𝑎𝑎(𝑥𝑥 − 𝛼𝛼)3 + 𝑏𝑏(𝑥𝑥 − 𝛽𝛽)3 ,
where 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽 are the roots of the quadratic equation 𝑝𝑝𝑡𝑡 2 − 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 + 𝑝𝑝2 = 0, and 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are
constants which you should express in terms of 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽.
Hence show that one solution of the equation 𝑥𝑥 3 − 24𝑥𝑥 + 48 = 0 is
1
2 �2 − 23 �
𝑥𝑥 = 1
1 − 23
2π𝐢𝐢
and obtain similar expressions for the other two solutions in terms of 𝜔𝜔, where 𝜔𝜔 = e 3 .
Find also the roots of 𝑥𝑥 3 − 3𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 = 0 when 𝑝𝑝 = 𝑟𝑟 2 and 𝑞𝑞 = 2𝑟𝑟 3 for some non-zero constant
𝑟𝑟.

[STEP 3, 2011Q4]
The following result applies to any function 𝑓𝑓 which is continuous, has positive gradient and
satisfies 𝑓𝑓(0) = 0:
2011
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏 [Link]

𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≤ � 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 + � 𝑓𝑓 −1 (𝑦𝑦) d𝑦𝑦, (∗) 3

0 0

where 𝑓𝑓 −1 denotes the inverse function of 𝑓𝑓, and 𝑎𝑎 ≥ 0 and 𝑏𝑏 ≥ 0.

(i) By considering the graph of 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥), explain briefly why the inequality (∗) holds.
In the case 𝑎𝑎 > 0 and 𝑏𝑏 > 0, state a condition on 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 under which equality holds.
1 1
(ii) By taking 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 𝑝𝑝−1 in (∗), where 𝑝𝑝 > 1, show that if + = 1 then
𝑝𝑝 𝑞𝑞

𝑎𝑎𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏 𝑞𝑞
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≤ + .
𝑝𝑝 𝑞𝑞
Verify that equality holds under the condition you stated above.
1
(iii) Show that, for 0 ≤ 𝑎𝑎 ≤ π and 0 ≤ 𝑏𝑏 ≤ 1,
2

𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≤ 𝑏𝑏 arcsin 𝑏𝑏 + �1 − 𝑏𝑏 2 − cos 𝑎𝑎.

Deduce that, for 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 1,

arcsin(𝑡𝑡 −1 ) ≥ 𝑡𝑡 − �𝑡𝑡 2 − 1.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2011 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2011Q5]
A movable point 𝑃𝑃 has cartesian coordinates (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦), where 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 are functions of 𝑡𝑡. The polar
coordinates of 𝑃𝑃 with respect to the origin 𝑂𝑂 are 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃. Starting with the expression
1
� 𝑟𝑟 2 d𝜃𝜃
2
for the area swept out by 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, obtain the equivalent expression
1 d𝑦𝑦 d𝑥𝑥
� �𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 � d𝑡𝑡. (∗)
2 d𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡
The ends of a thin straight rod 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 lie on a closed convex curve 𝒞𝒞. The point 𝑃𝑃 on the rod is a
fixed distance 𝑎𝑎 from 𝐴𝐴 and a fixed distance 𝑏𝑏 from 𝐵𝐵. The angle between 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and the positive
𝑥𝑥 direction is 𝑡𝑡. As 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 move anticlockwise round 𝒞𝒞, the angle 𝑡𝑡 increases from 0 to 2π and
𝑃𝑃 traces a closed convex curve 𝒟𝒟 inside 𝒞𝒞, with the origin 𝑂𝑂 lying inside 𝒟𝒟, as shown in the
diagram.

2011
[Link]

Let (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) be the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃. Write down the coordinates of 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦
and 𝑡𝑡.
The areas swept out by 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂, 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 are denoted by [𝐴𝐴], [𝐵𝐵] and [𝑃𝑃], respectively. Show,
using (∗), that
[𝐴𝐴] = [𝑃𝑃] + π𝑎𝑎 2 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
where

1 2π d𝑦𝑦 d𝑥𝑥
𝑓𝑓 = � ��𝑥𝑥 + � cos 𝑡𝑡 + �𝑦𝑦 − � sin 𝑡𝑡� d𝑡𝑡.
2 0 d𝑡𝑡 d𝑡𝑡

Obtain a corresponding expression for [𝐵𝐵] involving 𝑏𝑏. Hence show that the area between the
curves 𝒞𝒞 and 𝒟𝒟 is π𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2011

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2011Q6]
The definite integrals 𝑇𝑇, 𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝑋𝑋 are defined by
1
ln 3
2 artanh 𝑡𝑡 𝑢𝑢
𝑇𝑇 = � d𝑡𝑡, 𝑈𝑈 = � d𝑢𝑢,
1 𝑡𝑡 ln 2 2 sinh 𝑢𝑢
3
1 1
ln 3
ln 𝑣𝑣
2 2
𝑉𝑉 = − � d𝑣𝑣, 𝑋𝑋 = � ln(coth 𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥.
1 1 − 𝑣𝑣 2 1
ln 2
3 2

Show, without evaluating any of them, that 𝑇𝑇, 𝑈𝑈, 𝑉𝑉 and 𝑋𝑋 are all equal.

[STEP 3, 2011Q7]
Let
𝑛𝑛
𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 = �√𝑎𝑎 + 1 + √𝑎𝑎� ,

where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer and 𝑎𝑎 is any given positive integer.

(i) In the case when 𝑛𝑛 is even, show by induction that 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 can be written in the form

𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 + 𝐵𝐵𝑛𝑛 �𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎 + 1),

where 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 and 𝐵𝐵𝑛𝑛 are integers (depending on 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑛𝑛) and 𝐴𝐴2𝑛𝑛 = 𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎 + 1)𝐵𝐵𝑛𝑛2 + 1.

(ii) In the case when 𝑛𝑛 is odd, show by considering �√𝑎𝑎 + 1 + √𝑎𝑎�𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚 where 𝑚𝑚 is even, or
otherwise, that 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 can be written in the form 2011
[Link]

𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 √𝑎𝑎 + 1 + 𝐷𝐷𝑛𝑛 √𝑎𝑎, 5

where 𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛 and 𝐷𝐷𝑛𝑛 are integers (depending on 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑛𝑛) and (𝑎𝑎 + 1)𝐶𝐶𝑛𝑛2 = 𝑎𝑎𝐷𝐷𝑛𝑛2 + 1.
(iii) Deduce that, for each 𝑛𝑛, 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 can be written as the sum of the square roots of two consecutive
integers.

[STEP 3, 2011Q8]
The complex numbers 𝑧𝑧 and 𝑤𝑤 are related by
1 + 𝐢𝐢𝑧𝑧
𝑤𝑤 = .
𝐢𝐢 + 𝑧𝑧
Let 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑥𝑥 + 𝐢𝐢𝑦𝑦 and 𝑤𝑤 = 𝑢𝑢 + 𝐢𝐢𝑣𝑣, where 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦, 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 are real. Express 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 in terms of 𝑥𝑥 and
𝑦𝑦.
𝜃𝜃
(i) By setting 𝑥𝑥 = tan � �, or otherwise, show that if the locus of 𝑧𝑧 is the real axis 𝑦𝑦 = 0, −∞ <
2
𝑥𝑥 < ∞, then the locus of 𝑤𝑤 is the circle 𝑢𝑢2 + 𝑣𝑣 2 = 1 with one point omitted.
(ii) Find the locus of 𝑤𝑤 when the locus of 𝑧𝑧 is the line segment 𝑦𝑦 = 0, −1 < 𝑥𝑥 < 1.
(iii) Find the locus of 𝑤𝑤 when the locus of 𝑧𝑧 is the line segment 𝑥𝑥 = 0, −1 < 𝑦𝑦 < 1.
(iv) Find the locus of 𝑤𝑤 when the locus of 𝑧𝑧 is the line 𝑦𝑦 = 1, −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2011 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2011Q9]
Particles 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 have masses 3𝑚𝑚 and 4𝑚𝑚, respectively. They lie on the outer curved surface
of a smooth circular cylinder of radius 𝑎𝑎 which is fixed with its axis horizontal. They are
1
connected by a light inextensible string of length π𝑎𝑎, which passes over the surface of the
2
cylinder. The particles and the string all lie in a vertical plane perpendicular to the axis of the
cylinder, and the axis intersects this plane at 𝑂𝑂. Initially, the particles are in equilibrium.
Equilibrium is slightly disturbed and 𝑄𝑄 begins to move downwards. Show that while the two
particles are still in contact with the cylinder the angle 𝜃𝜃 between 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the vertical satisfies
7𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 + 8𝑔𝑔 cos 𝜃𝜃 + 6𝑔𝑔 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 10𝑔𝑔.
(i) Given that 𝑄𝑄 loses contact with the cylinder first, show that it does so when 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛽𝛽, where
𝛽𝛽 satisfies
15 cos 𝛽𝛽 + 6 sin 𝛽𝛽 = 10.
(ii) Show also that while 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are still in contact with the cylinder the tension in the string
12
is 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(sin 𝜃𝜃 + cos 𝜃𝜃).
7

[STEP 3, 2011Q10]
Particles 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄, each of mass 𝑚𝑚, lie initially at rest a distance 𝑎𝑎 apart on a smooth horizontal
2011
plane. They are connected by a light elastic string of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of [Link]
1
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝜔𝜔2 , where 𝜔𝜔 is a constant. 6
2

Then 𝑃𝑃 receives an impulse which gives it a velocity 𝑢𝑢 directly away from 𝑄𝑄. Show that when
1 π𝑢𝑢
the string next returns to length 𝑎𝑎, the particles have travelled a distance , and find the
2 𝜔𝜔
speed of each particle.
Find also the total time between the impulse and the subsequent collision of the particles.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2011

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2011Q11]
A thin uniform circular disc of radius 𝑎𝑎 and mass 𝑚𝑚 is held in equilibrium in a horizontal plane
a distance 𝑏𝑏 below a horizontal ceiling, where 𝑏𝑏 > 2𝑎𝑎 . It is held in this way by 𝑛𝑛 light
inextensible vertical strings, each of length 𝑏𝑏; one end of each string is attached to the edge of
the disc and the other end is attached to a point on the ceiling. The strings are equally spaced
around the edge of the disc. One of the strings is attached to the point 𝑃𝑃 on the disc which has
coordinates (𝑎𝑎, 0, −𝑏𝑏) with respect to cartesian axes with origin on the ceiling directly above
the centre of the disc.
The disc is then rotated through an angle 𝜃𝜃 (where 𝜃𝜃 < π) about its vertical axis of symmetry
and held at rest by a couple acting in the plane of the disc. Show that the string attached to 𝑃𝑃
now makes an angle 𝜙𝜙 with the vertical, where
1
𝑏𝑏 sin 𝜙𝜙 = 2𝑎𝑎 sin 𝜃𝜃.
2
Show further that the magnitude of the couple is
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎2 sin 𝜃𝜃
.
�𝑏𝑏 2 1
− 4𝑎𝑎2 sin2 𝜃𝜃
2
The disc is now released from rest. Show that its angular speed, 𝜔𝜔, when the strings are vertical
is given by

𝑎𝑎2 𝜔𝜔2 1
= 𝑏𝑏 − �𝑏𝑏 2 − 4𝑎𝑎2 sin2 𝜃𝜃. 2011
4𝑔𝑔 2
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2011 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2011Q12]
The random variable 𝑁𝑁 takes positive integer values and has pgf (probability generating
function) 𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡). The random variables 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 , where 𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, …, are independently and identically
distributed, each with pgf 𝐻𝐻(𝑡𝑡) . The random variables 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 are also independent of 𝑁𝑁 . The
random variable 𝑌𝑌 is defined by
𝑁𝑁

𝑌𝑌 = � 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 .
𝑖𝑖=1

Given that the pgf of 𝑌𝑌 is 𝐺𝐺�𝐻𝐻(𝑡𝑡)�, show that

2
E(𝑌𝑌) = E(𝑁𝑁)E(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ) and Var(𝑌𝑌) = Var(𝑁𝑁)�E(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 )� + E(𝑁𝑁)Var(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ).
A fair coin is tossed until a head occurs. The total number of tosses is 𝑁𝑁. The coin is then tossed
a further 𝑁𝑁 times and the total number of heads in these 𝑁𝑁 tosses is 𝑌𝑌. Find in this particular
case the pgf of 𝑌𝑌, E(𝑌𝑌), Var(𝑌𝑌) and P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑟𝑟).

[STEP 3, 2011Q13]
In this question, the notation ⌊𝑥𝑥⌋ denotes the greatest integer less than or equal to 𝑥𝑥, so for
example ⌊π⌋ = 3 and ⌊3⌋ = 3.
(i) A bag contains 𝑛𝑛 balls, of which 𝑏𝑏 are black. A sample of 𝑘𝑘 balls is drawn, one after another,
2011
at random with replacement. The random variable 𝑋𝑋 denotes the number of black balls in
[Link]

the sample. By considering 8

P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑟𝑟 + 1)
,
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑟𝑟)
show that, in the case that it is unique, the most probable number of black balls in the
sample is
(𝑘𝑘 + 1)𝑏𝑏
� �.
𝑛𝑛
Under what circumstances is the answer not unique?
(ii) A bag contains 𝑛𝑛 balls, of which 𝑏𝑏 are black. A sample of 𝑘𝑘 balls (where 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 𝑏𝑏) is drawn,
one after another, at random without replacement. Find, in the case that it is unique, the
most probable number of black balls in the sample.
Under what circumstances is the answer not unique?

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2011

STEP 3 2012
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2012
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2012 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2012Q1]
d𝑦𝑦 2
Given that 𝑧𝑧 = 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 � � , show that
d𝑥𝑥

d𝑧𝑧 𝑛𝑛−1
d𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦 2 d2 𝑦𝑦
= 𝑦𝑦 �𝑛𝑛 � � + 2𝑦𝑦 2 �.
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
(i) Use the above result to show that the solution to the equation

d𝑦𝑦 2 d2 𝑦𝑦
� � + 2𝑦𝑦 2 = �𝑦𝑦 (𝑦𝑦 > 0)
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
2
d𝑦𝑦 3 3
that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 1 and = 0 when 𝑥𝑥 = 0 is 𝑦𝑦 = � 𝑥𝑥 2 + 1� .
d𝑥𝑥 8

(ii) Find the solution to the equation

d𝑦𝑦 2 d2 𝑦𝑦
� � − 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 0
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
d𝑦𝑦
that satisfies 𝑦𝑦 = 1 and = 0 when 𝑥𝑥 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥

[STEP 3, 2012Q2]
In this question, |𝑥𝑥| < 1 and you may ignore issues of convergence. 2012
[Link]
(i) Simplify
2
(1 − 𝑥𝑥)(1 + 𝑥𝑥)(1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )(1 4) 2𝑛𝑛
+ 𝑥𝑥 ⋯ �1 + 𝑥𝑥 �,
where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer, and deduce that
𝑛𝑛+1
1 𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 2
= (1 + 𝑥𝑥)(1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 )(1 + 𝑥𝑥 4 ) ⋯ �1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 � + .
1 − 𝑥𝑥 1 − 𝑥𝑥
Deduce further that
∞
𝑟𝑟
ln(1 − 𝑥𝑥) = − � ln�1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 �,
𝑟𝑟=0

and hence that

1 1 2𝑥𝑥 4𝑥𝑥 3
= + + + ⋯.
1 − 𝑥𝑥 1 + 𝑥𝑥 1 + 𝑥𝑥 2 1 + 𝑥𝑥 4
(ii) Show that
1 + 2𝑥𝑥 1 − 2𝑥𝑥 2𝑥𝑥 − 4𝑥𝑥 3 4𝑥𝑥 3 − 8𝑥𝑥 7
= + + + ⋯.
1 + 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 2 1 − 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 2 1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥 4 1 − 𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑥𝑥 8

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2012

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2012Q3]
It is given that the two curves
𝑦𝑦 = 4 − 𝑥𝑥 2 and 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑘𝑘 − 𝑦𝑦 2 ,
where 𝑚𝑚 > 0, touch exactly once.
(i) In each of the following four cases, sketch the two curves on a single diagram, noting the
coordinates of any intersections with the axes:
(a) 𝑘𝑘 < 0.
𝑘𝑘
(b) 0 < 𝑘𝑘 < 16, < 2.
𝑚𝑚
𝑘𝑘
(c) 𝑘𝑘 > 16, 𝑚𝑚 > 2.
𝑘𝑘
(d) 𝑘𝑘 > 16, 𝑚𝑚 < 2.

(ii) Now set 𝑚𝑚 = 12.

Show that the 𝑥𝑥-coordinate of any point at which the two curves meet satisfies
𝑥𝑥 4 − 8𝑥𝑥 2 + 12𝑥𝑥 + 16 − 𝑘𝑘 = 0.
Let 𝑎𝑎 be the value of 𝑥𝑥 at the point where the curves touch. Show that 𝑎𝑎 satisfies
𝑎𝑎3 − 4𝑎𝑎 + 3 = 0
and hence find the three possible values of 𝑎𝑎.
2012
Derive also the equation [Link]

2
𝑘𝑘 = −4𝑎𝑎 + 9𝑎𝑎 + 16. 3

Which of the four sketches in part (i) arise?

[STEP 3, 2012Q4]
(i) Show that
∞
𝑛𝑛 + 1
� = 2e − 1
𝑛𝑛!
𝑛𝑛=1

and
∞
(𝑛𝑛 + 1)2
� = 5e − 1.
𝑛𝑛!
𝑛𝑛=1
(2𝑛𝑛−1)3
Sum the series ∑∞
𝑛𝑛=1 𝑛𝑛!
.

�𝑛𝑛2 +1�2−𝑛𝑛
(ii) Sum the series ∑∞
𝑛𝑛=0 (𝑛𝑛+1)(𝑛𝑛+2), giving your answer in terms of natural logarithms.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2012 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2012Q5]
(i) The point with coordinates (𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏), where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are rational numbers, is called:
an integer rational point if both 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are integers,
a non-integer rational point if neither 𝑎𝑎 nor 𝑏𝑏 is an integer.
(a) Write down an integer rational point and a non-integer rational point on the circle
𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 1.
(b) Write down an integer rational point on the circle 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 2. Simplify
2 2
�cos 𝜃𝜃 + √𝑚𝑚 sin 𝜃𝜃� + �sin 𝜃𝜃 − √𝑚𝑚 cos 𝜃𝜃�

and hence obtain a non-integer rational point on the circle 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 2.

(ii) The point with coordinates �𝑝𝑝 + √2𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 + √2𝑠𝑠�, where 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 are rational numbers,
is called:
an integer 2-rational point if all of 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 are integers,
a non-integer 2-rational point if none of 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 is an integer.
(a) Write down an integer 2-rational point, and obtain a non-integer 2-rational point, on
the circle 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 3.
(b) Obtain a non-integer 2-rational point on the circle 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 11.
(c) Obtain a non-integer 2-rational point on the hyperbola 𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 = 7.
2012
[Link]

4
[STEP 3, 2012Q6]
Let 𝑥𝑥 + 𝐢𝐢𝑦𝑦 be a root of the quadratic equation 𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 1 = 0, where 𝑝𝑝 is a real number. Show
that 𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 + 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 1 = 0 and (2𝑥𝑥 + 𝑝𝑝)𝑦𝑦 = 0. Show further that
(𝑥𝑥 2 + 1)
either 𝑝𝑝 = −2𝑥𝑥 or 𝑝𝑝 = − with 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 0.
𝑥𝑥
Hence show that the set of points in the Argand diagram that can (as 𝑝𝑝 varies) represent roots
of the quadratic equation consists of the real axis with one point missing and a circle. This set
of points is called the root locus of the quadratic equation.
Obtain and sketch in the Argand diagram the root locus of the equation
𝑝𝑝𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑧𝑧 + 1 = 0
and the root locus of the equation
𝑝𝑝𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑝𝑝2 𝑧𝑧 + 2 = 0.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2012

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2012Q7]
A pain-killing drug is injected into the bloodstream. It then diffuses into the brain, where it is
absorbed. The quantities at time 𝑡𝑡 of the drug in the blood and the brain respectively are 𝑦𝑦(𝑡𝑡)
and 𝑧𝑧(𝑡𝑡). These satisfy
𝑦𝑦̇ = −2(𝑦𝑦 − 𝑧𝑧), 𝑧𝑧̇ = −𝑦𝑦̇ − 3𝑧𝑧,
where the dot denotes differentiation with respect to 𝑡𝑡.
Obtain a second order differential equation for 𝑦𝑦 and hence derive the solution
1
𝑦𝑦 = 𝐴𝐴e−𝑡𝑡 + 𝐵𝐵e−6𝑡𝑡 , 𝑧𝑧 = 𝐴𝐴e−𝑡𝑡 − 2𝐵𝐵e−6𝑡𝑡 ,
2
where 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are arbitrary constants.
(i) Obtain the solution that satisfies 𝑧𝑧(0) = 0 and 𝑦𝑦(0) = 5. The quantity of the drug in the
brain for this solution is denoted by 𝑧𝑧1 (𝑡𝑡).
(ii) Obtain the solution that satisfies 𝑧𝑧(0) = 𝑧𝑧(1) = 𝑐𝑐 , where 𝑐𝑐 is a given constant. The
quantity of the drug in the brain for this solution is denoted by 𝑧𝑧2 (𝑡𝑡).
(iii) Show that for 0 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 1,
0

𝑧𝑧2 (𝑡𝑡) = � 𝑧𝑧1 (𝑡𝑡 − 𝑛𝑛),

𝑛𝑛=−∞

provided 𝑐𝑐 takes a particular value that you should find.

2012
[Link]

5
[STEP 3, 2012Q8]
The sequence 𝐹𝐹0 , 𝐹𝐹1 , 𝐹𝐹2 , … is defined by 𝐹𝐹0 = 0, 𝐹𝐹1 = 1 and, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0,
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛+2 = 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛+1 + 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 .
(i) Show that 𝐹𝐹0 𝐹𝐹3 − 𝐹𝐹1 𝐹𝐹2 = 𝐹𝐹2 𝐹𝐹5 − 𝐹𝐹3 𝐹𝐹4 .
(ii) Find the values of 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛+3 − 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛+1 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛+2 in the two cases that arise.
(iii) Prove that, for 𝑟𝑟 = 1, 2, 3, …,
1 1 1
arctan � � = arctan � � + arctan � �
𝐹𝐹2𝑟𝑟 𝐹𝐹2𝑟𝑟+1 𝐹𝐹2𝑟𝑟+2
and hence evaluate the following sum (which you may assume converges):
∞
1
� arctan � �.
𝐹𝐹2𝑟𝑟+1
𝑟𝑟=1

STEP 3 Past Paper 2012 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2012Q9]
A pulley consists of a disc of radius 𝑟𝑟 with centre 𝑂𝑂 and a light thin axle through 𝑂𝑂
perpendicular to the plane of the disc. The disc is non-uniform, its mass is 𝑀𝑀 and its centre of
mass is at 𝑂𝑂. The axle is fixed and horizontal.
Two particles, of masses 𝑚𝑚1 and 𝑚𝑚2 where 𝑚𝑚1 > 𝑚𝑚2 , are connected by a light inextensible
string which passes over the pulley. The contact between the string and the pulley is rough
enough to prevent the string sliding. The pulley turns and the vertical force on the axle is found,
by measurement, to be 𝑃𝑃 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀.
(i) The moment of inertia of the pulley about its axle is calculated assuming that the pulley
rotates without friction about its axle. Show that the calculated value is
�(𝑚𝑚1 + 𝑚𝑚2 )𝑃𝑃 − 4𝑚𝑚1 𝑚𝑚2 𝑔𝑔�𝑟𝑟 2
. (∗)
(𝑚𝑚1 + 𝑚𝑚2 )𝑔𝑔 − 𝑃𝑃
(ii) Instead, the moment of inertia of the pulley about its axle is calculated assuming that a
couple of magnitude 𝐶𝐶 due to friction acts on the axle of the pulley. Determine whether
this calculated value is greater or smaller than (∗).
Show that 𝐶𝐶 < (𝑚𝑚1 − 𝑚𝑚2 )𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟.

[STEP 3, 2012Q10]
2012
A small ring of mass 𝑚𝑚 is free to slide without friction on a hoop of radius 𝑎𝑎. The hoop is fixed
[Link]

6
in a vertical plane. The ring is connected by a light elastic string of natural length 𝑎𝑎 to the
highest point of the hoop. The ring is initially at rest at the lowest point of the hoop and is then
slightly displaced. In the subsequent motion the angle of the string to the downward vertical is
𝜙𝜙. Given that the ring first comes to rest just as the string becomes slack, find an expression for
the modulus of elasticity of the string in terms of 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑔𝑔.
Show that, throughout the motion, the magnitude 𝑅𝑅 of the reaction between the ring and the
hoop is given by
𝑅𝑅 = (12 cos 2 𝜙𝜙 − 15 cos 𝜙𝜙 + 5)𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
and that 𝑅𝑅 is non-zero throughout the motion.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2012

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2012Q11]
One end of a thin heavy uniform inextensible perfectly flexible rope of length 2𝐿𝐿 and mass 2𝑀𝑀
is attached to a fixed point 𝑃𝑃. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to the other end. Initially, the
particle is held at 𝑃𝑃 and the rope hangs vertically in a loop below 𝑃𝑃 . The particle is then
released so that it and a section of the rope (of decreasing length) fall vertically as shown in
the diagram.

2012
You may assume that each point on the moving section of the rope falls at the same [Link]
as
the particle. Given that energy is conserved, show that, when the particle has fallen a distance
7
𝑥𝑥 (where 𝑥𝑥 < 2𝐿𝐿), its speed 𝑣𝑣 is given by
1
2𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 �𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 4 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀�
2
𝑣𝑣 = .
1
𝑚𝑚𝐿𝐿 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 2 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀

Hence show that the acceleration of the particle is

1
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 �𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 4 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀�
𝑔𝑔 + 2 .
1
2 �𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 2 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀�

Deduce that the acceleration of the particle after it is released is greater than 𝑔𝑔.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2012 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2012Q12]
(i) A point 𝑃𝑃 lies in an equilateral triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 of height 1. The perpendicular distances from
𝑃𝑃 to the sides 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 are 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑥𝑥2 and 𝑥𝑥3 , respectively. By considering the areas of
triangles with one vertex at 𝑃𝑃, show that 𝑥𝑥1 + 𝑥𝑥2 + 𝑥𝑥3 = 1.
Suppose now that 𝑃𝑃 is placed at random in the equilateral triangle (so that the probability
of it lying in any given region of the triangle is proportional to the area of that region). The
perpendicular distances from 𝑃𝑃 to the sides 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 are random variables 𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2
and 𝑋𝑋3 , respectively. In the case 𝑋𝑋1 = min(𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2 , 𝑋𝑋3 ), give a sketch showing the region of
the triangle in which 𝑃𝑃 lies.
Let 𝑋𝑋 = min(𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2 , 𝑋𝑋3 ). Show that the probability density function for 𝑋𝑋 is given by
1
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = �6(1 − 3𝑥𝑥) 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 3 ,
0 otherwise.
Find the expected value of 𝑋𝑋.
(ii) A point is chosen at random in a regular tetrahedron of height 1. Find the expected value
of the distance from the point to the closest face.
1
[The volume of a tetrahedron is × area of base × height and its centroid is a distance
3
1
× height from the base.]
4
2012
[Link]

8
[STEP 3, 2012Q13]
(i) The random variable 𝑍𝑍 has a Normal distribution with mean 0 and variance 1. Show that
the expectation of 𝑍𝑍 given that 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑍𝑍 < 𝑏𝑏 is
1 1
exp �− 2 𝑎𝑎2 � − exp �− 2 𝑏𝑏 2 �
,
√2π�Φ(𝑏𝑏) − Φ(𝑎𝑎)�
where Φ denotes the cumulative distribution function for 𝑍𝑍.
(ii) The random variable 𝑋𝑋 has a Normal distribution with mean 𝜇𝜇 and variance 𝜎𝜎 2 . Show that
𝜇𝜇
E(𝑋𝑋|𝑋𝑋 > 0) = 𝜇𝜇 + 𝜎𝜎E �𝑍𝑍�𝑍𝑍 > − 𝜎𝜎�.

Hence, or otherwise, show that the expectation, 𝑚𝑚, of |𝑋𝑋| is given by

1 2
𝜇𝜇 2 𝜇𝜇
𝑚𝑚 = 𝜇𝜇 �1 − 2Φ �− �� + 𝜎𝜎� exp �− 2 2 �.
𝜎𝜎 π 𝜎𝜎

Obtain an expression for the variance of |𝑋𝑋| in terms of 𝜇𝜇, 𝜎𝜎 and 𝑚𝑚.

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2012

STEP 3 2013
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2013
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2013 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2013Q1]
1 d𝑡𝑡 1 2𝑡𝑡
Given that 𝑡𝑡 = tan 𝑥𝑥, show that = (1 + 𝑡𝑡 2 ) and sin 𝑥𝑥 = .
2 d𝑥𝑥 2 1+𝑡𝑡 2

Hence show that

1
π
2 1 2 √1 − 𝑎𝑎
� d𝑥𝑥 = arctan (0 < 𝑎𝑎 < 1).
0 1 + 𝑎𝑎 sin 𝑥𝑥 √1 − 𝑎𝑎2 √1 + 𝑎𝑎
Let
1
π
2 sin𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � d𝑥𝑥 (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0).
0 2 + sin 𝑥𝑥
By considering 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 + 2𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 , or otherwise, evaluate 𝐼𝐼3 .

[STEP 3, 2013Q2]
In this question, you may ignore questions of convergence.
arcsin 𝑥𝑥
Let 𝑦𝑦 = . Show that
√1−𝑥𝑥 2

d𝑦𝑦
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 2 ) − 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 − 1 = 0
d𝑥𝑥
2013
and prove that, for any positive integer 𝑛𝑛, [Link]

𝑛𝑛+2 𝑛𝑛+1 𝑛𝑛 2
2)
d 𝑦𝑦 d 𝑦𝑦 d 𝑦𝑦
(1 − 𝑥𝑥 − (2𝑛𝑛 + 3)𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛+1 − (𝑛𝑛 + 1)2 𝑛𝑛 = 0.
d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛+2 d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
arcsin 𝑥𝑥
Hence obtain the Maclaurin series for , giving the general term for odd and for even
√1−𝑥𝑥 2
powers of 𝑥𝑥.
Evaluate the infinite sum
1 2 2 2 2 × 32 22 × 32 × ⋯ × 𝑛𝑛2
1+ + + + ⋯+ + ⋯.
3! 5! 7! (2𝑛𝑛 + 1)!

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2013

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2013Q3]
The four vertices 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4) of a regular tetrahedron lie on the surface of a sphere with
centre at 𝑂𝑂 and of radius 1. The position vector of 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 with respect to 𝑂𝑂 is 𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4). Use
1
the fact that 𝐩𝐩1 + 𝐩𝐩2 + 𝐩𝐩3 + 𝐩𝐩4 = 𝟎𝟎 to show that 𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 . 𝐩𝐩𝑗𝑗 = − for 𝑖𝑖 ≠ 𝑗𝑗.
3

Let 𝑋𝑋 be any point on the surface of the sphere, and let 𝑋𝑋𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 denote the length of the line joining
𝑋𝑋 and 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4).
(i) By writing (𝑋𝑋𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 )2 as (𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 − 𝐱𝐱). (𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 − 𝐱𝐱), where 𝐱𝐱 is the position vector of 𝑋𝑋 with respect to
𝑂𝑂, show that
4

�(𝑋𝑋𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 )2 = 8.
𝑖𝑖=1

(ii) Given that 𝑃𝑃1 has coordinates (0, 0, 1) and that the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃2 are of the form
2√2 1
(𝑎𝑎, 0, 𝑏𝑏), where 𝑎𝑎 > 0, show that 𝑎𝑎 = and 𝑏𝑏 = − , and find the coordinates of 𝑃𝑃3 and
3 3
𝑃𝑃4 .
(iii) Show that
4 4

�(𝑋𝑋𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 )4 = 4 �(1 − 𝐱𝐱. 𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 )2 .

𝑖𝑖=1 𝑖𝑖=1

By letting the coordinates of 𝑋𝑋 be (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦, 𝑧𝑧), show further that ∑4𝑖𝑖=1(𝑋𝑋𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 )4 is independent of
the position of 𝑋𝑋.
2013
[Link]

3
[STEP 3, 2013Q4]
Show that �𝑧𝑧 − e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 ��𝑧𝑧 − e−𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 � = 𝑧𝑧 2 − 2𝑧𝑧 cos 𝜃𝜃 + 1.

Write down the (2𝑛𝑛)th roots of −1 in the form e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 , where −π < 𝜃𝜃 ≤ π, and deduce that
𝑛𝑛
2𝑛𝑛
(2𝑘𝑘 − 1)π
𝑧𝑧 + 1 = � �𝑧𝑧 2 − 2𝑧𝑧 cos � � + 1�.
2𝑛𝑛
𝑘𝑘=1

Here, 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer, and the Π notation denotes the product.

(i) By substituting 𝑧𝑧 = 𝐢𝐢 show that, when 𝑛𝑛 is even,
π 3π 5π (2𝑛𝑛 − 1)π 1
cos � � cos � � cos � � ⋯ cos � � = (−1)2𝑛𝑛 21−𝑛𝑛 .
2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛
(ii) Show that, when 𝑛𝑛 is odd,
π 3π 5π (𝑛𝑛 − 2)π
cos2 � � cos2 � � cos2 � � ⋯ cos 2 � � = 𝑛𝑛21−𝑛𝑛 .
2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛

You may use without proof the fact that 1 + 𝑧𝑧 2𝑛𝑛 = (1 + 𝑧𝑧 2 )(1 − 𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑧𝑧 4 − ⋯ + 𝑧𝑧 2𝑛𝑛−2 )
when 𝑛𝑛 is odd.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2013 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2013Q5]
In this question, you may assume that, if 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are positive integers such that 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are
coprime and 𝑎𝑎 divides 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏, then 𝑎𝑎 divides 𝑐𝑐. (Two positive integers are said to be coprime if
their highest common factor is 1.)
(i) Suppose that there are positive integers 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞, 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑁𝑁 such that 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are coprime and
𝑞𝑞 𝑛𝑛 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 . Show that 𝑁𝑁 = 𝑘𝑘𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 for some positive integer 𝑘𝑘 and deduce the value of 𝑞𝑞.
𝑛𝑛
Hence prove that, for any positive integers 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑁𝑁, √𝑁𝑁 is either a positive integer or
irrational.
(ii) Suppose that there are positive integers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑 such that 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are coprime and 𝑐𝑐
and 𝑑𝑑 are coprime, and 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑑𝑑𝑏𝑏 = 𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏 . Prove that 𝑑𝑑𝑏𝑏 = 𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎 and deduce that, if 𝑝𝑝 is a prime
factor of 𝑑𝑑, then 𝑝𝑝 is also a prime factor of 𝑏𝑏.
If 𝑝𝑝𝑚𝑚 and 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 are the highest powers of the prime number 𝑝𝑝 that divide 𝑑𝑑 and 𝑏𝑏 ,
respectively, express 𝑏𝑏 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑛𝑛 and hence show that 𝑝𝑝𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑛𝑛. Deduce the
value of 𝑏𝑏. (You may assume that if 𝑥𝑥 > 0 and 𝑦𝑦 ≥ 2 then 𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 > 𝑥𝑥.)
Hence prove that, if 𝑟𝑟 is a positive rational number such that 𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟 is rational, then 𝑟𝑟 is a
positive integer.

[STEP 3, 2013Q6]
Let 𝑧𝑧 and 𝑤𝑤 be complex numbers. Use a diagram to show that |𝑧𝑧 − 𝑤𝑤| ≤ |𝑧𝑧| + |𝑤𝑤|.
2013
For any complex numbers 𝑧𝑧 and 𝑤𝑤, 𝐸𝐸 is defined by [Link]

∗ ∗
𝐸𝐸 = 𝑧𝑧𝑤𝑤 + 𝑧𝑧 𝑤𝑤 + 2|𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧|. 4

(i) Show that |𝑧𝑧 − 𝑤𝑤|2 = (|𝑧𝑧| + |𝑤𝑤|)2 − 𝐸𝐸, and deduce that 𝐸𝐸 is real and non-negative.
(ii) Show that |1 − 𝑧𝑧𝑤𝑤 ∗ |2 = (1 + |𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧|)2 − 𝐸𝐸.
Hence show that, if both |𝑧𝑧| > 1 and |𝑤𝑤| > 1, then
|𝑧𝑧 − 𝑤𝑤| |𝑧𝑧| + |𝑤𝑤|
∗
≤ .
|1 − 𝑧𝑧𝑤𝑤 | 1 + |𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧|
Does this inequality also hold if both |𝑧𝑧| < 1 and |𝑤𝑤| < 1?

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2013

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2013Q7]
d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦
(i) Let 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥) be a solution of the differential equation d𝑥𝑥2 + 𝑦𝑦 3 = 0 with 𝑦𝑦 = 1 and d𝑥𝑥 = 0 at
𝑥𝑥 = 0, and let

d𝑦𝑦 2 1 4
𝐸𝐸(𝑥𝑥) = � � + 𝑦𝑦 .
d𝑥𝑥 2
Show by differentiation that 𝐸𝐸 is constant and deduce that |𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥)| ≤ 1 for all 𝑥𝑥.
d2 𝑣𝑣 d𝑣𝑣
(ii) Let 𝑣𝑣(𝑥𝑥) be a solution of the differential equation + 𝑥𝑥 + sinh 𝑣𝑣 = 0 with 𝑣𝑣 = ln 3
d𝑥𝑥 2 d𝑥𝑥
d𝑣𝑣
and d𝑥𝑥 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0, and let

d𝑣𝑣 2
𝐸𝐸(𝑥𝑥) = � � + 2 cosh 𝑣𝑣.
d𝑥𝑥
d𝐸𝐸 5
Show that ≤ 0 for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0 and deduce that cosh 𝑣𝑣(𝑥𝑥) ≤ for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0.
d𝑥𝑥 3

(iii) Let 𝑤𝑤(𝑥𝑥) be a solution of the differential equation

d2 𝑤𝑤 d𝑤𝑤
2
+ (5 cosh 𝑥𝑥 − 4 sinh 𝑥𝑥 − 3) + (𝑤𝑤 cosh 𝑤𝑤 + 2 sinh 𝑤𝑤) = 0
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
d𝑤𝑤 1 5
with = and 𝑤𝑤 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 0. Show that cosh 𝑤𝑤(𝑥𝑥) ≤ for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0.
d𝑥𝑥 √2 4

2013
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2013 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2013Q8]
𝑟𝑟π
2𝐢𝐢�𝛼𝛼+ �
Evaluate ∑𝑛𝑛−1
𝑟𝑟=0 e
𝑛𝑛 where 𝛼𝛼 is a fixed angle and 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.
The fixed point 𝑂𝑂 is a distance 𝑑𝑑 from a fixed line 𝐷𝐷. For any point 𝑃𝑃, let 𝑠𝑠 be the distance from
𝑃𝑃 to 𝐷𝐷 and let 𝑟𝑟 be the distance from 𝑃𝑃 to 𝑂𝑂. Write down an expression for 𝑠𝑠 in terms of 𝑑𝑑, 𝑟𝑟
and the angle 𝜃𝜃, where 𝜃𝜃 is as shown in the diagram below.

The curve 𝐸𝐸 shown in the diagram is such that, for any point 𝑃𝑃 on 𝐸𝐸, the relation 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 holds,
where 𝑘𝑘 is a fixed number with 0 < 𝑘𝑘 < 1.

Each of the 𝑛𝑛 lines 𝐿𝐿1 , … , 𝐿𝐿𝑛𝑛 passes through 𝑂𝑂 and the angle between adjacent lines is 𝑛𝑛. 2013
π
The
[Link]

line 𝐿𝐿𝑗𝑗 (𝑗𝑗 = 1, … , 𝑛𝑛) intersects 𝐸𝐸 in two points forming a chord of length 𝑙𝑙𝑗𝑗 . Show that, for 𝑛𝑛 6≥
2,
𝑛𝑛
1 (2 − 𝑘𝑘 2 )𝑛𝑛
� = .
𝑙𝑙𝑗𝑗 4𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑗𝑗=1

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2013

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2013Q9]
A sphere of radius 𝑅𝑅 and uniform density 𝜌𝜌𝑠𝑠 is floating in a large tank of liquid of uniform
density 𝜌𝜌. Given that the centre of the sphere is a distance 𝑥𝑥 above the level of the liquid, where
𝑥𝑥 < 𝑅𝑅, show that the volume of liquid displaced is
π
(2𝑅𝑅 3 − 3𝑅𝑅 2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 3 ).
3
The sphere is acted upon by two forces only: its weight and an upward force equal in magnitude
to the weight of the liquid it has displaced. Show that
4𝑅𝑅3 𝜌𝜌𝑠𝑠 (𝑔𝑔 + 𝑥𝑥̈ ) = (2𝑅𝑅 3 − 3𝑅𝑅 2 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 3 )𝜌𝜌𝜌𝜌.
1
Given that the sphere is in equilibrium when 𝑥𝑥 = 2 𝑅𝑅, find 𝜌𝜌𝑠𝑠 in terms of 𝜌𝜌. Find, in terms of 𝑅𝑅
and 𝑔𝑔, the period of small oscillations about this equilibrium position.

[STEP 3, 2013Q10]
A uniform rod 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 has mass 𝑀𝑀 and length 2𝑎𝑎. The point 𝑃𝑃 lies on the rod a distance 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥 from
𝐴𝐴. Show that the moment of inertia of the rod about an axis through 𝑃𝑃 and perpendicular to the
rod is
1
𝑀𝑀(𝑎𝑎2 + 3𝑥𝑥 2 ).
3 2013
The rod is free to rotate, in a horizontal plane, about a fixed vertical axis through 𝑃𝑃. [Link]
the
7
rod is at rest. The end 𝐵𝐵 is struck by a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 moving horizontally with speed 𝑢𝑢 in
a direction perpendicular to the rod. The coefficient of restitution between the rod and the
particle is 𝑒𝑒. Show that the angular velocity of the rod immediately after impact is
3𝑚𝑚𝑢𝑢(1 + 𝑒𝑒)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑥𝑥)
.
𝑀𝑀(𝑎𝑎2 + 3𝑥𝑥 2 ) + 3𝑚𝑚(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑥𝑥)2
In the case 𝑚𝑚 = 2𝑀𝑀, find the value of 𝑥𝑥 for which the angular velocity is greatest and show that
𝑢𝑢(1+𝑒𝑒)
this angular velocity is 𝑎𝑎
.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2013 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2013Q11]

An equilateral triangle, comprising three light rods each of length √3𝑎𝑎, has a particle of mass
𝑚𝑚 attached to each of its vertices. The triangle is suspended horizontally from a point vertically
above its centre by three identical springs, so that the springs and rods form a tetrahedron.
Each spring has natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, and is light. Show that when
the springs make an angle 𝜃𝜃 with the horizontal the tension in each spring is
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘(1 − cos 𝜃𝜃)
.
cos 𝜃𝜃
1
Given that the triangle is in equilibrium when 𝜃𝜃 = π, show that 𝑘𝑘 = 4√3 + 6.
6
1
The triangle is released from rest from the position at which 𝜃𝜃 = π. Show that when it passes
3
through the equilibrium position its speed 𝑉𝑉 satisfies
4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑉𝑉 2 = �6 + √3�.
3

2013
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2013

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2013Q12]
A list consists only of letters 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 arranged in a row. In the list, there are 𝑎𝑎 letter 𝐴𝐴s and 𝑏𝑏
letter 𝐵𝐵 s, where 𝑎𝑎 ≥ 2 and 𝑏𝑏 ≥ 2 , and 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 = 𝑛𝑛 . Each possible ordering of the letters is
equally probable. The random variable 𝑋𝑋1 is defined by
1 if the first letter in the row is 𝐴𝐴;
𝑋𝑋1 = �
0 otherwise.
The random variables 𝑋𝑋𝑘𝑘 (2 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 𝑛𝑛) are defined by
1 if the (𝑘𝑘 − 1)th letter is 𝐵𝐵 and the 𝑘𝑘th is A;
𝑋𝑋𝑘𝑘 = �
0 otherwise.
The random variable 𝑆𝑆 is defined by 𝑆𝑆 = ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 .
(i) Find expressions for E(𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 ), distinguishing between the cases 𝑖𝑖 = 1 and 𝑖𝑖 ≠ 1, and show
𝑎𝑎(𝑏𝑏+1)
that E(𝑆𝑆) = 𝑛𝑛
.

(ii) Show that:

𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎−1)𝑏𝑏
(a) for 𝑗𝑗 ≥ 3, E�𝑋𝑋1 𝑋𝑋𝑗𝑗 � = .
𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛−1)(𝑛𝑛−2)

𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎−1)𝑏𝑏(𝑏𝑏−1)
(b) ∑𝑛𝑛−2 𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=2 �∑𝑗𝑗=𝑖𝑖+2 E�𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖 𝑋𝑋𝑗𝑗 �� = .
2𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛−1)

𝑎𝑎(𝑎𝑎−1)𝑏𝑏(𝑏𝑏+1)
(c) Var(𝑆𝑆) = .
𝑛𝑛2 (𝑛𝑛−1)
2013
[Link]

9
[STEP 3, 2013Q13]
(i) The continuous random variable 𝑋𝑋 satisfies 0 ≤ 𝑋𝑋 ≤ 1 , and has probability density
function 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) and cumulative distribution function 𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥). The greatest value of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is 𝑀𝑀,
so that 0 ≤ 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) ≤ 𝑀𝑀.
(a) Show that 0 ≤ 𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥) ≤ 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1.
(b) For any function 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥), show that
1 1
2
� 2𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥)𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) d𝑥𝑥 = 𝑔𝑔(1) − � 𝑔𝑔′ (𝑥𝑥)�𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥)� d𝑥𝑥.
0 0

(ii) The continuous random variable 𝑌𝑌 satisfies 0 ≤ 𝑌𝑌 ≤ 1 , and has probability density
function 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘(𝑦𝑦)𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦), where 𝑓𝑓 and 𝐹𝐹 are as above.
(a) Determine the value of the constant 𝑘𝑘.
(b) Show that
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
1+ 𝜇𝜇𝑛𝑛+1 − ≤ E(𝑌𝑌 𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ 2𝑀𝑀𝜇𝜇𝑛𝑛+1 ,
𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑛𝑛 + 1
where 𝜇𝜇𝑛𝑛+1 = E(𝑋𝑋 𝑛𝑛+1 ) and 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0.
(c) Hence show that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 − 1
𝜇𝜇𝑛𝑛 ≥ − .
(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑀𝑀 𝑛𝑛 + 1

STEP 3 Past Paper 2013 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2013
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2013

STEP 3 2014
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2014
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2014 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2014Q1]
Let 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 be real numbers such that 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 and let
(1 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎)(1 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)(1 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐) = 1 + 𝑞𝑞𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟𝑥𝑥 3
for all real 𝑥𝑥. Show that 𝑞𝑞 = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 and 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎.
(i) Show that the coefficient of 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 in the series expansion (in ascending powers of 𝑥𝑥 ) of
ln(1 + 𝑞𝑞𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟𝑥𝑥 3 ) is (−1)𝑛𝑛+1 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 where
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 + 𝑏𝑏 𝑛𝑛 + 𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛
𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 = , (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1).
𝑛𝑛
(ii) Find, in terms of 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟 , the coefficients of 𝑥𝑥 2 , 𝑥𝑥 3 and 𝑥𝑥 5 in the series expansion (in
ascending powers of 𝑥𝑥) of ln(1 + 𝑞𝑞𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟𝑥𝑥 3 ) and hence show that 𝑆𝑆2 𝑆𝑆3 = 𝑆𝑆5 .
(iii) Show that 𝑆𝑆2 𝑆𝑆5 = 𝑆𝑆7 .
(iv) Give a proof of, or find a counterexample to, the claim that 𝑆𝑆2 𝑆𝑆7 = 𝑆𝑆9 .

[STEP 3, 2014Q2]
(i) Show, by means of the substitution 𝑢𝑢 = cosh 𝑥𝑥, that

sinh 𝑥𝑥 1 √2 cosh 𝑥𝑥 − 1
� d𝑥𝑥 = ln � � + 𝐶𝐶.
cosh 2𝑥𝑥 2√2 √2 cosh 𝑥𝑥 + 1 2014
[Link]

(ii) Use a similar substitution to find an expression for 2

cosh 𝑥𝑥
� d𝑥𝑥.
cosh 2𝑥𝑥
(iii) Using parts (i) and (ii) above, show that
1
1 π + 2 ln�√2 + 1�
� 4
d𝑢𝑢 = .
0 1 + 𝑢𝑢 4√2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2014

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2014Q3]
(i) The line 𝐿𝐿 has equation 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑐𝑐, where 𝑚𝑚 > 0 and 𝑐𝑐 > 0. Show that, in the case 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 >
𝑎𝑎 > 0, the shortest distance between 𝐿𝐿 and the parabola 𝑦𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 is
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝑎𝑎
.
𝑚𝑚√𝑚𝑚2 + 1
What is the shortest distance in the case that 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ≤ 𝑎𝑎?
(ii) Find the shortest distance between the point (𝑝𝑝, 0), where 𝑝𝑝 > 0, and the parabola 𝑦𝑦 2 =
𝑝𝑝
4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, where 𝑎𝑎 > 0, in the different cases that arise according to the value of . [You may
𝑎𝑎
wish to use the parametric coordinates (𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡 2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) of points on the parabola.]
Hence find the shortest distance between the circle (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑝𝑝)2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 𝑏𝑏 2 , where 𝑝𝑝 > 0 and
𝑏𝑏 > 0, and the parabola 𝑦𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, where 𝑎𝑎 > 0, in the different cases that arise according
to the values of 𝑝𝑝, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏.

[STEP 3, 2014Q4]
(i) Let
1 1
𝐼𝐼 = � ((𝑦𝑦 ′ )2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 ) d𝑥𝑥 and 𝐼𝐼1 = � (𝑦𝑦 ′ + 𝑦𝑦 tan 𝑥𝑥)2 d𝑥𝑥,
0 0

where 𝑦𝑦 is a given function of 𝑥𝑥 satisfying 𝑦𝑦 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 1. Show that 𝐼𝐼 − 𝐼𝐼1 = 0 and deduce

that 𝐼𝐼 ≥ 0. Show further that 𝐼𝐼 = 0 only if 𝑦𝑦 = 0 for all 𝑥𝑥 (0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1).
2014
[Link]
(ii) Let
3
1
𝐽𝐽 = � ((𝑦𝑦 ′ )2 − 𝑎𝑎2 𝑦𝑦 2 ) d𝑥𝑥,
0

where 𝑎𝑎 is a given positive constant and 𝑦𝑦 is a given function of 𝑥𝑥, not identically zero
satisfying 𝑦𝑦 = 0 at 𝑥𝑥 = 1. By considering an integral of the form
1
� (𝑦𝑦 ′ + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 tan 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)2 d𝑥𝑥,
0

where 𝑏𝑏 is suitably chosen, show that 𝐽𝐽 ≥ 0. You should state the range of values of 𝑎𝑎, in
the form 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑘𝑘, for which your proof is valid.
In the case 𝑎𝑎 = 𝑘𝑘, find a function 𝑦𝑦 (not everywhere zero) such that 𝐽𝐽 = 0.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2014 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2014Q5]
A quadrilateral drawn in the complex plane has vertices 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷, labelled anticlockwise.
These vertices are represented, respectively, by the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑐𝑐 and 𝑑𝑑. Show that
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is a parallelogram (defined as a quadrilateral in which opposite sides are parallel and
equal in length) if and only if 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑐𝑐 = 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑑𝑑. Show further that, in this case, 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is a square if
and only if 𝐢𝐢(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐) = 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑑𝑑.
Let 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 be a quadrilateral in the complex plane, with vertices labelled anticlockwise, the
internal angles of which are all less than 180° . Squares with centres 𝑋𝑋 , 𝑌𝑌 , 𝑍𝑍 and 𝑇𝑇 are
constructed externally to the quadrilateral on the sides 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄, 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆, respectively.
(i) If 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are represented by the complex numbers 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞, respectively, show that 𝑋𝑋 can
be represented by
1
�𝑝𝑝(1 + 𝐢𝐢) + 𝑞𝑞(1 − 𝐢𝐢)�.
2
(ii) Show that 𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋 is a square if and only if 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is a parallelogram.

[STEP 3, 2014Q6]
Starting from the result that
𝑥𝑥
ℎ(𝑡𝑡) > 0 for 0 < 𝑡𝑡 < 𝑥𝑥 ⟹ � ℎ(𝑡𝑡) d𝑡𝑡 > 0,
0

show that, if 𝑓𝑓 ′′ (𝑡𝑡) > 0 for 0 < 𝑡𝑡 < 𝑥𝑥0 and 𝑓𝑓(0) = 𝑓𝑓 ′ (0) = 0, then 𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) > 0 for 0 < 𝑡𝑡 < 𝑥𝑥0 . 2014
[Link]
1 4
(i) Show that, for 0 < 𝑥𝑥 < π,
2

cos 𝑥𝑥 cosh 𝑥𝑥 < 1.

1
(ii) Show that, for 0 < 𝑥𝑥 < π,
2

1 sin 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥
< < .
cosh 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 sinh 𝑥𝑥

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2014

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2014Q7]
The four distinct points 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4) are the vertices, labelled anticlockwise, of a cyclic
quadrilateral. The lines 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃3 and 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃4 intersect at 𝑄𝑄.
(i) By considering the triangles 𝑃𝑃1 𝑄𝑄𝑃𝑃4 and 𝑃𝑃2 𝑄𝑄𝑃𝑃3 show that (𝑃𝑃1 𝑄𝑄)(𝑄𝑄𝑃𝑃3 ) = (𝑃𝑃2 𝑄𝑄)(𝑄𝑄𝑃𝑃4 ).
(ii) Let 𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 be the position vector of the point 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4). Show that there exist numbers
𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 , not all zero, such that
4 4

� 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 = 0 and � 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 𝐩𝐩𝑖𝑖 = 𝟎𝟎. (∗)

𝑖𝑖=1 𝑖𝑖=1

(iii) Let 𝑎𝑎𝑖𝑖 (𝑖𝑖 = 1, 2, 3, 4) be any numbers, not all zero, that satisfy (∗). Show that 𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑎𝑎3 ≠ 0
and that the lines 𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃3 and 𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃4 intersect at the point with position vector
𝑎𝑎1 𝐩𝐩1 + 𝑎𝑎3 𝐩𝐩3
.
𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑎𝑎3
Deduce that 𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎3 (𝑃𝑃1 𝑃𝑃3 )2 = 𝑎𝑎2 𝑎𝑎4 (𝑃𝑃2 𝑃𝑃4 )2 .

[STEP 3, 2014Q8]
The numbers 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟) satisfy 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟) > 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟 + 1) for 𝑟𝑟 = 1, 2, … . Show that, for any non-negative
integer 𝑛𝑛,
𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛+1 −1

𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛 (𝑘𝑘 − 1)𝑓𝑓(𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛+1 ) ≤ � 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟) ≤ 𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛 (𝑘𝑘 − 1)𝑓𝑓(𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛 ) 2014

[Link]
𝑟𝑟=𝑘𝑘 𝑛𝑛
5
where 𝑘𝑘 is an integer greater than 1.
1
(i) By taking 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟) = 𝑟𝑟, show that

2𝑁𝑁+1 −1
𝑁𝑁 + 1 1
≤ � ≤ 𝑁𝑁 + 1.
2 𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟=1
1
Deduce that the sum ∑∞
𝑟𝑟=1 does not converge.
𝑟𝑟
1
(ii) By taking 𝑓𝑓(𝑟𝑟) = , show that
𝑟𝑟 3
∞
1 1
� 3
≤1 .
𝑟𝑟 3
𝑟𝑟=1

(iii) Let 𝑆𝑆(𝑛𝑛) be the set of positive integers less than 𝑛𝑛 which do not have a 2 in their decimal
representation and let 𝜎𝜎(𝑛𝑛) be the sum of the reciprocals of the numbers in 𝑆𝑆(𝑛𝑛), so for
1 1
example 𝜎𝜎(5) = 1 + 3 + 4. Show that 𝑆𝑆(1000) contains 93 − 1 distinct numbers.

Show that 𝜎𝜎(𝑛𝑛) < 80 for all 𝑛𝑛.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2014 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2014Q9]
A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is projected with velocity 𝐮𝐮. It is acted upon by the force 𝑚𝑚𝐠𝐠 due to gravity
and by a resistive force −𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝐯𝐯, where 𝐯𝐯 is its velocity and 𝑘𝑘 is a positive constant.
Given that, at time 𝑡𝑡 after projection, its position 𝐫𝐫 relative to the point of projection is given by
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 1 + e−𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 1 − e−𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐫𝐫 = 𝐠𝐠 + 𝐮𝐮,
𝑘𝑘 2 𝑘𝑘
find an expression for 𝐯𝐯 in terms of 𝑘𝑘, 𝑡𝑡, 𝐠𝐠 and 𝐮𝐮. Verify that the equation of motion and the
initial conditions are satisfied.
Let 𝐮𝐮 = 𝑢𝑢 cos 𝛼𝛼 𝐢𝐢̂ + 𝑢𝑢 sin 𝛼𝛼 𝐣𝐣̂ and 𝐠𝐠 = −𝑔𝑔𝐣𝐣̂ , where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < 90° , and let 𝑇𝑇 be the time after
projection at which 𝐫𝐫. 𝐣𝐣̂ = 0. Show that
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑢𝑢𝑘𝑘 sin 𝛼𝛼 = � − 1� 𝑔𝑔.
1 − e−𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Let 𝛽𝛽 be the acute angle between 𝐯𝐯 and 𝐢𝐢̂ at time 𝑇𝑇. Show that
�e𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 − 1�𝑔𝑔
tan 𝛽𝛽 = − tan 𝛼𝛼.
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 cos 𝛼𝛼
Show further that tan 𝛽𝛽 > tan 𝛼𝛼 (you may assume that sinh 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 > 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘) and deduce that 𝛽𝛽 > 𝛼𝛼.

[STEP 3, 2014Q10] 2014

[Link]

Two particles 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌, of equal mass 𝑚𝑚, lie on a smooth horizontal table and are connected by 6
a light elastic spring of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆. Two more springs, identical
to the first, connect 𝑋𝑋 to a point 𝑃𝑃 on the table and 𝑌𝑌 to a point 𝑄𝑄 on the table. The distance
between 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 is 3𝑎𝑎.
1
Initially, the particles are held so that 𝑋𝑋𝑋𝑋 = 𝑎𝑎 , 𝑌𝑌𝑌𝑌 = 𝑎𝑎 , and 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is a straight line. The
2
particles are then released.
At time 𝑡𝑡, the particle 𝑋𝑋 is a distance 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑥𝑥 from 𝑃𝑃 and the particle 𝑌𝑌 is a distance 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑦𝑦 from 𝑄𝑄.
Show that
d2 𝑥𝑥 𝜆𝜆
𝑚𝑚 2
= − (2𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦)
d𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎
d2 𝑦𝑦
and find a similar expression involving . Deduce that
d𝑡𝑡 2

𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦 = 𝐴𝐴 cos 𝜔𝜔𝜔𝜔 + 𝐵𝐵 sin 𝜔𝜔𝜔𝜔

where 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are constants to be determined and 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝜔𝜔2 = 𝜆𝜆. Find a similar expression for
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦.
Show that 𝑌𝑌 will never return to its initial position.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2014

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2014Q11]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is connected by two light inextensible strings to two fixed points 𝐴𝐴 and
𝐵𝐵, with 𝐴𝐴 vertically above 𝐵𝐵. The string 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 has length 𝑥𝑥. The particle is rotating about the
vertical through 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 with angular velocity 𝜔𝜔, and both strings are taut. Angles 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 and
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 are 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽, respectively.
Find the tensions 𝑇𝑇𝐴𝐴 and 𝑇𝑇𝐵𝐵 in the strings 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 (respectively), and hence show that
𝜔𝜔2 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝛼𝛼 ≥ 𝑔𝑔.
Consider now the case that 𝜔𝜔2 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝛼𝛼 = 𝑔𝑔. Given that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = ℎ and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑑𝑑, where ℎ > 𝑑𝑑, show
that ℎ cos 𝛼𝛼 ≥ √ℎ2 − 𝑑𝑑2 . Show further that
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 < 𝑇𝑇𝐴𝐴 ≤ .
√ℎ2 − 𝑑𝑑2
Describe the geometry of the strings when 𝑇𝑇𝐴𝐴 attains its upper bound.

2014
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2014 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2014Q12]
The random variable 𝑋𝑋 has probability density function 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) (which you may assume is
differentiable) and cumulative distribution function 𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥) where −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞. The random
variable 𝑌𝑌 is defined by 𝑌𝑌 = e 𝑋𝑋 . You may assume throughout this question that 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 have
unique modes.
(i) Find the median value 𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚 of 𝑌𝑌 in terms of the median value 𝑥𝑥𝑚𝑚 of 𝑋𝑋.
𝑓𝑓(ln 𝑦𝑦)
(ii) Show that the probability density function of 𝑌𝑌 is 𝑦𝑦
, and deduce that the mode 𝜆𝜆 of 𝑌𝑌
satisfies 𝑓𝑓 ′ (ln 𝜆𝜆) = 𝑓𝑓(ln 𝜆𝜆).
(iii) Suppose now that 𝑋𝑋~N(𝜇𝜇, 𝜎𝜎 2 ), so that
1 (𝑥𝑥−𝜇𝜇)2
−
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = e 2𝜎𝜎2 .
𝜎𝜎√2π
Explain why
2
1 ∞ �𝑥𝑥−𝜇𝜇−𝜎𝜎 2 �
−
� e 2𝜎𝜎 2 d𝑥𝑥 = 1
𝜎𝜎√2π −∞
1 2
and hence show that E(𝑌𝑌) = e𝜇𝜇+2𝜎𝜎 .
(iv) Show that, when 𝑋𝑋~N(𝜇𝜇, 𝜎𝜎 2 ),
𝜆𝜆 < 𝑦𝑦𝑚𝑚 < E(𝑌𝑌). 2014
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2014

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2014Q13]
I play a game which has repeated rounds. Before the first round, my score is 0. Each round can
have three outcomes:
1. my score is unchanged and the game ends.
2. my score is unchanged and I continue to the next round.
3. my score is increased by one and I continue to the next round.
The probabilities of these outcomes are 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐, respectively (the same in each round),
where 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 1 and 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≠ 0. The random variable 𝑁𝑁 represents my score at the end of a
randomly chosen game.
Let 𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡) be the probability generating function of 𝑁𝑁.
(i) Suppose in the first round, the game ends. Show that the probability generating function
conditional on this happening is 1.
(ii) Suppose in the first round, the game continues to the next round with no change in score.
Show that the probability generating function conditional on this happening is 𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡).
(iii) By comparing the coefficients of 𝑡𝑡 𝑛𝑛 , show that 𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡) = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏(𝑡𝑡) + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐(𝑡𝑡). Deduce that, for
𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0,
𝑎𝑎𝑐𝑐 𝑛𝑛
P(𝑁𝑁 = 𝑛𝑛) = .
(1 − 𝑏𝑏)𝑛𝑛+1
(iv) Show further that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0,
2014
𝜇𝜇𝑛𝑛 [Link]

P(𝑁𝑁 = 𝑛𝑛) = , 9
(1 + 𝜇𝜇)𝑛𝑛+1
where 𝜇𝜇 = E(𝑁𝑁).

STEP 3 Past Paper 2014 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2014
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2014

STEP 3 2015
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2015
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2015 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2015Q1]
(i) Let
∞
1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � d𝑢𝑢,
0 (1 + 𝑢𝑢2 )𝑛𝑛
where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer. Show that
1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 − 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 = 𝐼𝐼
2𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛
and deduce that
(2𝑛𝑛)! π
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 = .
22𝑛𝑛+1 (𝑛𝑛!)2
(ii) Let
∞
𝐽𝐽 = � 𝑓𝑓((𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 −1 )2 ) d𝑥𝑥,
0

where 𝑓𝑓 is any function for which the integral exists. Show that
∞
1 ∞ ∞
𝐽𝐽 = � 𝑥𝑥 −2 𝑓𝑓((𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 −1 )2 ) d𝑥𝑥 = � (1 + 𝑥𝑥 −2 )𝑓𝑓((𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 −1 )2 ) d𝑥𝑥 = � 𝑓𝑓(𝑢𝑢2 ) d𝑢𝑢.
0 2 0 0

(iii) Hence evaluate

∞
2015
𝑥𝑥 2𝑛𝑛−2 [Link]
� 4 2 𝑛𝑛
d𝑥𝑥, 2
0 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥 + 1)

where 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer.

[STEP 3, 2015Q2]
If 𝑠𝑠1 , 𝑠𝑠2 , 𝑠𝑠3 , … and 𝑡𝑡1 , 𝑡𝑡2 , 𝑡𝑡3 , … are sequences of positive numbers, we write
(𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 )
to mean
“there exists a positive integer 𝑚𝑚 such that 𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 whenever 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 𝑚𝑚”.
Determine whether each of the following statements is true or false. In the case of a true
statement, you should give a proof which includes an explicit determination of an appropriate
𝑚𝑚; in the case of a false statement, you should give a counterexample.
(i) (1000𝑛𝑛) ≤ (𝑛𝑛2 ).
(ii) If it is not the case that (𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 ), then it is the case that (𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ).
(iii) If (𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 ) and (𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 ), then (𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛 ) ≤ (𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 ).
(iv) (𝑛𝑛2 ) ≤ (2𝑛𝑛 ).

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2015

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2015Q3]
In this question, 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃 are polar coordinates with 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 0 and −π < 𝜃𝜃 ≤ π, and 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are
positive constants.
Let 𝐿𝐿 be a fixed line and let 𝐴𝐴 be a fixed point not lying on 𝐿𝐿. Then the locus of points that are a
fixed distance (call it 𝑑𝑑 ) from 𝐿𝐿 measured along lines through 𝐴𝐴 is called a conchoid of
Nicomedes.
(i) Show that if
|𝑟𝑟 − 𝑎𝑎 sec 𝜃𝜃| = 𝑏𝑏, (∗)
where 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏, then sec 𝜃𝜃 > 0. Show that all points with coordinates satisfying (∗) lie on a
certain conchoid of Nicomedes (you should identify 𝐿𝐿, 𝑑𝑑 and 𝐴𝐴). Sketch the locus of these
points.
(ii) In the case 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏, sketch the curve (including the loop for which sec 𝜃𝜃 < 0) given by
|𝑟𝑟 − 𝑎𝑎 sec 𝜃𝜃| = 𝑏𝑏.
Find the area of the loop in the case 𝑎𝑎 = 1 and 𝑏𝑏 = 2.
[Note: ∫ sec 𝜃𝜃 d𝜃𝜃 = ln|sec 𝜃𝜃 + tan 𝜃𝜃| + 𝐶𝐶.]

[STEP 3, 2015Q4]
(i) If 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are all real, show that the equation
2015
𝑧𝑧 3 + 𝑎𝑎𝑧𝑧 2 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 = 0 (∗) [Link]

3
has at least one real root.
(ii) Let
𝑆𝑆1 = 𝑧𝑧1 + 𝑧𝑧2 + 𝑧𝑧3 , 𝑆𝑆2 = 𝑧𝑧12 + 𝑧𝑧22 + 𝑧𝑧32 , 𝑆𝑆3 = 𝑧𝑧13 + 𝑧𝑧23 + 𝑧𝑧33 ,
where 𝑧𝑧1 , 𝑧𝑧2 and 𝑧𝑧3 are the roots of the equation (∗). Express 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 in terms of 𝑆𝑆1 and 𝑆𝑆2 ,
and show that
6𝑐𝑐 = −𝑆𝑆13 + 3𝑆𝑆1 𝑆𝑆2 − 2𝑆𝑆3 .
(iii) The six real numbers 𝑟𝑟𝑘𝑘 and 𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 (𝑘𝑘 = 1, 2, 3), where 𝑟𝑟𝑘𝑘 > 0 and −π < 𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 < π, satisfy
3 3 3

� 𝑟𝑟𝑘𝑘 sin(𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 ) = 0, � 𝑟𝑟𝑘𝑘2 sin(2𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 ) = 0, � 𝑟𝑟𝑘𝑘3 sin(3𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 ) = 0.

𝑘𝑘=1 𝑘𝑘=1 𝑘𝑘=1

Show that 𝜃𝜃𝑘𝑘 = 0 for at least one value of 𝑘𝑘.

Show further that if 𝜃𝜃1 = 0 then 𝜃𝜃2 = −𝜃𝜃3.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2015 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2015Q5]

(i) In the following argument to show that √2 is irrational, give proofs appropriate for steps
3, 5 and 6.

1. Assume that √2 is rational.

2. Define the set 𝑆𝑆 to be the set of positive integers with the following property:

𝑛𝑛 is in 𝑆𝑆 if and only if 𝑛𝑛√2 is an integer.

3. Show that the set 𝑆𝑆 contains at least one positive integer.
4. Define the integer 𝑘𝑘 to be the smallest positive integer in 𝑆𝑆.

5. Show that �√2 − 1�𝑘𝑘 is in 𝑆𝑆.

6. Show that steps 4 and 5 are contradictory and hence that √2 is irrational.
1 2
(ii) Prove that 23 is rational if and only if 23 is rational.
1 2
Use an argument similar to that of part (i) to prove that 23 and 23 are irrational.

[STEP 3, 2015Q6]
(i) Let 𝑤𝑤 and 𝑧𝑧 be complex numbers, and let 𝑢𝑢 = 𝑤𝑤 + 𝑧𝑧 and 𝑣𝑣 = 𝑤𝑤 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 . Prove that 𝑤𝑤 and 𝑧𝑧
are real if and only if 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 are real and 𝑢𝑢2 ≤ 2𝑣𝑣.
(ii) The complex numbers 𝑢𝑢, 𝑤𝑤 and 𝑧𝑧 satisfy the equations 2015
[Link]

𝑤𝑤 + 𝑧𝑧 − 𝑢𝑢 = 0 4
2
𝑤𝑤 2 + 𝑧𝑧 2 − 𝑢𝑢2 = −
3
𝑤𝑤 3 + 𝑧𝑧 3 − 𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆 = −𝜆𝜆
where 𝜆𝜆 is a positive real number. Show that for all values of 𝜆𝜆 except one (which you
should find) there are three possible values of 𝑢𝑢, all real.
Are 𝑤𝑤 and 𝑧𝑧 necessarily real? Give a proof or counterexample.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2015

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2015Q7]
An operator D is defined, for any function 𝑓𝑓, by
d𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)
D𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 .
d𝑥𝑥
The notation D𝑛𝑛 means that D is applied 𝑛𝑛 times; for example
d d𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)
D2 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 �𝑥𝑥 �.
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥

Show that, for any constant 𝑎𝑎, D2 𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎 = 𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎 .

(i) Show that if 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) is a polynomial of degree 𝑟𝑟 (where 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 1) then, for any positive integer
𝑛𝑛, D𝑛𝑛 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) is also a polynomial of degree 𝑟𝑟.
(ii) Show that if 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑚𝑚 are positive integers with 𝑛𝑛 < 𝑚𝑚, then D𝑛𝑛 (1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚 is divisible by
(1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑚𝑚−𝑛𝑛 .
(iii) Deduce that, if 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑛𝑛 are positive integers with 𝑛𝑛 < 𝑚𝑚, then
𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚
�(−1)𝑟𝑟 � � 𝑟𝑟 𝑛𝑛 = 0.
𝑟𝑟
𝑟𝑟=0

[STEP 3, 2015Q8]
(i) Show that under the changes of variable 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑟𝑟 cos 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑟𝑟 sin 𝜃𝜃, where 𝑟𝑟 is a function
2015
of 𝜃𝜃 with 𝑟𝑟 > 0, the differential equation [Link]

5
d𝑦𝑦
(𝑦𝑦 + 𝑥𝑥) = 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑥𝑥
d𝑥𝑥
becomes
d𝑟𝑟
+ 𝑟𝑟 = 0.
d𝜃𝜃
Sketch a solution in the 𝑥𝑥-𝑦𝑦 plane.
(ii) Show that the solutions of
d𝑦𝑦
�𝑦𝑦 + 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 )� = 𝑦𝑦 − 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦(𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 )
d𝑥𝑥
can be written in the form
1
𝑟𝑟 2 =
1 + 𝐴𝐴e2𝜃𝜃
and sketch the different forms of solution that arise according to the value of 𝐴𝐴.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2015 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2015Q9]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 moves on a smooth fixed straight horizontal rail and is attached to a
fixed peg 𝑄𝑄 by a light elastic string of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus 𝜆𝜆. The peg 𝑄𝑄 is a distance
𝑎𝑎 from the rail. Initially 𝑃𝑃 is at rest with 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑎𝑎.
An impulse imparts to 𝑃𝑃 a speed 𝑣𝑣 along the rail. Let 𝑥𝑥 be the displacement at time 𝑡𝑡 of 𝑃𝑃 from
its initial position. Obtain the equation
2
𝑥𝑥̇ 2 = 𝑣𝑣 2 − 𝑘𝑘 2 ��𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑎𝑎�
𝜆𝜆
where 𝑘𝑘 2 = , 𝑘𝑘 > 0 and the dot denotes differentiation with respect to 𝑡𝑡.
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚

Find, in terms of 𝑘𝑘, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑣𝑣, the greatest value, 𝑥𝑥0 , attained by 𝑥𝑥. Find also the acceleration of 𝑃𝑃
at 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑥𝑥0 .
Obtain, in the form of an integral, an expression for the period of the motion. Show that, in the
case 𝑣𝑣 ≪ 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 (that is, 𝑣𝑣 is much less than 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘), this is approximately

32𝑎𝑎 1 1
� � d𝑢𝑢.
𝑘𝑘𝑣𝑣 0 √1 − 𝑢𝑢4

[STEP 3, 2015Q10]
2015
A light rod of length 2𝑎𝑎 has a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 attached to each end and it moves in a vertical
[Link]

6
plane. The midpoint of the rod has coordinates (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦), where the 𝑥𝑥-axis is horizontal (within
the plane of motion) and 𝑦𝑦 is the height above a horizontal table. Initially, the rod is vertical,
and at time 𝑡𝑡 later it is inclined at an angle 𝜃𝜃 to the vertical.
Show that the velocity of one particle can be written in the form
𝑥𝑥̇ + 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ cos 𝜃𝜃
� �
𝑦𝑦̇ − 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ sin 𝜃𝜃
and that
𝑥𝑥̈ + 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̈ cos 𝜃𝜃 − 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 sin 𝜃𝜃 sin 𝜃𝜃 0
𝑚𝑚 � ̈ ̇ 2 � = −𝑇𝑇 � � − 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � �
𝑦𝑦̈ − 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃 sin 𝜃𝜃 − 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃 cos 𝜃𝜃 cos 𝜃𝜃 1
where the dots denote differentiation with respect to time 𝑡𝑡 and 𝑇𝑇 is the tension in the rod.
Obtain the corresponding equations for the other particle.
Deduce that 𝑥𝑥̈ = 0, 𝑦𝑦̈ = −𝑔𝑔 and 𝜃𝜃̈ = 0.
Initially, the midpoint of the rod is a height ℎ above the table, the velocity of the higher particle
is �𝑢𝑢𝑣𝑣�, and the velocity of the lower particle is �0𝑣𝑣�. Given that the two particles hit the table for
1
the first time simultaneously, when the rod has rotated by π, show that
2

2ℎ𝑢𝑢2 = π2 𝑎𝑎2 𝑔𝑔 − 2π𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2015

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2015Q11]
(i) A horizontal disc of radius 𝑟𝑟 rotates about a vertical axis through its centre with angular
speed 𝜔𝜔. One end of a light rod is fixed by a smooth hinge to the edge of the disc so that it
can rotate freely in a vertical plane through the centre of the disc. A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚
is attached to the rod at a distance 𝑑𝑑 from the hinge. The rod makes a constant angle 𝛼𝛼
with the upward vertical, as shown in the diagram, and 𝑑𝑑 sin 𝛼𝛼 < 𝑟𝑟.

By considering moments about the hinge for the (light) rod, show that the force exerted
on the rod by 𝑃𝑃 is parallel to the rod.
Show also that
𝑟𝑟 cot 𝛼𝛼 = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑑𝑑 cos 𝛼𝛼,
𝑔𝑔 2015
where 𝑎𝑎 = . State clearly the direction of the force exerted by the hinge on the rod, [Link]
and
𝜔𝜔2
find an expression for its magnitude in terms of 𝑚𝑚, 𝑔𝑔 and 𝛼𝛼. 7

(ii) The disc and rod rotate as in part (i), but two particles (instead of 𝑃𝑃) are attached to the
rod. The masses of the particles are 𝑚𝑚1 and 𝑚𝑚2 and they are attached to the rod at
distances 𝑑𝑑1 and 𝑑𝑑2 from the hinge, respectively. The rod makes a constant angle 𝛽𝛽 with
the upward vertical and 𝑑𝑑1 sin 𝛽𝛽 < 𝑑𝑑2 sin 𝛽𝛽 < 𝑟𝑟. Show that 𝛽𝛽 satisfies an equation of the
form
𝑟𝑟 cot 𝛽𝛽 = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 cos 𝛽𝛽,
where 𝑏𝑏 should be expressed in terms of 𝑑𝑑1 , 𝑑𝑑2 , 𝑚𝑚1 and 𝑚𝑚2 .

STEP 3 Past Paper 2015 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2015Q12]
A 6-sided fair die has the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 on its faces. The die is thrown 𝑛𝑛 times, the
outcome (the number on the top face) of each throw being independent of the outcome of any
other throw. The random variable 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is the sum of the outcomes.
(i) The random variable 𝑅𝑅𝑛𝑛 is the remainder when 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is divided by 6. Write down the
probability generating function, 𝐺𝐺(𝑥𝑥), of 𝑅𝑅1 and show that the probability generating
function of 𝑅𝑅2 is also 𝐺𝐺(𝑥𝑥). Use a generating function to find the probability that 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is
divisible by 6.
(ii) The random variable 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 is the remainder when 𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is divided by 5. Write down the
probability generating function, 𝐺𝐺1 (𝑥𝑥) , of 𝑇𝑇1 and show that 𝐺𝐺2 (𝑥𝑥) , the probability
generating function of 𝑇𝑇2 , is given by
1 2
𝐺𝐺2 (𝑥𝑥) = (𝑥𝑥 + 7𝑦𝑦)
36
where 𝑦𝑦 = 1 + 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑥𝑥 4 .
Obtain the probability generating function of 𝑇𝑇𝑛𝑛 and hence show that the probability that
𝑆𝑆𝑛𝑛 is divisible by 5 is
1 1
�1 − 𝑛𝑛 �
5 6
if 𝑛𝑛 is not divisible by 5. What is the corresponding probability if 𝑛𝑛 is divisible by 5? 2015
[Link]

8
[STEP 3, 2015Q13]
Each of the two independent random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 is uniformly distributed on the interval
[0, 1].
(i) By considering the lines 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = constant in the 𝑥𝑥 - 𝑦𝑦 plane, find the cumulative
distribution function of 𝑋𝑋 + 𝑌𝑌.
Hence show that the probability density function 𝑓𝑓 of (𝑋𝑋 + 𝑌𝑌)−1 is given by
1
2𝑡𝑡 −2 − 𝑡𝑡 −3 for ≤ 𝑡𝑡 ≤ 1
𝑓𝑓(𝑡𝑡) = � −3 2
𝑡𝑡 for 1 ≤ 𝑡𝑡 < ∞
0 otherwise.
1
Evaluate E � �.
𝑋𝑋+𝑌𝑌
𝑌𝑌
(ii) Find the cumulative distribution function of 𝑋𝑋 and use this result to find the probability
𝑋𝑋
density function of 𝑋𝑋+𝑌𝑌.
𝑋𝑋
Write down E � � and verify your result by integration.
𝑋𝑋+𝑌𝑌

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2015

STEP 3 2016
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2016
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2016 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2016Q1]
Let
∞
1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = � d𝑥𝑥,
−∞ (𝑥𝑥 2 + 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏)𝑛𝑛
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are constants with 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑎𝑎2 , and 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer.

(i) By using the substitution 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎 = √𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎2 tan 𝑢𝑢, or otherwise, show that
π
𝐼𝐼1 = .
√𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎2
(ii) Show that 2𝑛𝑛(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎2 )𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 = (2𝑛𝑛 − 1)𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 .
(iii) Hence prove by induction that
π 2𝑛𝑛 − 2
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = 1� �.
𝑛𝑛 − 1
22𝑛𝑛−2 (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎2 )𝑛𝑛−2

[STEP 3, 2016Q2]
The distinct points 𝑃𝑃(𝑎𝑎𝑝𝑝2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎), 𝑄𝑄(𝑎𝑎𝑞𝑞 2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) and 𝑅𝑅(𝑎𝑎𝑟𝑟 2 , 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) lie on the parabola 𝑦𝑦 2 = 4𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎,
where 𝑎𝑎 > 0. The points are such that the normal to the parabola at 𝑄𝑄 and the normal to the
parabola at 𝑅𝑅 both pass through 𝑃𝑃. 2016
[Link]
(i) Show that 𝑞𝑞 2 + 𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 + 2 = 0. 2
(ii) Show that 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 passes through a certain point that is independent of the choice of 𝑃𝑃.
(iii) Let 𝑇𝑇 be the point of intersection of 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄, where 𝑂𝑂 is the coordinate origin. Show
that 𝑇𝑇 lies on a line that is independent of the choice of 𝑃𝑃.
𝑎𝑎
Show further that the distance from the 𝑥𝑥-axis to 𝑇𝑇 is less than .
√2

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2016

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2016Q3]
(i) Given that
𝑥𝑥 3 − 2 𝑥𝑥 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) 𝑥𝑥
� e d𝑥𝑥 = e + constant,
(𝑥𝑥 + 1)2 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥)
where 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥) are polynomials, show that 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥) has a factor of 𝑥𝑥 + 1.
Show also that the degree of 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) is exactly one more than the degree of 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥), and find
𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) in the case 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 + 1.
(ii) Show that there are no polynomials 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥) such that
1 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) 𝑥𝑥
� e𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = e + constant.
𝑥𝑥 + 1 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥)
You need consider only the case when 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑄𝑄(𝑥𝑥) have no common factors.

[STEP 3, 2016Q4]
1 1
(i) By considering 1+𝑥𝑥𝑟𝑟 − 1+𝑥𝑥𝑟𝑟+1 for |𝑥𝑥| ≠ 1, simplify
𝑁𝑁
𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟
� .
(1 + 𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟 )(1 + 𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟+1 )
𝑟𝑟=1

Show that, for |𝑥𝑥| < 1,

∞ 2016
𝑥𝑥 𝑟𝑟 𝑥𝑥 [Link]
� = . 3
(1 + 𝑥𝑥 )(1 + 𝑥𝑥 ) 1 − 𝑥𝑥 2
𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟+1
𝑟𝑟=1

(ii) Deduce that

∞

� sech(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) sech�(𝑟𝑟 + 1)𝑦𝑦� = 2e−𝑦𝑦 cosech(2𝑦𝑦)

𝑟𝑟=1

for 𝑦𝑦 > 0.
Hence simplify
∞

� sech(𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) sech�(𝑟𝑟 + 1)𝑦𝑦�,

𝑟𝑟=−∞

for 𝑦𝑦 > 0.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2016 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2016Q5]
(i) By considering the binomial expansion of (1 + 𝑥𝑥)2𝑚𝑚+1 , prove that
2𝑚𝑚 + 1
� � < 22𝑚𝑚 ,
𝑚𝑚
for any positive integer 𝑚𝑚.
(ii) For any positive integers 𝑟𝑟 and 𝑠𝑠 with 𝑟𝑟 < 𝑠𝑠, 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟,𝑠𝑠 is defined as follows: 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟,𝑠𝑠 is the product of
all the prime numbers greater than 𝑟𝑟 and less than or equal to 𝑠𝑠, if there are any such
primes numbers; if there are no such primes numbers, then 𝑃𝑃𝑟𝑟,𝑠𝑠 = 1.
For example, 𝑃𝑃3,7 = 35, 𝑃𝑃7,10 = 1 and 𝑃𝑃14,18 = 17.

Show that, for any positive integer 𝑚𝑚, 𝑃𝑃𝑚𝑚+1,2𝑚𝑚+1 divides �2𝑚𝑚+1
𝑚𝑚
�, and deduce that

𝑃𝑃𝑚𝑚+1,2𝑚𝑚+1 < 22𝑚𝑚 .

(iii) Show that, if 𝑃𝑃1,𝑘𝑘 < 4𝑘𝑘 for 𝑘𝑘 = 2, 3, … , 2𝑚𝑚, then 𝑃𝑃1,2𝑚𝑚+1 < 42𝑚𝑚+1 .
(iv) Prove that 𝑃𝑃1,𝑛𝑛 < 4𝑛𝑛 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2.

[STEP 3, 2016Q6]
Show, by finding 𝑅𝑅 and 𝛾𝛾, that 𝐴𝐴 sinh 𝑥𝑥 + 𝐵𝐵 cosh 𝑥𝑥 can be written in the form 𝑅𝑅 cosh(𝑥𝑥 + 𝛾𝛾) if
𝐵𝐵 > 𝐴𝐴 > 0 . Determine the corresponding forms in the other cases that arise, for 𝐴𝐴 > 0 ,
according to the value of 𝐵𝐵.
2016
Two curves have equations 𝑦𝑦 = sech 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎 tanh 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑏𝑏 , where 𝑎𝑎 > 0. [Link]

4
(i) In the case 𝑏𝑏 > 𝑎𝑎, show that if the curves intersect then the 𝑥𝑥-coordinates of the points of
intersection can be written in the form
1 𝑎𝑎
± arcosh � � − artanh .
√𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏
(ii) Find the corresponding result in the case 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏 > 0.
(iii) Find necessary and sufficient conditions on 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 for the curves to intersect at two
distinct points.
(iv) Find necessary and sufficient conditions on 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 for the curves to touch and, given that
they touch, express the 𝑦𝑦-coordinate of the point of contact in terms of 𝑎𝑎.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2016

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2016Q8]
(i) The function 𝑓𝑓 satisfies, for all 𝑥𝑥, the equation
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) + (1 − 𝑥𝑥)𝑓𝑓(−𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 2 .
Show that 𝑓𝑓(−𝑥𝑥) + (1 + 𝑥𝑥)𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 2 . Hence find 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑥𝑥. You should verify
that your function satisfies the original equation.
2016
(ii) The function 𝐾𝐾 is defined, for 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1, by [Link]

5
𝑥𝑥 + 1
𝐾𝐾(𝑥𝑥) = .
𝑥𝑥 − 1
Show that, for 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1, 𝐾𝐾�𝐾𝐾(𝑥𝑥)� = 𝑥𝑥.
The function 𝑔𝑔 satisfies the equation
𝑥𝑥 + 1
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 � � = 𝑥𝑥 (𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1).
𝑥𝑥 − 1
2𝑥𝑥
Show that, for 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1, 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = .
𝑥𝑥 2 +1

(iii) Find ℎ(𝑥𝑥), for 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1, given that

1 1
ℎ(𝑥𝑥) + ℎ � � = 1 − 𝑥𝑥 − (𝑥𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 1).
1 − 𝑥𝑥 1 − 𝑥𝑥

STEP 3 Past Paper 2016 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2016Q9]
Three pegs 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 are fixed on a smooth horizontal table in such a way that they form the
vertices of an equilateral triangle of side 2𝑎𝑎. A particle 𝑋𝑋 of mass 𝑚𝑚 lies on the table. It is
attached to the pegs by three springs, 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅, each of modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆 and
2
natural length 𝑙𝑙, where 𝑙𝑙 < 𝑎𝑎. Initially the particle is in equilibrium. Show that the extension
√3
2
in each spring is 3 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑙𝑙.
√

The particle is then pulled a small distance directly towards 𝑃𝑃 and released. Show that the
tension 𝑇𝑇 in the spring 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 is given by

𝜆𝜆 4𝑎𝑎2 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇 = �� + + 𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑙𝑙�,
𝑙𝑙 3 √3

where 𝑥𝑥 is the displacement of 𝑋𝑋 from its equilibrium position.

Show further that the particle performs approximate simple harmonic motion with period

4𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
2π� .
3�4𝑎𝑎 − √3𝑙𝑙�𝜆𝜆

[STEP 3, 2016Q10] 2016

[Link]
A smooth plane is inclined at an angle 𝛼𝛼 to the horizontal. A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to
6
a fixed point 𝐴𝐴 above the plane by a light inextensible string of length 𝑎𝑎. The particle rests in
equilibrium on the plane, and the string makes an angle 𝛽𝛽 with the plane.
The particle is given a horizontal impulse parallel to the plane so that it has an initial speed of
𝑢𝑢. Show that the particle will not immediately leave the plane if 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 cos(𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽) > 𝑢𝑢2 tan 𝛽𝛽.
Show further that a necessary condition for the particle to perform a complete circle whilst in
contact with the plane is 6 tan 𝛼𝛼 tan 𝛽𝛽 < 1.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2016

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2016Q11]
A car of mass 𝑚𝑚 travels along a straight horizontal road with its engine working at a constant
rate 𝑃𝑃. The resistance to its motion is such that the acceleration of the car is zero when it is
moving with speed 4𝑈𝑈.
(i) Given that the resistance is proportional to the car’s speed, show that the distance 𝑋𝑋1
travelled by the car while it accelerates from speed 𝑈𝑈 to speed 2𝑈𝑈, is given by
9
𝜆𝜆𝑋𝑋1 = 2 ln − 1,
5
𝑃𝑃
where 𝜆𝜆 = .
16𝑚𝑚𝑈𝑈 3

(ii) Given instead that the resistance is proportional to the square of the car’s speed, show that
the distance 𝑋𝑋2 travelled by the car while it accelerates from speed 𝑈𝑈 to speed 2𝑈𝑈 is given
by
4 9
𝜆𝜆𝑋𝑋2 = ln .
3 8
(iii) Given that 3.17 < ln 24 < 3.18 and 1.60 < ln 5 < 1.61, determine which is the larger of 𝑋𝑋1
and 𝑋𝑋2 .

2016
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2016 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2016Q12]
Let 𝑋𝑋 be a random variable with mean 𝜇𝜇 and standard deviation 𝜎𝜎. Chebyshev’s inequality,
which you may use without proof, is
1
P(|𝑋𝑋 − 𝜇𝜇| > 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘) ≤ ,
𝑘𝑘 2
where 𝑘𝑘 is any positive number.
(i) The probability of a biased coin landing heads up is 0.2. It is thrown 100𝑛𝑛 times, where 𝑛𝑛
is an integer greater than 1. Let 𝛼𝛼 be the probability that the coin lands heads up 𝑁𝑁 times,
where 16𝑛𝑛 ≤ 𝑁𝑁 ≤ 24𝑛𝑛.
Use Chebyshev’s inequality to show that
1
𝛼𝛼 ≥ 1 − .
𝑛𝑛
(ii) Use Chebyshev’s inequality to show that
𝑛𝑛2 𝑛𝑛2𝑛𝑛 1
1 + 𝑛𝑛 + + ⋯+ ≥ �1 − � e𝑛𝑛 .
2! (2𝑛𝑛)! 𝑛𝑛

[STEP 3, 2016Q13]
2016
Given a random variable 𝑋𝑋 with mean 𝜇𝜇 and standard deviation 𝜎𝜎, we define the kurtosis, 𝜅𝜅, of
[Link]
𝑋𝑋 by
8
4)
E((𝑋𝑋 − 𝜇𝜇)
𝜅𝜅 = − 3.
𝜎𝜎 4
Show that the random variable 𝑋𝑋 − 𝑎𝑎, where 𝑎𝑎 is a constant, has the same kurtosis as 𝑋𝑋.
(i) Show by integration that a random variable which is Normally distributed with mean 0
has kurtosis 0.
(ii) Let 𝑌𝑌1 , 𝑌𝑌2 , … , 𝑌𝑌𝑛𝑛 be 𝑛𝑛 independent, identically distributed, random variables with mean 0,
and let 𝑇𝑇 = ∑𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟=1 𝑌𝑌𝑟𝑟 . Show that
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛−1 𝑛𝑛
4)
E(𝑇𝑇 = � E(𝑌𝑌𝑟𝑟4 ) + 6 � � E(𝑌𝑌𝑠𝑠2 )E(𝑌𝑌𝑟𝑟2 ).
𝑟𝑟=1 𝑟𝑟=1 𝑠𝑠=𝑟𝑟+1

(iii) Let 𝑋𝑋1 , 𝑋𝑋2 , … , 𝑋𝑋𝑛𝑛 be 𝑛𝑛 independent, identically distributed, random variables each with
𝜅𝜅
kurtosis 𝜅𝜅. Show that the kurtosis of their sum is .
𝑛𝑛

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2016

STEP 3 2017
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2017
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2017 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2017Q1]
(i) Prove that, for any positive 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑟𝑟,
1 𝑟𝑟 + 1 1 1
𝑛𝑛+𝑟𝑟 = � 𝑛𝑛+𝑟𝑟−1 − 𝑛𝑛+𝑟𝑟 �.
𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟+1 𝑟𝑟 𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟

Hence determine
∞
1
� 𝑛𝑛+𝑟𝑟 ,
𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟+1
𝑛𝑛=1
1 1
and deduce that ∑∞
𝑛𝑛=2 𝑛𝑛+2 = .
𝐶𝐶3 2

(ii) Show that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 3,

3! 1 20 1 5!
< 𝑛𝑛+1 and 𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝑛𝑛+2 < 3 .
𝑛𝑛3 𝐶𝐶3 𝐶𝐶3 𝐶𝐶5 𝑛𝑛
By summing these inequalities for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 3, show that
∞
115 1 116
<� 3< .
96 𝑛𝑛 96
𝑛𝑛=1
𝑛𝑛
Note: 𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟 is another notation for �𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟�.
2017
[Link]

2
[STEP 3, 2017Q2]
The transformation 𝑅𝑅 in the complex plane is a rotation (anticlockwise) by an angle 𝜃𝜃 about
the point represented by the complex number 𝑎𝑎. The transformation 𝑆𝑆 in the complex plane is
a rotation (anticlockwise) by an angle 𝜙𝜙 about the point represented by the complex number
𝑏𝑏.
(i) The point 𝑃𝑃 is represented by the complex number 𝑧𝑧. Show that the image of 𝑃𝑃 under 𝑅𝑅 is
represented by
e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑎𝑎�1 − e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 �.
(ii) Show that the transformation 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (equivalent to 𝑅𝑅 followed by 𝑆𝑆) is a rotation about the
point represented by 𝑐𝑐, where
1 𝐢𝐢𝜙𝜙 1 𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 1
𝑐𝑐 sin (𝜃𝜃 + 𝜙𝜙) = 𝑎𝑎e 2 sin 𝜃𝜃 + 𝑏𝑏e− 2 sin 𝜙𝜙,
2 2 2
provided 𝜃𝜃 + 𝜙𝜙 ≠ 2𝑛𝑛π for any integer 𝑛𝑛.
What is the transformation 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 if 𝜃𝜃 + 𝜙𝜙 = 2π?
(iii) Under what circumstances is 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆?

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2017

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2017Q3]
Let 𝛼𝛼, 𝛽𝛽, 𝛾𝛾 and 𝛿𝛿 be the roots of the quartic equation
𝑥𝑥 4 + 𝑝𝑝𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑞𝑞𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 + 𝑠𝑠 = 0.
You are given that, for any such equation, 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 + 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 , 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽 and 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽𝛽𝛽 satisfy a cubic
equation of the form
𝑦𝑦 3 + 𝐴𝐴𝑦𝑦 2 + (𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 4𝑠𝑠)𝑦𝑦 + (4𝑞𝑞𝑞𝑞 − 𝑝𝑝2 𝑠𝑠 − 𝑟𝑟 2 ) = 0.
Determine 𝐴𝐴.
Now consider the quartic equation given by 𝑝𝑝 = 0, 𝑞𝑞 = 3, 𝑟𝑟 = −6 and 𝑠𝑠 = 10.
(i) Find the value of 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 + 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾 , given that it is the largest root of the corresponding cubic
equation.
(ii) Hence, using the values of 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑠𝑠, find the value of (𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽)(𝛾𝛾 + 𝛿𝛿) and the value of 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼
given that 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 > 𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾.
(iii) Using these results, and the values of 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑟𝑟, solve the quartic equation.

[STEP 3, 2017Q4]
For any function 𝑓𝑓 satisfying 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) > 0, we define the geometric mean, 𝐹𝐹, by
1 𝑦𝑦
∫0 ln 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)d𝑥𝑥
𝐹𝐹(𝑦𝑦) = e𝑦𝑦 (𝑦𝑦 > 0).
2017
(i) The function 𝑓𝑓 satisfies 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) > 0 and 𝑎𝑎 is a positive number with 𝑎𝑎 ≠ 1. Prove that [Link]

1 𝑦𝑦 3
∫ log 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)d𝑥𝑥
𝐹𝐹(𝑦𝑦) = 𝑎𝑎𝑦𝑦 0 𝑎𝑎 .
(ii) The functions 𝑓𝑓 and 𝑔𝑔 satisfy 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) > 0 and 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) > 0, and the function ℎ is defined by
ℎ(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥). Their geometric means are 𝐹𝐹, 𝐺𝐺 and 𝐻𝐻, respectively. Show that 𝐻𝐻(𝑦𝑦) =
𝐹𝐹(𝑦𝑦)𝐺𝐺(𝑦𝑦).

(iii) Prove that, for any positive number 𝑏𝑏, the geometric mean of 𝑏𝑏 𝑥𝑥 is √𝑏𝑏 𝑦𝑦 .

(iv) Prove that, if 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) > 0 and the geometric mean of 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is �𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦), then 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑏𝑏 𝑥𝑥 for some
positive number 𝑏𝑏.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2017 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2017Q5]
The point with cartesian coordinates (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) lies on a curve with polar equation 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃). Find
d𝑦𝑦
an expression for in terms of 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃), 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝜃𝜃) and tan 𝜃𝜃.
d𝑥𝑥

Two curves, with polar equations 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃) and 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑔𝑔(𝜃𝜃), meet at right angles. Show that
where they meet
𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝜃𝜃)𝑔𝑔′ (𝜃𝜃) + 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃)𝑔𝑔(𝜃𝜃) = 0.
The curve 𝐶𝐶 has polar equation 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃) and passes through the point given by 𝑟𝑟 = 4, 𝜃𝜃 =
1
− π. For each positive value of 𝑎𝑎, the curve with polar equation 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑎𝑎(1 + sin 𝜃𝜃) meets 𝐶𝐶 at
2
right angles. Find 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃).
Sketch on a single diagram the three curves with polar equations 𝑟𝑟 = 1 + sin 𝜃𝜃 , 𝑟𝑟 =
4(1 + sin 𝜃𝜃) and 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑓𝑓(𝜃𝜃).

[STEP 3, 2017Q6]
In this question, you are not permitted to use any properties of trigonometric functions or
inverse trigonometric functions.
The function 𝑇𝑇 is defined for 𝑥𝑥 > 0 by
𝑥𝑥
1
𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥) = � d𝑢𝑢,
0 1 + 𝑢𝑢2
∞ 1
2017
and 𝑇𝑇∞ = ∫0 d𝑢𝑢 (which has a finite value). [Link]
1+𝑢𝑢2
4
(i) By making an appropriate substitution in the integral for 𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥), show that
𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑇𝑇∞ − 𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥 −1 ).
𝑢𝑢+𝑎𝑎
(ii) Let 𝑣𝑣 = 1−𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎, where 𝑎𝑎 is a constant. Verify that, for 𝑢𝑢 ≠ 𝑎𝑎 −1 ,

d𝑣𝑣 1 + 𝑣𝑣 2
= .
d𝑢𝑢 1 + 𝑢𝑢2
1
Hence show that, for 𝑎𝑎 > 0 and 𝑥𝑥 < ,
𝑎𝑎

𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑇𝑇 � � − 𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎).
1 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Deduce that
𝑥𝑥 + 𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇(𝑥𝑥 −1 ) = 2𝑇𝑇∞ − 𝑇𝑇 � � − 𝑇𝑇(𝑎𝑎−1 )
1 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
1
and hence that, for 𝑏𝑏 > 0 and 𝑦𝑦 > 𝑏𝑏,

𝑦𝑦 + 𝑏𝑏
𝑇𝑇(𝑦𝑦) = 2𝑇𝑇∞ − 𝑇𝑇 � � − 𝑇𝑇(𝑏𝑏).
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 1
2 1
(iii) Use the above results to show that 𝑇𝑇�√3� = 3 𝑇𝑇∞ and 𝑇𝑇�√2 − 1� = 4 𝑇𝑇∞ .

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2017

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2017Q7]
Show that the point 𝑇𝑇 with coordinates
𝑎𝑎(1 − 𝑡𝑡 2 ) 2𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
� , � (∗)
1 + 𝑡𝑡 2 1 + 𝑡𝑡 2
(where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are non-zero) lies on the ellipse
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 2
+ = 1.
𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏 2
(i) The line 𝐿𝐿 is the tangent to the ellipse at 𝑇𝑇. The point (𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌) lies on 𝐿𝐿, and 𝑋𝑋 2 ≠ 𝑎𝑎2 .
Show that
(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑋𝑋)𝑏𝑏𝑡𝑡 2 − 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑋𝑋) = 0.
Deduce that if 𝑎𝑎2 𝑌𝑌 2 > (𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑋𝑋 2 )𝑏𝑏 2, then there are two distinct lines through (𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌) that
are tangents to the ellipse. Interpret this result geometrically. Show, by means of a sketch,
that the result holds also if 𝑋𝑋 2 = 𝑎𝑎2 .
(ii) The distinct points 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are given by (∗), with 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑡𝑡 = 𝑞𝑞 , respectively. The
tangents to the ellipse at 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 meet at the point with coordinates (𝑋𝑋, 𝑌𝑌), where 𝑋𝑋 2 ≠
𝑎𝑎2 . Show that
(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑋𝑋)𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑋𝑋
and find an expression for 𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏, 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌.
Given that the tangents meet the 𝑦𝑦-axis at points (0, 𝑦𝑦1 ) and (0, 𝑦𝑦2 ), where 𝑦𝑦1 + 𝑦𝑦2 =2017
2𝑏𝑏,
[Link]
show that
5
2
𝑋𝑋 𝑌𝑌
2
+ = 1.
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏

STEP 3 Past Paper 2017 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2017Q8]
Prove that, for any numbers 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , …, and 𝑏𝑏1 , 𝑏𝑏2 , …, and for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,
𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛

� 𝑎𝑎𝑚𝑚 (𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚+1 − 𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚 ) = 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛+1 𝑏𝑏𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝑎𝑎1 𝑏𝑏1 − � 𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚+1 (𝑎𝑎𝑚𝑚+1 − 𝑎𝑎𝑚𝑚 ).
𝑚𝑚=1 𝑚𝑚=1

(i) By setting 𝑏𝑏𝑚𝑚 = sin 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚, show that

𝑛𝑛
1 1 1
� cos �𝑚𝑚 + � 𝑥𝑥 = (sin(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥 − sin 𝑥𝑥) cosec 𝑥𝑥.
2 2 2
𝑚𝑚=1
𝐴𝐴+𝐵𝐵 𝐴𝐴−𝐵𝐵
Note: sin 𝐴𝐴 − sin 𝐵𝐵 = 2 cos � � sin � �.
2 2

(ii) Show that

𝑛𝑛
1
� 𝑚𝑚 sin 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = (𝑝𝑝 sin(𝑛𝑛 + 1)𝑥𝑥 + 𝑞𝑞 sin 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛) cosec 2 𝑥𝑥,
2
𝑚𝑚=1

where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are to be determined in terms of 𝑛𝑛.

Note: 2 sin 𝐴𝐴 sin 𝐵𝐵 = cos(𝐴𝐴 − 𝐵𝐵) − cos(𝐴𝐴 + 𝐵𝐵).
2 cos 𝐴𝐴 sin 𝐵𝐵 = sin(𝐴𝐴 + 𝐵𝐵) − sin(𝐴𝐴 − 𝐵𝐵).

2017
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2017

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2017Q9]
Two particles 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 of masses 𝑚𝑚 and 2𝑚𝑚, respectively, are connected by a light spring of
natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝜆𝜆. They are placed on a smooth horizontal table with
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 perpendicular to the edge of the table, and 𝐴𝐴 is held on the edge of the table. Initially the
spring is at its natural length.
Particle 𝐴𝐴 is released. At a time 𝑡𝑡 later, particle 𝐴𝐴 has dropped a distance 𝑦𝑦 and particle 𝐵𝐵 has
1
moved a distance 𝑥𝑥 from its initial position (where 𝑥𝑥 < 𝑎𝑎). Show that 𝑦𝑦 + 2𝑥𝑥 = 𝑔𝑔𝑡𝑡 2 .
2

6𝑎𝑎
The value of 𝜆𝜆 is such that particle 𝐵𝐵 reaches the edge of the table at a time 𝑇𝑇 given by 𝑇𝑇 = � .
𝑔𝑔

By considering the total energy of the system (without solving any differential equations),
2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
show that the speed of particle 𝐵𝐵 at this time is � .
3

[STEP 3, 2017Q10]
A uniform rod 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 and length 3𝑎𝑎 is freely hinged at 𝑃𝑃.
The rod is held horizontally and a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is placed on top of the rod at a distance 𝑙𝑙
from 𝑃𝑃, where 𝑙𝑙 < 2𝑎𝑎. The coefficient of friction between the rod and the particle is 𝜇𝜇.
The rod is then released. Show that, while the particle does not slip along the rod,
2017
(3𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑙𝑙 2 )𝜃𝜃̇ 2 = 𝑔𝑔(3𝑎𝑎 + 2𝑙𝑙) sin 𝜃𝜃, [Link]

7
where 𝜃𝜃 is the angle through which the rod has turned, and the dot denotes the time derivative.
Hence, or otherwise, find an expression for 𝜃𝜃̈ and show that the normal reaction of the rod on
the particle is non-zero when 𝜃𝜃 is acute.
Show further that, when the particle is on the point of slipping,
𝜇𝜇𝜇𝜇(2𝑎𝑎 − 𝑙𝑙)
tan 𝜃𝜃 = .
2(𝑙𝑙 2 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑎𝑎2 )
What happens at the moment the rod is released if, instead, 𝑙𝑙 > 2𝑎𝑎?

STEP 3 Past Paper 2017 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2017Q11]
A railway truck, initially at rest, can move forwards without friction on a long straight
horizontal track. On the truck, 𝑛𝑛 guns are mounted parallel to the track and facing backwards,
where 𝑛𝑛 > 1. Each of the guns is loaded with a single projectile of mass 𝑚𝑚. The mass of the
truck and guns (but not including the projectiles) is 𝑀𝑀.
When a gun is fired, the projectile leaves its muzzle horizontally with a speed 𝑣𝑣 − 𝑉𝑉 relative to
the ground, where 𝑉𝑉 is the speed of the truck immediately before the gun is fired.
(i) All 𝑛𝑛 guns are fired simultaneously. Find the speed, 𝑢𝑢, with which the truck moves, and
show that the kinetic energy, 𝐾𝐾, which is gained by the system (truck, guns and projectiles)
is given by
1 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
𝐾𝐾 = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑣𝑣 2 �1 + �.
2 𝑀𝑀
(ii) Instead, the guns are fired one at a time. Let 𝑢𝑢𝑟𝑟 be the speed of the truck when 𝑟𝑟 guns have
been fired, so that 𝑢𝑢0 = 0. Show that, for 1 ≤ 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 𝑛𝑛,
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑢𝑢𝑟𝑟 − 𝑢𝑢𝑟𝑟−1 = (∗)
(𝑛𝑛
𝑀𝑀 + − 𝑟𝑟)𝑚𝑚
and hence that 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 < 𝑢𝑢.
(iii) Let 𝐾𝐾𝑟𝑟 be the total kinetic energy of the system when 𝑟𝑟 guns have been fired (one at a time),
so that 𝐾𝐾0 = 0. Using(∗), show that, for 1 ≤ 𝑟𝑟 ≤ 𝑛𝑛,
1 1
𝐾𝐾𝑟𝑟 − 𝐾𝐾𝑟𝑟−1 = 𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣 2 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚(𝑢𝑢𝑟𝑟 − 𝑢𝑢𝑟𝑟−1 ) 2017
2 2
[Link]

and hence show that 8

1 1
𝐾𝐾𝑛𝑛 = 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑣𝑣 2 + 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 .
2 2
Deduce that 𝐾𝐾𝑛𝑛 < 𝐾𝐾.

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2017

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2017Q12]
The discrete random variables 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 can each take the values 1, … , 𝑛𝑛 (where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2).
Their joint probability distribution is given by
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥, 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑦𝑦) = 𝑘𝑘(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦),
where 𝑘𝑘 is a constant.
(i) Show that
𝑛𝑛 + 1 + 2𝑥𝑥
P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑥𝑥) = .
2𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛 + 1)
Hence determine whether 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 are independent.
(ii) Show that the covariance of 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌 is negative.

[STEP 3, 2017Q13]
The random variable 𝑋𝑋 has mean 𝜇𝜇 and variance 𝜎𝜎 2 , and the function 𝑉𝑉 is defined, for −∞ <
𝑥𝑥 < ∞, by
𝑉𝑉(𝑥𝑥) = E((𝑋𝑋 − 𝑥𝑥)2 ).
Express 𝑉𝑉(𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑥𝑥, 𝜇𝜇 and 𝜎𝜎.
2017
The random variable 𝑌𝑌 is defined by 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑉𝑉(𝑋𝑋). Show that [Link]

9
E(𝑌𝑌) = 2𝜎𝜎 2 . (∗)
Now suppose that 𝑋𝑋 is uniformly distributed on the interval 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 1. Find 𝑉𝑉(𝑥𝑥). Find also the
probability density function of 𝑌𝑌 and use it to verify that (∗) holds in this case.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2017 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2017
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2017

STEP 3 2018
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2018
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 13 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2018 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2018Q1]
(i) The function 𝑓𝑓 is given by
1 1
𝑓𝑓(𝛽𝛽) = 𝛽𝛽 − − (𝛽𝛽 ≠ 0).
𝛽𝛽 𝛽𝛽 2
Find the stationary point of the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝛽𝛽) and sketch the curve.
Sketch also the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑔𝑔(𝛽𝛽), where
3 1
𝑔𝑔(𝛽𝛽) = 𝛽𝛽 + − 2 (𝛽𝛽 ≠ 0).
𝛽𝛽 𝛽𝛽
(ii) Let 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 be the roots of the equation
𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼 + 𝛽𝛽 = 0,
1 1 1
where 𝛽𝛽 ≠ 0. Obtain expressions in terms of 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽 for 𝑢𝑢 + 𝑣𝑣 + and + + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢.
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢 𝑣𝑣
1 1 1
(iii) Given that 𝑢𝑢 + 𝑣𝑣 + = −1, and that 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 are real, show that + + 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ≤ −1.
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢 𝑣𝑣
1 1 1
(iv) Given instead that 𝑢𝑢 + 𝑣𝑣 + = 3, and that 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑣𝑣 are real, find the greatest value + +
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑢𝑢 𝑣𝑣
𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢.

[STEP 3, 2018Q2] 2018

[Link]
The sequence of functions 𝑦𝑦0 , 𝑦𝑦1 , 𝑦𝑦2 , … is defined by 𝑦𝑦0 = 1 and, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, 2
1 d𝑛𝑛 𝑧𝑧
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 = (−1)𝑛𝑛 ,
𝑧𝑧 d𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛
2
where 𝑧𝑧 = e−𝑥𝑥 .
d𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛
(i) Show that d𝑥𝑥
= 2𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 − 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.

(ii) Prove by induction that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,

𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 = 2𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 − 2𝑛𝑛𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛−1 .
Deduce that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1,
2
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 − 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+2 = 2𝑛𝑛(𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛−1 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 ) + 2𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛2 .
(iii) Hence show that 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛2 − 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛−1 𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛+1 > 0 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2018

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q3]
Show that the second-order differential equation
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 ′′ + (1 − 2𝑝𝑝)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 ′ + (𝑝𝑝2 − 𝑞𝑞 2 )𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥),
where 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞 are constants, can be written in the form
′
𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎 �𝑥𝑥 𝑏𝑏 (𝑥𝑥 𝑐𝑐 𝑦𝑦)′ � = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥), (∗)

where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are constants.

(i) Use (∗) to derive the general solution of the equation
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 ′′ + (1 − 2𝑝𝑝)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 ′ + (𝑝𝑝2 − 𝑞𝑞 2 )𝑦𝑦 = 0
in the different cases that arise according to the values of 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑞𝑞.
(ii) Use (∗) to derive the general solution of the equation
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 ′′ + (1 − 2𝑝𝑝)𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 ′ + 𝑝𝑝2 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛
in the different cases that arise according to the values of 𝑝𝑝 and 𝑛𝑛.

[STEP 3, 2018Q4]
The point 𝑃𝑃(𝑎𝑎 sec 𝜃𝜃 , 𝑏𝑏 tan 𝜃𝜃) lies on the hyperbola
𝑥𝑥 2 𝑦𝑦 2
− = 1,
𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏 2 2018
where 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏 > 0. Show that the equation of the tangent to the hyperbola at 𝑃𝑃 can be written
[Link]

3
as
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 sin 𝜃𝜃 = 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 cos 𝜃𝜃.
𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦
(i) This tangent meets the lines = and = − at 𝑆𝑆 and 𝑇𝑇, respectively.
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏

How is the mid-point of 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 related to 𝑃𝑃?

(ii) The point 𝑄𝑄(𝑎𝑎 sec 𝜙𝜙 , 𝑏𝑏 tan 𝜙𝜙) also lies on the hyperbola and the tangents to the hyperbola
at 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 are perpendicular. These two tangents intersect at (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦).
Obtain expressions for 𝑥𝑥 2 and 𝑦𝑦 2 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝜃𝜃 and 𝜙𝜙.
Hence, or otherwise, show that 𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑦𝑦 2 = 𝑎𝑎2 − 𝑏𝑏 2 .

STEP 3 Past Paper 2018 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q5]
The real numbers 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , 𝑎𝑎3 , … are all positive. For each positive integer 𝑛𝑛 , 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 and 𝐺𝐺𝑛𝑛 are
defined by
𝑎𝑎1 + 𝑎𝑎2 + ⋯ + 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 1
𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 = and 𝐺𝐺𝑛𝑛 = (𝑎𝑎1 𝑎𝑎2 ⋯ 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 )𝑛𝑛 .
𝑛𝑛
(i) Show that, for any given positive integer 𝑘𝑘,
(𝑘𝑘 + 1)(𝐴𝐴𝑘𝑘+1 − 𝐺𝐺𝑘𝑘+1 ) ≥ 𝑘𝑘(𝐴𝐴𝑘𝑘 − 𝐺𝐺𝑘𝑘 )
if and only if
𝜆𝜆𝑘𝑘+1
𝑘𝑘 − (𝑘𝑘 + 1)𝜆𝜆𝑘𝑘 + 𝑘𝑘 ≥ 0,
1
𝑎𝑎 𝑘𝑘+1
where 𝜆𝜆𝑘𝑘 = � 𝑘𝑘+1 � .
𝐺𝐺𝑘𝑘

(ii) Let
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑥𝑥 𝑘𝑘+1 − (𝑘𝑘 + 1)𝑥𝑥 + 𝑘𝑘,
where 𝑥𝑥 > 0 and 𝑘𝑘 is a positive integer. Show that 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) ≥ 0 and that 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 0 if and only
if 𝑥𝑥 = 1.
(iii) Deduce that:
(a) 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 ≥ 𝐺𝐺𝑛𝑛 for all 𝑛𝑛.
(b) if 𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 = 𝐺𝐺𝑛𝑛 for some 𝑛𝑛, then 𝑎𝑎1 = 𝑎𝑎2 = ⋯ = 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 .
2018
[Link]

4
[STEP 3, 2018Q6]
(i) The distinct points 𝐴𝐴, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝐶𝐶 lie on a straight line in the Argand diagram, and represent
𝑞𝑞−𝑎𝑎
the distinct complex numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑐𝑐, respectively. Show that is real and hence that
𝑐𝑐−𝑎𝑎
(𝑐𝑐 − 𝑎𝑎)(𝑞𝑞 ∗ − 𝑎𝑎∗ ) = (𝑐𝑐 ∗ − 𝑎𝑎∗ )(𝑞𝑞 − 𝑎𝑎).
Given that 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎∗ = 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ∗ = 1, show further that
𝑞𝑞 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑞𝑞 ∗ = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑐𝑐.
(ii) The distinct points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 lie, in anticlockwise order, on the circle of unit radius
with centre at the origin (so that, for example, 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ∗ = 1). The lines 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 meet at 𝑄𝑄.
Show that
(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)𝑞𝑞 ∗ = (𝑎𝑎 + 𝑐𝑐) − (𝑏𝑏 + 𝑑𝑑),
where 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑑𝑑 are complex numbers represented by the points 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐷𝐷 respectively, and
show further that
(𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏)(𝑞𝑞 + 𝑞𝑞 ∗ ) = (𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏)(1 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐) + (𝑐𝑐 − 𝑑𝑑)(1 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎).
(iii) The lines 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 meet at 𝑃𝑃, which represents the complex number 𝑝𝑝. Given that 𝑝𝑝 is
real, show that 𝑝𝑝(1 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏. Given further that 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ≠ 0, show that
𝑝𝑝(𝑞𝑞 + 𝑞𝑞 ∗ ) = 2.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2018

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q7]
(i) Use De Moivre's theorem to show that, if sin 𝜃𝜃 ≠ 0, then
(cot 𝜃𝜃 + 𝐢𝐢)2𝑛𝑛+1 − (cot 𝜃𝜃 − 𝐢𝐢)2𝑛𝑛+1 sin(2𝑛𝑛 + 1) 𝜃𝜃
= ,
2𝐢𝐢 sin2𝑛𝑛+1 𝜃𝜃
for any positive integer 𝑛𝑛.
Deduce that the solutions of the equation
2𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑛𝑛 2𝑛𝑛 + 1 𝑛𝑛−1
� � 𝑥𝑥 − � � 𝑥𝑥 + ⋯ + (−1)𝑛𝑛 = 0
1 3
are
𝑚𝑚π
𝑥𝑥 = cot 2 � �
2𝑛𝑛 + 1
where 𝑚𝑚 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛𝑛.
(ii) Hence show that
𝑛𝑛
𝑚𝑚π 𝑛𝑛(2𝑛𝑛 − 1)
� cot 2 � �= .
2𝑛𝑛 + 1 3
𝑚𝑚=1
1
(iii) Given that 0 < sin 𝜃𝜃 < 𝜃𝜃 < tan 𝜃𝜃 for 0 < 𝜃𝜃 < π, show that
2

1
cot 2 𝜃𝜃 < < 1 + cot 2 𝜃𝜃.
𝜃𝜃 2
2018
Hence show that [Link]

∞ 5
1 π2
� 2= .
𝑚𝑚 6
𝑚𝑚=1

STEP 3 Past Paper 2018 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q8]
In this question, you should ignore issues of convergence.
(i) Let
1
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥 −1 )
𝐼𝐼 = � d𝑥𝑥,
0 1 + 𝑥𝑥
where 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is a function for which the integral exists.
Show that
∞ 𝑛𝑛+1
𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦)
𝐼𝐼 = � � d𝑦𝑦
𝑦𝑦(1 + 𝑦𝑦)
𝑛𝑛=1 𝑛𝑛

and deduce that, if 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥 + 1) for all 𝑥𝑥, then

1
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)
𝐼𝐼 = � d𝑥𝑥.
0 1 + 𝑥𝑥
(ii) The fractional part, {𝑥𝑥}, of a real number 𝑥𝑥 is defined to be 𝑥𝑥 − ⌊𝑥𝑥⌋ where ⌊𝑥𝑥⌋ is the largest
integer less than or equal to 𝑥𝑥. For example {3.2} = 0.2 and {3} = 0.
Use the result of part (i) to evaluate
1 {𝑥𝑥 −1 } 1 {2𝑥𝑥 −1 }
� d𝑥𝑥 and � d𝑥𝑥.
0 1 + 𝑥𝑥 0 1 + 𝑥𝑥

2018
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2018

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2018Q9]
A particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 is projected with speed 𝑢𝑢0 along a smooth horizontal floor directly
towards a wall. It collides with a particle 𝑄𝑄 of mass 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 which is moving directly away from the
wall with speed 𝑣𝑣0 . In the subsequent motion, 𝑄𝑄 collides alternately with the wall and with 𝑃𝑃.
The coefficient of restitution between 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑃𝑃 is 𝑒𝑒, and the coefficient of restitution between
𝑄𝑄 and the wall is 1.
Let 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 and 𝑣𝑣𝑛𝑛 be the velocities of 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄, respectively, towards the wall after the 𝑛𝑛th collision
between 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄.
(i) Show that, for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2,
(1 + 𝑘𝑘)𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 − (1 − 𝑘𝑘)(1 + 𝑒𝑒)𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝑒𝑒(1 + 𝑘𝑘)𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛−2 = 0. (∗)
1 1
(ii) You are now given that 𝑒𝑒 = and 𝑘𝑘 = , and that the solution of (∗) is of the form
2 34

7 𝑛𝑛 5 𝑛𝑛
𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 = 𝐴𝐴 � � + 𝐵𝐵 � � (𝑛𝑛 ≥ 0),
10 7
where 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are independent of 𝑛𝑛. Find expressions for 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 in terms of 𝑢𝑢0 and 𝑣𝑣0 .
Show that, if 0 < 6𝑢𝑢0 < 𝑣𝑣0 , then 𝑢𝑢𝑛𝑛 will be negative for large 𝑛𝑛.

[STEP 3, 2018Q10]
2018
A uniform disc with centre 𝑂𝑂 and radius 𝑎𝑎 is suspended from a point 𝐴𝐴 on its circumference, so
[Link]

that it can swing freely about a horizontal axis 𝐿𝐿 through 𝐴𝐴 . The plane of the disc 7is
perpendicular to 𝐿𝐿. A particle 𝑃𝑃 is attached to a point on the circumference of the disc. The mass
of the disc is 𝑀𝑀 and the mass of the particle is 𝑚𝑚.
In equilibrium, the disc hangs with 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 horizontal, and the angle between 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and the
downward vertical through 𝐴𝐴 is 𝛽𝛽. Find sin 𝛽𝛽 in terms of 𝑀𝑀 and 𝑚𝑚 and show that

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 2𝑀𝑀
=� .
𝑎𝑎 𝑀𝑀 + 𝑚𝑚

The disc is rotated about 𝐿𝐿 and then released. At later time 𝑡𝑡, the angle between 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 and the
horizontal is 𝜃𝜃; when 𝑃𝑃 is higher than 𝑂𝑂, 𝜃𝜃 is positive and when 𝑃𝑃 is lower than 𝑂𝑂, 𝜃𝜃 is negative.
Show that
1 2
𝐼𝐼𝜃𝜃̇ + (1 − sin 𝛽𝛽)𝑚𝑚𝑎𝑎2 𝜃𝜃 2̇ + (𝑚𝑚 + 𝑀𝑀)𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 cos 𝛽𝛽 (1 − cos 𝜃𝜃)
2
is constant during the motion, where 𝐼𝐼 is the moment of inertia of the disc about 𝐿𝐿.
3 3
Given that 𝑚𝑚 = 𝑀𝑀 and that 𝐼𝐼 = 𝑀𝑀𝑎𝑎2 , show that the period of small oscillations is
2 2

3𝑎𝑎
3π� .
5𝑔𝑔

STEP 3 Past Paper 2018 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q11]
A particle is attached to one end of a light inextensible string of length 𝑏𝑏. The other end of the
string is attached to a fixed point 𝑂𝑂. Initially the particle hangs vertically below 𝑂𝑂. The particle
then receives a horizontal impulse.
The particle moves in a circular arc with the string taut until the acute angle between the string
and the upward vertical is 𝛼𝛼, at which time it becomes slack. Express 𝑉𝑉, the speed of the particle
when the string becomes slack, in terms of 𝑏𝑏, 𝑔𝑔 and 𝛼𝛼.
Show that the string becomes taut again a time 𝑇𝑇 later, where
𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 4𝑉𝑉 sin 𝛼𝛼,
and that just before this time the trajectory of the particle makes an angle 𝛽𝛽 with the horizontal
where tan 𝛽𝛽 = 3 tan 𝛼𝛼.
When the string becomes taut, the momentum of the particle in the direction of the string is
destroyed. Show that the particle comes instantaneously to rest at this time if and only if

1 + √3
sin2 𝛼𝛼 = .
4

2018
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2018

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2018Q12]
A random process generates, independently, 𝑛𝑛 numbers each of which is drawn from a uniform
(rectangular) distribution on the interval 0 to 1. The random variable 𝑌𝑌𝑘𝑘 is defined to be the
𝑘𝑘th smallest number (so there are 𝑘𝑘 − 1 smaller numbers).
(i) Show that, for 0 ≤ 𝑦𝑦 ≤ 1,
𝑛𝑛
𝑛𝑛
P(𝑌𝑌𝑘𝑘 ≤ 𝑦𝑦) = � � � 𝑦𝑦 𝑚𝑚 (1 − 𝑦𝑦)𝑛𝑛−𝑚𝑚 . (∗)
𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚=𝑘𝑘

(ii) Show that

𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 − 1
𝑚𝑚 � � = 𝑛𝑛 � �
𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚 − 1
𝑛𝑛
and obtain a similar expression for (𝑛𝑛 − 𝑚𝑚)�𝑚𝑚 �.

Starting from (∗), show that the probability density function of Y𝑘𝑘 is
𝑛𝑛 − 1 𝑘𝑘−1
𝑛𝑛 � � 𝑦𝑦 (1 − 𝑦𝑦)𝑛𝑛−𝑘𝑘 .
𝑘𝑘 − 1
1
Deduce an expression for ∫0 𝑦𝑦 𝑘𝑘−1 (1 − 𝑦𝑦)𝑛𝑛−𝑘𝑘 d𝑦𝑦.

(iii) Find E(𝑌𝑌𝑘𝑘 ) in terms of 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑘𝑘.

2018
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2018 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2018Q13]
The random variable 𝑋𝑋 takes only non-negative integer values and has probability generating
function 𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡). Show that
1
P(𝑋𝑋 = 0 or 2 or 4 or 6 … ) = �𝐺𝐺(1) + 𝐺𝐺(−1)�.
2
You are now given that 𝑋𝑋 has a Poisson distribution with mean 𝜆𝜆. Show that

𝐺𝐺(𝑡𝑡) = e−𝜆𝜆(1−𝑡𝑡) .
(i) The random variable 𝑌𝑌 is defined by
𝑘𝑘P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑟𝑟), if 𝑟𝑟 = 0, 2, 4, 6, … ,
P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑟𝑟) = �
0, otherwise,
where 𝑘𝑘 is an appropriate constant.
cosh 𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆
Show that the probability generating function of 𝑌𝑌 is .
cosh 𝜆𝜆

Deduce that E(𝑌𝑌) < 𝜆𝜆 for 𝜆𝜆 > 0.

(ii) The random variable 𝑍𝑍 is defined by
𝑐𝑐P(𝑋𝑋 = 𝑟𝑟), if 𝑟𝑟 = 0, 4, 8, 12, … ,
P(𝑍𝑍 = 𝑟𝑟) = �
0, otherwise,
where 𝑐𝑐 is an appropriate constant.
Is E(𝑍𝑍) < 𝜆𝜆 for all positive values of 𝜆𝜆?
2018
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2018

STEP 3 2019
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2019
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 12 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

There is NO Mathematical Formulae booklet.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2019 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2019Q1]
The coordinates of a particle at time 𝑡𝑡 are 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦. For 𝑡𝑡 ≥ 0, they satisfy the pair of coupled
differential equations
𝑥𝑥̇ = −𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑦𝑦̇ = 𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦
where 𝑘𝑘 is a constant. When 𝑡𝑡 = 0, 𝑥𝑥 = 1 and 𝑦𝑦 = 0.
(i) Let 𝑘𝑘 = 1. Find 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 in terms of 𝑡𝑡 and sketch 𝑦𝑦 as a function of 𝑡𝑡.
Sketch the path of the particle in the 𝑥𝑥-𝑦𝑦 plane, giving the coordinates of the point at which
𝑦𝑦 is greatest and the coordinates of the point at which 𝑥𝑥 is least.
(ii) Instead, let 𝑘𝑘 = 0. Find 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦 in terms of 𝑡𝑡 and sketch the path of the particle in the 𝑥𝑥-𝑦𝑦
plane.

[STEP 3, 2019Q2]
The definition of the derivative 𝑓𝑓′ of a (differentiable) function 𝑓𝑓 is
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥 + ℎ) − 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)
𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) = lim . (∗)
ℎ→0 ℎ
(i) The function 𝑓𝑓 has derivative 𝑓𝑓′ and satisfies
2019
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦) = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦) [Link]

2
for all 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦, and 𝑓𝑓 ′ (0) = 𝑘𝑘 where 𝑘𝑘 ≠ 0. Show that 𝑓𝑓(0) = 1.
Using (∗), show that 𝑓𝑓 ′ (𝑥𝑥) = 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘(𝑥𝑥) and find 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑘𝑘.
(ii) The function 𝑔𝑔 has derivative 𝑔𝑔′ and satisfies
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑔𝑔(𝑦𝑦)
𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦) =
1 + 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)𝑔𝑔(𝑦𝑦)
for all 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑦𝑦, |𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)| < 1 for all 𝑥𝑥, and 𝑔𝑔′ (0) = 𝑘𝑘 where 𝑘𝑘 ≠ 0.
Find 𝑔𝑔′ (𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) and 𝑘𝑘, and hence find 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) in terms of 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑘𝑘.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2019

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2019Q3]
The matrix 𝐀𝐀 is given by
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏
𝐀𝐀 = � �.
𝑐𝑐 𝑑𝑑
(i) You are given that the transformation represented by 𝐀𝐀 has a line 𝐿𝐿1 of invariant points
(so that each point on 𝐿𝐿1 is transformed to itself). Let (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) be a point on 𝐿𝐿1 . Show that
�(𝑎𝑎 − 1)(𝑑𝑑 − 1) − 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏�𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = 0.
Show further that (𝑎𝑎 − 1)(𝑑𝑑 − 1) = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏.
What can be said about 𝐀𝐀 if 𝐿𝐿1 does not pass through the origin?
(ii) By considering the cases 𝑏𝑏 ≠ 0 and 𝑏𝑏 = 0 separately, show that if (𝑎𝑎 − 1)(𝑑𝑑 − 1) = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
then the transformation represented by 𝐀𝐀 has a line of invariant points. You should
identify the line in the different cases that arise.
(iii) You are given instead that the transformation represented by 𝐀𝐀 has an invariant line 𝐿𝐿2
(so that each point on 𝐿𝐿2 is transformed to a point on 𝐿𝐿2 ) and that 𝐿𝐿2 does not pass
through the origin. If 𝐿𝐿2 has the form 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑘𝑘, show that (𝑎𝑎 − 1)(𝑑𝑑 − 1) = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏.

[STEP 3, 2019Q4]
The 𝑛𝑛th degree polynomial 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) is said to be reflexive if:
(a) 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) is of the form 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 − 𝑎𝑎1 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−1 + 𝑎𝑎2 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−2 − ⋯ + (−1)𝑛𝑛 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 where 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
2019
(b) 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , … , 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 are real. [Link]

3
(c) the 𝑛𝑛 (not necessarily distinct) roots of the equation 𝑃𝑃(𝑥𝑥) = 0 are 𝑎𝑎1 , 𝑎𝑎2 , … , 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 .
(i) Find all reflexive polynomials of degree less than or equal to 3.
(ii) For a reflexive polynomial with 𝑛𝑛 > 3, show that
2𝑎𝑎2 = −𝑎𝑎22 − 𝑎𝑎32 − ⋯ − 𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛2 .
Deduce that, if all the coefficients of a reflexive polynomial of degree 𝑛𝑛 are integers and
𝑎𝑎𝑛𝑛 ≠ 0, then 𝑛𝑛 ≤ 3.
(iii) Determine all reflexive polynomials with integer coefficients.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2019 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2019Q5]
(i) Let
𝑥𝑥
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = ,
�𝑥𝑥 2 + 𝑝𝑝
where 𝑝𝑝 is a non-zero constant. Sketch the curve 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0 in the case 𝑝𝑝 > 0.
(ii) Let
1
𝐼𝐼 = � d𝑦𝑦,
(𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2 )�𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑦𝑦 2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
where 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are positive constant. Use the substitution 𝑦𝑦 = , where 𝑝𝑝 is a suitably
�𝑥𝑥 2 +𝑝𝑝
chosen constant, to show that
1
𝐼𝐼 = � d𝑥𝑥.
𝑏𝑏 2 + (𝑏𝑏 2 − 𝑐𝑐 2 )𝑥𝑥 2
Evaluate
√2 1
� d𝑦𝑦.
1 (3 − 𝑦𝑦 2 )�2 − 𝑦𝑦 2
1 1 𝑥𝑥
[Note: ∫ d𝑥𝑥 = tan−1 𝑎𝑎 + constant.]
𝑎𝑎 2 +𝑥𝑥 2 𝑎𝑎

Hence evaluate
1 2019
𝑦𝑦
� d𝑦𝑦. [Link]
1 (3𝑦𝑦 2
− 1)�2𝑦𝑦 2 − 1 4
√2

(iii) By means of a suitable substitution, evaluate

1
1
� d𝑦𝑦.
1 (3𝑦𝑦 2
− 1)�2𝑦𝑦 2 − 1
√2

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2019

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2019Q6]
The point 𝑃𝑃 in the Argand diagram is represented by the the complex number 𝑧𝑧, which satisfies
𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 ∗ − 𝑎𝑎𝑧𝑧 ∗ − 𝑎𝑎∗ 𝑧𝑧 + 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ∗ − 𝑟𝑟 2 = 0.
Here, 𝑟𝑟 is a positive real number and 𝑟𝑟 2 ≠ 𝑎𝑎∗ 𝑎𝑎. By writing |𝑧𝑧 − 𝑎𝑎|2 as (𝑧𝑧 − 𝑎𝑎)(𝑧𝑧 − 𝑎𝑎)∗ , show
that the locus of 𝑃𝑃 is a circle, 𝐶𝐶, the radius and the centre of which you should give.
1
(i) The point 𝑄𝑄 is repesnted by 𝜔𝜔 and is related to 𝑃𝑃 by 𝜔𝜔 = . Let 𝐶𝐶′ be the locus of 𝑄𝑄. Show
𝑧𝑧
that 𝐶𝐶′ is also a circle, and give its radius and centre.
If 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐶𝐶′ are the same circle, show that
(|𝑎𝑎|2 − 𝑟𝑟 2 )2 = 1
and that either 𝑎𝑎 is real or 𝑎𝑎 is imaginary. Give sketches to indicate the position of 𝐶𝐶 in
these two cases.
1
(ii) Suppose instead that the point 𝑄𝑄 is represented by 𝜔𝜔, where 𝜔𝜔 = . If the locus of 𝑄𝑄 is 𝐶𝐶,
𝑧𝑧 ∗
is it the case that either 𝑎𝑎 is real or 𝑎𝑎 is imaginary?

[STEP 3, 2019Q7]
The Devil's Curve is given by
𝑦𝑦 2 (𝑦𝑦 2 − 𝑏𝑏 2 ) = 𝑥𝑥 2 (𝑥𝑥 2 − 𝑎𝑎2 ),
where 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are positive constants. 2019
[Link]

(i) In the case 𝑎𝑎 = 𝑏𝑏, sketch the Devil's Curve. 5

(ii) Now consider the case 𝑎𝑎 = 2 and 𝑏𝑏 = √5, and 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0, 𝑦𝑦 ≥ 0.

(a) Show by considering a quadratic equation in 𝑥𝑥 2 that either 0 ≤ 𝑦𝑦 ≤ 1 or 𝑦𝑦 ≥ 2.
(b) Describe the curve very close to and very far from the origin.
(c) Find the points at which the tangent to the curve is parallel to the 𝑥𝑥-axis and the point
at which the tangent to the curve is parallel to the 𝑦𝑦-axis.
Sketch the Devil's Curve in this case.

(iii) Sketch the Devil's Curve in the case 𝑎𝑎 = 2 and 𝑏𝑏 = √5 again, but with −∞ < 𝑥𝑥 < ∞ and
−∞ < 𝑦𝑦 < ∞.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2019 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2019Q8]
A pyramid has a horizontal rectangular base 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and its vertex 𝑉𝑉 is vertically above the
centre of the base. The acute angle between the face 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and the base is 𝛼𝛼, the acute angle
between the face 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 and the base is 𝛽𝛽 and the obtuse angle between the faces 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
is π − 𝜃𝜃.
(i) The edges 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵𝐶𝐶 are parallel to the unit vectors 𝐢𝐢̂ and 𝐣𝐣̂ , respectively, and the unit
̂ is vertical. Find a unit vector that is perpendicular to the face 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
vector 𝐤𝐤
Show that
cos 𝜃𝜃 = cos 𝛼𝛼 cos 𝛽𝛽.
(ii) The edge 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 makes an angle 𝜙𝜙 with the base. Show that
cot 2 𝜙𝜙 = cot 2 𝛼𝛼 + cot 2 𝛽𝛽.
Show also that
cos 2 𝛼𝛼 + cos 2 𝛽𝛽 − 2 cos2 𝜃𝜃 2 cos 𝜃𝜃 − 2 cos 2 𝜃𝜃
cos 2 𝜙𝜙 = ≥
1 − cos2 𝜃𝜃 1 − cos2 𝜃𝜃
and deduce that 𝜙𝜙 < 𝜃𝜃.

2019
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2019

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2019Q9]
In this question, 𝐢𝐢̂ and 𝐣𝐣̂ are perpendicular unit vectors and 𝐣𝐣̂ is vertically upwards.
A smooth hemisphere of mass 𝑀𝑀 and radius 𝑎𝑎 rests on a smooth horizontal table with its plane
face in contact with the table. The point 𝐴𝐴 is at the top of the hemisphere and the point 𝑂𝑂 is at
the centre of its plane face.
Initially, a particle 𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 rests at 𝐴𝐴. It is then given a small displacement in the positive 𝐢𝐢̂
direction. At a later time 𝑡𝑡 , when the particle is still in contact with the hemisphere, the
hemisphere has been displaced by −𝑠𝑠𝐢𝐢̂ and ∠𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝜃𝜃.
(i) Let 𝐫𝐫 be the position vector of the particle at time 𝑡𝑡 with respect to the initial position of 𝑂𝑂.
Write down an expression for 𝐫𝐫 in terms of 𝑎𝑎, 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑠𝑠 and show that
𝐫𝐫̇ = �𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ cos 𝜃𝜃 − 𝑠𝑠̇ �𝐢𝐢̂ − 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ sin 𝜃𝜃 𝐣𝐣̂.
Show also that
𝑠𝑠̇ = (1 − 𝑘𝑘)𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ cos 𝜃𝜃,
𝑀𝑀
where 𝑘𝑘 = , and deduce that
𝑚𝑚+𝑀𝑀

𝐫𝐫̇ = 𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ (𝑘𝑘 cos 𝜃𝜃 𝐢𝐢̂ − sin 𝜃𝜃 𝐣𝐣̂).

(ii) Show that
𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 (𝑘𝑘 cos2 𝜃𝜃 + sin2 𝜃𝜃) = 2𝑔𝑔(1 − cos 𝜃𝜃). 2019
[Link]

(iii) At time 𝑇𝑇, when 𝜃𝜃 = 𝛼𝛼, the particle leaves the hemisphere. By considering the component 7
of 𝐫𝐫̈ parallel to the vector sin 𝜃𝜃 𝐢𝐢̂ + 𝑘𝑘 cos 𝜃𝜃 𝐣𝐣̂, or otherwise, show that at time 𝑇𝑇
𝑎𝑎𝜃𝜃̇ 2 = 𝑔𝑔 cos 𝛼𝛼.
2
Find a cubic equation for cos 𝛼𝛼 and deduce that cos 𝛼𝛼 > .
3

STEP 3 Past Paper 2019 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2019Q10]
Two identical smooth spheres 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 can move on a smooth horizontal table. Initially, 𝑃𝑃
moves with speed 𝑢𝑢 and 𝑄𝑄 is at rest. Then 𝑃𝑃 collides with 𝑄𝑄. The direction of travel of 𝑃𝑃 before
the collision makes an acute angle 𝛼𝛼 with the line joining the centres of 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 at the moment
of the collision. The coefficient of restitution between 𝑃𝑃 and 𝑄𝑄 is 𝑒𝑒 where 𝑒𝑒 < 1.
As a result of the collision, 𝑃𝑃 has speed 𝑣𝑣 and 𝑄𝑄 has speed 𝑤𝑤, and 𝑃𝑃 is deflected through an
angle 𝜃𝜃.
(i) Show that
𝑢𝑢 sin 𝛼𝛼 = 𝑣𝑣 sin(𝛼𝛼 + 𝜃𝜃)
and find an expression for 𝑤𝑤 in terms of 𝑣𝑣, 𝜃𝜃 and 𝛼𝛼.
(ii) Show further that
sin 𝜃𝜃 = cos(𝜃𝜃 + 𝛼𝛼) sin 𝛼𝛼 + 𝑒𝑒 sin(𝜃𝜃 + 𝛼𝛼) cos 𝛼𝛼
and find an expression for tan 𝜃𝜃 in terms of tan 𝛼𝛼 and 𝑒𝑒.
Find, in terms of 𝑒𝑒, the maximum value of tan 𝜃𝜃 as 𝛼𝛼 varies.

2019
[Link]

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2019

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2019Q11]
The number of customers arriving at a builders' merchants each day follows a Poisson
distribution with mean 𝜆𝜆. Each customer is offered some free sand. The probability of any given
customer taking the free sand is 𝑝𝑝.
(i) Show that the number of customers each day who take sand follows a Poisson distribution
with mean 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝.
(ii) The merchant has a mass 𝑆𝑆 of sand at the beginning of the day. Each customer who takes
the free sand gets a proportion 𝑘𝑘 of the remaining sand, where 0 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 < 1. Show that by
the end of the day the expected mass of sand taken is

�1 − e−𝑘𝑘p𝜆𝜆 �𝑆𝑆.
(iii) At the beginning of the day, the merchant’s bag of sand contains a large number of grains,
exactly one of which is made from solid gold. At the end of the day, the merchant's assistant
takes a proportion 𝑘𝑘 of the remaining sand. Find the probability that the assistant takes
the golden grain. Comment on the case 𝑘𝑘 = 0 and on the limit 𝑘𝑘 → 1.
In the case 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 > 1 find the value of 𝑘𝑘 which maximises the probability that the assistant
takes the golden grain.

[STEP 3, 2019Q12]
2019
The set 𝑆𝑆 is the set of all integers from 1 to 𝑛𝑛. The set 𝑇𝑇 is the set of all distinct subsets of 𝑆𝑆,
[Link]

𝑛𝑛
including the empty set 𝜙𝜙 and 𝑆𝑆 itself. Show that 𝑇𝑇 contains exactly 2 sets. 9

The sets 𝐴𝐴1 , 𝐴𝐴2 , … , 𝐴𝐴𝑚𝑚 , which are not necessarily distinct, are chosen randomly and
independently from 𝑇𝑇, and for each 𝑘𝑘 (1 ≤ 𝑘𝑘 ≤ 𝑚𝑚), the set 𝐴𝐴𝑘𝑘 is equally likely to be any of the
sets in 𝑇𝑇.
(i) Write down the value of P(1 ∈ 𝐴𝐴1 ).
3 𝑛𝑛
(ii) By considering each integer separately, show that P(𝐴𝐴1 ∩ 𝐴𝐴2 = ∅) = �4� .

Find P(𝐴𝐴1 ∩ 𝐴𝐴2 ∩ 𝐴𝐴3 = ∅) and P(𝐴𝐴1 ∩ 𝐴𝐴2 ∩ ⋯ ∩ 𝐴𝐴𝑚𝑚 = ∅).

(iii) Find P(𝐴𝐴1 ⊆ 𝐴𝐴2 ), P(𝐴𝐴1 ⊆ 𝐴𝐴2 ⊆ 𝐴𝐴3 ) and P(𝐴𝐴1 ⊆ 𝐴𝐴2 ⊆ ⋯ ⊆ 𝐴𝐴𝑚𝑚 ).

STEP 3 Past Paper 2019 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2019
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2019

STEP 3 2020
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2020
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 12 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

There is NO Mathematical Formulae booklet.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2020 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2020Q1]
For non-negative integers 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏, let
π
2
𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = � cos𝑎𝑎 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 d𝑥𝑥.
0

(i) Show that for positive integers 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏,

𝑎𝑎
𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏) = 𝐼𝐼(𝑎𝑎 − 1, 𝑏𝑏 − 1).
𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏
(ii) Prove by induction on 𝑛𝑛 that for non-negative integers 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑚𝑚,
π
2 2𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛! (2𝑚𝑚)! (𝑛𝑛 + 𝑚𝑚)!
� cos𝑛𝑛 𝑥𝑥 cos(𝑛𝑛 + 2𝑚𝑚 + 1)𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 = (−1)𝑚𝑚 .
0 𝑚𝑚! (2𝑛𝑛 + 2𝑚𝑚 + 1)!

[STEP 3, 2020Q2]
The curve 𝐶𝐶 has equation sinh 𝑥𝑥 + sinh 𝑦𝑦 = 2𝑘𝑘, where 𝑘𝑘 is a positive constant.
d2 𝑦𝑦
(i) Show that the curve 𝐶𝐶 has no stationary points and that = 0 at the point (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) on the
d𝑥𝑥 2
curve if and only if
1 + sinh 𝑥𝑥 sinh 𝑦𝑦 = 0.
2020
Find the co-ordinates of the points of inflection on the curve 𝐶𝐶, leaving your answers in
[Link]

terms of inverse hyperbolic functions. 2

(ii) Show that if (𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦) lies on the curve 𝐶𝐶 and on the line 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑎𝑎, then
e2𝑥𝑥 (1 − e−𝑎𝑎 ) − 4𝑘𝑘e𝑥𝑥 + (e𝑎𝑎 − 1) = 0
and deduce that 1 < cosh 𝑎𝑎 ≤ 2𝑘𝑘 2 + 1.
(iii) Sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶.

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2020

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2020Q3]
Given distinct points 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 in the complex plane, the point 𝐺𝐺𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is defined to be the centroid
of the triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, where the point 𝐾𝐾 is the image of 𝐵𝐵 under rotation about 𝐴𝐴 through a
1
clockwise angle of 3 π.

Note: if the points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 are represented in the complex plane by 𝑝𝑝, 𝑞𝑞 and 𝑟𝑟, the centroid
1
of triangle 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is defined to be the point represented by (𝑝𝑝 + 𝑞𝑞 + 𝑟𝑟).
3

(i) If 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐺𝐺𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 are represented in the complex plane by 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑔𝑔𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 , show that
1
𝑔𝑔𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = (𝜔𝜔𝜔𝜔 + 𝜔𝜔∗ 𝑏𝑏),
√3
𝐢𝐢π
where 𝜔𝜔 = e 6 .
(ii) The quadrilateral 𝑄𝑄1 has vertices 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷, in that order, and the quadrilateral 𝑄𝑄2 has
vertices 𝐺𝐺𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 , 𝐺𝐺𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 , 𝐺𝐺𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 and 𝐺𝐺𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 , in that order. Using the result in part(i), show that 𝑄𝑄1 is a
parallelogram if and only if 𝑄𝑄2 is a parallelogram.
(iii) The triangle 𝑇𝑇1 has vertices 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 and the triangle 𝑇𝑇2 has vertices 𝐺𝐺𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 , 𝐺𝐺𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 , and 𝐺𝐺𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 .
Using the result in part (i), show that 𝑇𝑇2 is always an equilateral triangle.

[STEP 3, 2020Q4]
The plane Π has equation 𝐫𝐫 ∙ 𝐧𝐧 � = 0 where 𝐧𝐧
� is a unit vector. Let 𝑃𝑃 be a point with position
2020
vector 𝐱𝐱 which does not lie on the plane Π. Show that the point 𝑄𝑄 with position vector [Link]
𝐱𝐱 −
(𝐱𝐱 ∙ 𝐧𝐧
�)𝐧𝐧
� lies on Π and that 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is perpendicular to Π. 3

(i) Let transformation 𝑇𝑇 be a reflection in the plane 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0, where 𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 + 𝑐𝑐 2 =
1.
1 𝑏𝑏2 +𝑐𝑐 2 −𝑎𝑎2 ̂ under
Show that the image of 𝐢𝐢̂ = �0� under 𝑇𝑇 is � −2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 �, and find the images of 𝐣𝐣̂ and 𝐤𝐤
0 −2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑇𝑇.
Write down the matrix 𝐌𝐌 which represents transformation 𝑇𝑇.
(ii) The matrix
0.64 0.48 0.6
�0.48 0.36 −0.8�
0.6 −0.8 0
represents a reflection in a plane. Find the cartesian equation of the plane.
(iii) The matrix 𝐍𝐍 represents a rotation through angle π about the line through the origin
𝑎𝑎
parallel to �𝑏𝑏 �, where 𝑎𝑎2 + 𝑏𝑏 2 + 𝑐𝑐 2 = 1. Find the matrix 𝐍𝐍.
𝑐𝑐

(iv) Identify the single transformation which is represented by the matrix 𝐍𝐍𝐍𝐍.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2020 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2020Q5]
Show that for positive integer 𝑛𝑛, 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 − 𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑛 = (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑦𝑦) ∑𝑛𝑛𝑟𝑟=1 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛−𝑟𝑟 𝑦𝑦 𝑟𝑟−1 .
(i) Let 𝐹𝐹 be defined by
1
𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥) = for 𝑥𝑥 ≠ 0, 𝑘𝑘
𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘)
when 𝑛𝑛 is a positive integer and 𝑘𝑘 ≠ 0.
(a) Given that
𝐴𝐴 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)
𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥) = + 𝑛𝑛 ,
𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘 𝑥𝑥
where 𝐴𝐴 is a constant and 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) is a polynomial, show that
1 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = �1 − � � �.
𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘
Deduce that
𝑛𝑛
1 1 1
𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑛𝑛 − � 𝑛𝑛−𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟 .
𝑘𝑘 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘) 𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘 𝑥𝑥
𝑟𝑟=1

(b) By differentiating 𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 𝐹𝐹(𝑥𝑥), prove that

𝑛𝑛
1 1 𝑛𝑛 𝑛𝑛 − 𝑟𝑟
𝑛𝑛 2
= 𝑛𝑛 2
− 𝑛𝑛 + � 𝑛𝑛+1−𝑟𝑟 𝑟𝑟+1 .
𝑥𝑥 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘) 𝑘𝑘 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘) 𝑥𝑥𝑘𝑘 (𝑥𝑥 − 𝑘𝑘) 𝑘𝑘 𝑥𝑥
𝑟𝑟=1 2020
[Link]
(ii) Hence evaluate the limit of
4
𝑁𝑁
1
� d𝑥𝑥
2 𝑥𝑥 3 (𝑥𝑥 − 1)2
as 𝑁𝑁 → ∞, justifying your answer.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2020

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2020Q6]
1 1
(i) Sketch the curve 𝑦𝑦 = cos 𝑥𝑥 + √cos 2𝑥𝑥 for − 4 π ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 4 π.

(ii) The equation of curve 𝐶𝐶1 in polar co-ordinates is

1 1
𝑟𝑟 = cos 𝜃𝜃 + √cos 2𝜃𝜃 − π ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ π.
4 4
Sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶1 .
(iii) The equation of curve 𝐶𝐶2 in polar co-ordinates is
1 1
𝑟𝑟 2 − 2𝑟𝑟 cos 𝜃𝜃 + sin2 𝜃𝜃 = 0 − π ≤ 𝜃𝜃 ≤ π.
4 4
1
Find the value of 𝑟𝑟 when 𝜃𝜃 = ± π.
4
1
Show that, when 𝑟𝑟 is small, 𝑟𝑟 ≈ 𝜃𝜃 2.
2

Sketch the curve 𝐶𝐶2 , indicating clearly the behaviour of the curve near 𝑟𝑟 = 0 and near 𝜃𝜃 =
1
± π.
4
π
Show that the area enclosed by curve 𝐶𝐶2 and above the line 𝜃𝜃 = 0 is .
2√2

[STEP 3, 2020Q7]
(i) Given that the variables 𝑥𝑥, 𝑦𝑦 and 𝑢𝑢 are connected by the differential equations 2020
[Link]
d𝑢𝑢 d𝑦𝑦 5
+ 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑢𝑢 = ℎ(𝑥𝑥) and + 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)𝑦𝑦 = 𝑢𝑢 ,
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
show that
d2 𝑦𝑦 d𝑦𝑦
2
+ �𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) + 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)� + �𝑔𝑔′ (𝑥𝑥) + 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥)𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥)�𝑦𝑦 = ℎ(𝑥𝑥). (1)
d𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥
(ii) Given that the differential equation
d2 𝑦𝑦 4 d𝑦𝑦 2 2
2
+ �1 + � + � + 2 � 𝑦𝑦 = 4𝑥𝑥 + 12 (2)
d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 d𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥
can be written in the same form as (1), find a first order differential equation which is
satisfied by 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥).
If 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑘𝑘𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑛 , find a possible value of 𝑛𝑛 and the corresponding value of 𝑘𝑘.
d𝑦𝑦
Hence find a solution of (2) with 𝑦𝑦 = 5 and d𝑥𝑥 = −3 at 𝑥𝑥 = 1.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2020 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2020Q8]
A sequence 𝑢𝑢𝑘𝑘 , for integer 𝑘𝑘 ≥ 1, is defined as follows.
𝑢𝑢1 = 1
𝑢𝑢2𝑘𝑘 = 𝑢𝑢𝑘𝑘 for 𝑘𝑘 ≥ 1
𝑢𝑢2𝑘𝑘+1 = 𝑢𝑢𝑘𝑘 + 𝑢𝑢𝑘𝑘+1 for 𝑘𝑘 ≥ 1
(i) Show that, for every pair of consecutive terms of this sequence, except the first pair, the
term with odd subscript is larger than the term with even subscript.
(ii) Suppose that two consecutive terms in this sequence have a common factor greater than
one. Show that there are then two consecutive terms earlier in the sequence which have
the same common factor. Deduce that any two consecutive terms in this sequence are co-
prime (do not have a common factor greater than one).
(iii) Prove that it is not possible for two positive integers to appear consecutively in the same
order in two different places in the sequence.
(iv) Suppose that 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏 are two co-prime positive integers which do not occur consecutively
in the sequence with 𝑏𝑏 following 𝑎𝑎 . If 𝑎𝑎 > 𝑏𝑏 , show that 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑏𝑏 are two co-prime
positive integers which do not occur consecutively in the sequence with 𝑏𝑏 following 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏,
and whose sum is smaller than 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏. Find a similar result for 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏.
(v) For each integer 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, define the function 𝑓𝑓 from the positive integers to the positive
𝑢𝑢
rational numbers by 𝑓𝑓(𝑛𝑛) = 𝑢𝑢 𝑛𝑛 . Show that the range of 𝑓𝑓 is all the positive rational
𝑛𝑛+1
numbers, and that 𝑓𝑓 has an inverse.
2020
[Link]

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2020

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2020Q9]
Two inclined planes Π1 and Π2 meet in a horizontal line at the lowest points of both planes and
lie on either side of this line. Π1 and Π2 make angles of 𝛼𝛼 and 𝛽𝛽, respectively, to the horizontal,
1
where 0 < 𝛽𝛽 < 𝛼𝛼 < π.
2

A uniform rigid rod 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 of mass 𝑚𝑚 rests with 𝑃𝑃 lying on Π1 and 𝑄𝑄 lying on Π2 so that the rod
lies in a vertical plane perpendicular to Π1 and Π2 with 𝑃𝑃 higher than 𝑄𝑄.
(i) It is given that both planes are smooth and that the rod makes an angle 𝜃𝜃 with the
horizontal. Show that 2 tan 𝜃𝜃 = cot 𝛽𝛽 − cot 𝛼𝛼.
(ii) It is given instead that Π1 is smooth, that Π2 is rough with coefficient of friction 𝜇𝜇 and that
the rod makes an angle 𝜙𝜙 with the horizontal. Given that the rod is in limiting equilibrium,
with 𝑃𝑃 about to slip down the plane Π1 , show that
𝜇𝜇
tan 𝜃𝜃 − tan 𝜙𝜙 =
(𝜇𝜇 + tan 𝛽𝛽) sin 2𝛽𝛽
where 𝜃𝜃 is the angle satisfying 2 tan 𝜃𝜃 = cot 𝛽𝛽 − cot 𝛼𝛼.

2020
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2020 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2020Q10]
A light elastic spring 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, of natural length 𝑎𝑎 and modulus of elasticity 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, hangs vertically
with one end 𝐴𝐴 attached to a fixed point. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is attached to the other end 𝐵𝐵.
The particle is held at rest so that 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 > 𝑎𝑎 and is released.
Find the equation of motion of the particle and deduce that the particle oscillates vertically.
2π
If the period of oscillation is , show that 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 = 𝑎𝑎Ω2 .
Ω

Suppose instead that the particle, still attached to 𝐵𝐵 , lies on a horizontal platform which
2π
performs simple harmonic motion vertically with amplitude 𝑏𝑏 and period .
𝜔𝜔

At the lowest point of its oscillation, the platform is a distance ℎ below 𝐴𝐴.
Let 𝑥𝑥 be the distance of the particle above the lowest point of the oscillation of the platform.
When the particle is in contact with the platform, show that the upward force on the particle
from the platform is
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑚𝑚Ω2 (𝑎𝑎 + 𝑥𝑥 − ℎ) + 𝑚𝑚𝜔𝜔2 (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑥𝑥).
Given that 𝜔𝜔 < Ω, show that, if the particle remains in contact with the platform throughout its
motion,
1 𝜔𝜔2 𝑏𝑏
ℎ ≤ 𝑎𝑎 �1 + � + 2 .
𝑘𝑘 Ω
Find the corresponding inequality if 𝜔𝜔 > Ω.
2020
Hence show that, if the particle remains in contact with the platform throughout its motion, it
[Link]
is necessary that 8
1
ℎ ≤ 𝑎𝑎 �1 + � + 𝑏𝑏 ,
𝑘𝑘
whatever the value of 𝜔𝜔.

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2020

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2020Q11]
The continuous random variable 𝑋𝑋 is uniformly distributed on [𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏] where 0 < 𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏.
(i) Let 𝑓𝑓 be a function defined for all 𝑥𝑥 ∈ [𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏]
• with 𝑓𝑓(𝑎𝑎) = 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑓𝑓(𝑏𝑏) = 𝑎𝑎,
• which is strictly decreasing on [𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏],
• for which 𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = 𝑓𝑓 −1 (𝑥𝑥) for all 𝑥𝑥 ∈ [𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏].
The random variable 𝑌𝑌 is defined by 𝑌𝑌 = 𝑓𝑓(𝑋𝑋). Show that
𝑏𝑏 − 𝑓𝑓(𝑦𝑦)
P(𝑌𝑌 ≤ 𝑦𝑦) = for 𝑦𝑦 ∈ [𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏].
𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎
Find the probability density function for 𝑌𝑌 and hence show that
𝑏𝑏
2𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥(𝑥𝑥)
E(𝑌𝑌 2 ) = −𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + � d𝑥𝑥.
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎
1 1 1 1 1 1
(ii) The random variable 𝑍𝑍 is defined by + = where = + . By finding the variance of
𝑍𝑍 𝑋𝑋 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏
𝑍𝑍, show that
𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎
ln � �< .
𝑎𝑎 − 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐
2020
[Link]

[STEP 3, 2020Q12] 9

𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 both toss the same biased coin. The probability that the coin shows heads is 𝑝𝑝, where
0 < 𝑝𝑝 < 1, and the probability that it shows tails is 𝑞𝑞 = 1 − 𝑝𝑝.
Let 𝑋𝑋 be the number of times 𝐴𝐴 tosses the coin until it shows heads. Let 𝑌𝑌 be the number of
times 𝐵𝐵 tosses the coin until it shows heads.
(i) The random variable 𝑆𝑆 is defined by 𝑆𝑆 = 𝑋𝑋 + 𝑌𝑌 and the random variable 𝑇𝑇 is the maximum
of 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌. Find an expression for P(𝑆𝑆 = 𝑠𝑠) and show that
P(𝑇𝑇 = 𝑡𝑡) = 𝑝𝑝𝑞𝑞 𝑡𝑡−1 (2 − 𝑞𝑞 𝑡𝑡−1 − 𝑞𝑞 𝑡𝑡 ).
(ii) The random variable 𝑈𝑈 is defined by 𝑈𝑈 = |𝑋𝑋 − 𝑌𝑌| , and the random variable 𝑊𝑊 is the
minimum of 𝑋𝑋 and 𝑌𝑌. Find expressions for P(𝑈𝑈 = 𝑢𝑢) and P(𝑊𝑊 = 𝑤𝑤).
(iii) Show that P(𝑆𝑆 = 2 and 𝑇𝑇 = 3) ≠ P(𝑆𝑆 = 2) × P(𝑇𝑇 = 3).
(iv) Show that 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑊𝑊 are independent, and show that no other pair of the four variables 𝑆𝑆,
𝑇𝑇, 𝑈𝑈 and 𝑊𝑊 are independent.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2020 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

2020
[Link]

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2020

STEP 3 2021
180 MINUTESS

STEP 3 2021
Online Exam

微信扫码完成在线考试后，将呈现完整解析、错题录入错题本。

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Read this page carefully, but do not open this question paper until you are told that you
may do so.

Read the additional instructions on the front of the answer booklet.

Write your name, centre number, candidate number, date of birth, and indicate the
paper number in the spaces provided on the answer booklet.

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This paper contains three sections: A, B, and C.

Section A Pure Mathematics

Section B Mechanics

Section C Probability and Statistics

There are 12 questions in this paper.

Each question is marked out of 20. There is no restriction of choice.

All questions attempted will be marked.

There is NO Mathematical Formulae booklet.

Calculators are not permitted.

STEP 3 Past Paper 2021 1

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section A: Pure Mathematics

[STEP 3, 2021Q1]
(i) A curve has parametric equations
𝑥𝑥 = −4 cos3 𝑡𝑡 , 𝑦𝑦 = 12 sin 𝑡𝑡 − 4 sin3 𝑡𝑡.
Find the equation of the normal to this curve at the point
(−4 cos 3 𝜙𝜙 , 12 sin 𝜙𝜙 − 4 sin3 𝜙𝜙),
1
where 0 < 𝜙𝜙 < π.
2

Verify that this normal is a tangent to the curve

2 2
𝑥𝑥 3 + 𝑦𝑦 3 = 4
at the point (8 cos 3 𝜙𝜙 , 8 sin3 𝜙𝜙).
(ii) A curve has parametric equations
𝑥𝑥 = cos 𝑡𝑡 + 𝑡𝑡 sin 𝑡𝑡 , 𝑦𝑦 = sin 𝑡𝑡 − 𝑡𝑡 cos 𝑡𝑡.
Find the equation of the normal to this curve at the point
(cos 𝜙𝜙 + 𝜙𝜙 sin 𝜙𝜙 , sin 𝜙𝜙 − 𝜙𝜙 cos 𝜙𝜙),
1
where 0 < 𝜙𝜙 < π.
2

Determine the perpendicular distance from the origin to this normal, and hence find2021
he
equation of a curve, independent of 𝜙𝜙, to which this normal is a tangent. [Link]

2 STEP 3 Past Paper 2021

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q2]
(i) Let
𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏 𝑐𝑐
𝑥𝑥 = , 𝑦𝑦 = and 𝑎𝑎 = ,
𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 − 𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏
where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are distinct real numbers.
Show that
1 −𝑥𝑥 𝑥𝑥 𝑎𝑎 0
� 𝑦𝑦 1 −𝑦𝑦� �𝑏𝑏 � = �0�
−𝑧𝑧 𝑧𝑧 1 𝑐𝑐 0
and use this result to deduce that 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 + 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = −1.
Hence show that
𝑎𝑎2 𝑏𝑏 2 𝑐𝑐 2
+ + ≥ 2.
(𝑏𝑏 − 𝑐𝑐)2 (𝑐𝑐 − 𝑎𝑎)2 (𝑎𝑎 − 𝑏𝑏)2
(ii) Let
2𝑎𝑎 2𝑏𝑏 2𝑐𝑐
𝑥𝑥 = , 𝑦𝑦 = and 𝑧𝑧 = ,
𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 + 𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏
where 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐 are positive real numbers.
Using a suitable matrix, show that 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 + 𝑧𝑧𝑧𝑧 + 𝑥𝑥𝑥𝑥 = 4.
Hence show that
2021
(2𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑎𝑎 + 2𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 2𝑐𝑐) > 5(𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑐𝑐 + 𝑎𝑎)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏). [Link]

3
Show further that
(2𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑎𝑎 + 2𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 2𝑐𝑐) > 7(𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐)(𝑐𝑐 + 𝑎𝑎)(𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏).

[STEP 3, 2021Q3]
𝛽𝛽 π
(i) Let 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 = ∫0 (sec 𝑥𝑥 + tan 𝑥𝑥)𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥, where 𝑛𝑛 is a non-negative integer and 0 < 𝛽𝛽 < 2 .

For 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, show that

1 1
(𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛+1 + 𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛−1 ) = (sec 𝛽𝛽 + tan 𝛽𝛽)𝑛𝑛 − 1.
2 𝑛𝑛
Show also that
1
𝐼𝐼𝑛𝑛 < ((sec 𝛽𝛽 + tan 𝛽𝛽)𝑛𝑛 − 1).
𝑛𝑛
𝛽𝛽 π
(ii) Let 𝐽𝐽𝑛𝑛 = ∫0 (sec 𝑥𝑥 cos 𝛽𝛽 + tan 𝑥𝑥)𝑛𝑛 d𝑥𝑥, where 𝑛𝑛 is a non-negative integer and 0 < 𝛽𝛽 < .
2

For 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1, show that

1
𝐽𝐽𝑛𝑛 < ((1 + tan 𝛽𝛽)𝑛𝑛 − cosn 𝛽𝛽).
𝑛𝑛

STEP 3 Past Paper 2021 3

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q4]
� be a vector of unit length and Π be the plane through the origin perpendicular to 𝐧𝐧
Let 𝐧𝐧 �. For
any vector 𝐱𝐱, the projection of x onto the plane Π is defined to be the vector 𝐱𝐱 − (𝐱𝐱. 𝐧𝐧
�)𝐧𝐧
�.
̂ each have unit length and the angle between them is 𝜃𝜃, which satisfies 0 <
The vectors 𝐚𝐚� and 𝐛𝐛
1
̂ �.
𝜃𝜃 < π. The vector m is given by 𝐦𝐦 = �𝐚𝐚� + 𝐛𝐛
2

̂.
(i) Show that m bisects the angle between 𝐚𝐚� and 𝐛𝐛
̂
(ii) The vector 𝐜𝐜̂ also has unit length. The angle between 𝐚𝐚� and 𝐜𝐜̂ is 𝛼𝛼, and the angle between 𝐛𝐛
and 𝐜𝐜̂ is 𝛽𝛽. Both angles are acute and non-zero.
Let 𝐚𝐚�1 and 𝐛𝐛̂ 1 be the projections of 𝐚𝐚� and 𝐛𝐛
̂ , respectively, onto the plane through the origin
perpendicular to 𝐜𝐜̂ . Show that 𝐚𝐚�1 . 𝐜𝐜̂ = 0 and, by considering |𝐚𝐚�1 |2 = 𝐚𝐚�1 . 𝐚𝐚�1 , show that
|𝐚𝐚�1 | = sin 𝛼𝛼.
̂ 1 satisfies
Show also that the angle 𝜙𝜙 between 𝐚𝐚�1 and 𝐛𝐛
cos 𝜃𝜃 − cos 𝛼𝛼 cos 𝛽𝛽
cos 𝜙𝜙 = .
sin 𝛼𝛼 sin 𝛽𝛽
(iii) Let 𝐦𝐦1 be the projection of 𝐦𝐦 onto the plane through the origin perpendicular to 𝐜𝐜̂ .
̂ 1 if and only if
Show that 𝐦𝐦1 bisects the angle between 𝐚𝐚�1 and 𝐛𝐛
𝛼𝛼 = 𝛽𝛽 or cos 𝜃𝜃 = cos(𝛼𝛼 − 𝛽𝛽).

2021
[STEP 3, 2021Q5] [Link]

4
Two curves have polar equations 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑎𝑎 + 2 cos 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑟𝑟 = 2 + cos 2𝜃𝜃, where 𝑟𝑟 ≥ 0 and 𝑎𝑎 is a
constant.
(i) Show that these curves meet when
2 cos2 𝜃𝜃 − 2 cos 𝜃𝜃 + 1 − 𝑎𝑎 = 0.
1
Hence show that these curves touch if 𝑎𝑎 = 2 and find the other two values of 𝑎𝑎 for which
the curves touch.
(ii) Sketch the curves 𝑟𝑟 = 𝑎𝑎 + 2 cos 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑟𝑟 = 2 + cos 2𝜃𝜃 on the same diagram in the case 𝑎𝑎 =
1
. Give the values of 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃 at the points at which the curves touch and justify the other
2
features you show on your sketch.
(iii) On two further diagrams, one for each of the other two values of 𝑎𝑎, sketch both the curves
𝑟𝑟 = 𝑎𝑎 + 2 cos 𝜃𝜃 and 𝑟𝑟 = 2 + cos 2𝜃𝜃. Give the values of 𝑟𝑟 and 𝜃𝜃 at the points at which the
curves touch and justify the other features you show on your sketch.

4 STEP 3 Past Paper 2021

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q6]
(i) For 𝑥𝑥 ≠ tan 𝛼𝛼, the function 𝑓𝑓𝛼𝛼 is defined by
𝑥𝑥 tan 𝛼𝛼 + 1
𝑓𝑓α (𝑥𝑥) = tan−1 � �
tan 𝛼𝛼 − 𝑥𝑥
1
where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < π.
2
1
Show that 𝑓𝑓𝛼𝛼′ (𝑥𝑥) = .
1+𝑥𝑥 2

Hence sketch 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓𝛼𝛼 (𝑥𝑥).

1
On a separate diagram, sketch 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑓𝑓𝛼𝛼 (𝑥𝑥) − 𝑓𝑓𝛽𝛽 (𝑥𝑥) where 0 < 𝛼𝛼 < 𝛽𝛽 < π.
2
1 3
(ii) For 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π and 𝑥𝑥 ≠ π, π, the function 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) is defined by
2 2

𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) = tanh−1(sin 𝑥𝑥) − sinh−1(tan 𝑥𝑥).

1 3
For π < 𝑥𝑥 < π, show that 𝑔𝑔′(𝑥𝑥) = 2 sec 𝑥𝑥.
2 2

Use this result to sketch 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑔𝑔(𝑥𝑥) for 0 ≤ 𝑥𝑥 ≤ 2π.

2021
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2021 5

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q7]
(i) Let
e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 + e𝐢𝐢𝜙𝜙
𝑧𝑧 = ,
e𝐢𝐢𝜃𝜃 − e𝐢𝐢𝜙𝜙
where 𝜃𝜃 and 𝜙𝜙 are real, and 𝜃𝜃 − 𝜙𝜙 ≠ 2𝑛𝑛π for any integer 𝑛𝑛. Show that
1
𝑧𝑧 = 𝐢𝐢 cot � (𝜙𝜙 − 𝜃𝜃)�
2
and give expressions for the modulus and argument of 𝑧𝑧.
(ii) The distinct points 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 lie on a circle with radius 1 and centre 𝑂𝑂. In the complex plane,
𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are represented by the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏, and 𝑂𝑂 is at the origin. The point
𝑋𝑋 is represented by the complex number 𝑥𝑥, where 𝑥𝑥 = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 ≠ 0. Show that 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
is perpendicular to 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
If the distinct points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 in the complex plane, which are represented by the complex
numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐, lie on a circle with radius 1 and centre 𝑂𝑂, and ℎ = 𝑎𝑎 + 𝑏𝑏 + 𝑐𝑐 represents the
point 𝐻𝐻, then 𝐻𝐻 is said to be the orthocentre of the triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴.
(iii) The distinct points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 lie on a circle with radius 1 and centre 𝑂𝑂. In the complex
plane, 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 are represented by the complex numbers 𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏 and 𝑐𝑐, and 𝑂𝑂 is at the
origin.
Show that, if the point 𝐻𝐻, represented by the complex number ℎ, is the orthocentre of the
triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, then either ℎ = 𝑎𝑎 or 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 is perpendicular to 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵. 2021
[Link]
(iv) The distinct points 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷 (in that order, anticlockwise) all lie on a circle with radius
6
1 and centre 𝑂𝑂. The points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄, 𝑅𝑅 and 𝑆𝑆 are the orthocentres of the triangles 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵,
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 and 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷, respectively. By considering the midpoint of 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, show that there is a single
transformation which maps the quadrilateral 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 on to the quadrilateral 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 and
describe this transformation fully.

6 STEP 3 Past Paper 2021

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q8]
A sequence 𝑥𝑥1 , 𝑥𝑥2 , … of real numbers is defined by 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 +1 = 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛2 − 2 for 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1 and 𝑥𝑥1 = 𝑎𝑎.
(i) Show that if 𝑎𝑎 > 2 then 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 ≥ 2 + 4𝑛𝑛−1 (𝑎𝑎 − 2).
(ii) Show also that 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛 ⟶ ∞ as 𝑛𝑛 → ∞ if and only if |𝑎𝑎| > 2.
(iii) When 𝑎𝑎 > 2, a second sequence 𝑦𝑦1 , 𝑦𝑦2 , … is defined by
𝐴𝐴𝑥𝑥1 𝑥𝑥2 ⋯ 𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 = ,
𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1
where 𝐴𝐴 is a positive constant and 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
Prove that, for a certain value of 𝑎𝑎, with 𝑎𝑎 > 2, which you should find in terms of 𝐴𝐴,
2
�𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1 −4
𝑦𝑦𝑛𝑛 =
𝑥𝑥𝑛𝑛+1
for all 𝑛𝑛 ≥ 1.
Determine whether, for this value of 𝑎𝑎, the second sequence converges.

2021
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2021 7

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

Section B: Mechanics
[STEP 3, 2021Q9]
An equilateral triangle 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 has sides of length 𝑎𝑎. The points 𝑃𝑃, 𝑄𝑄 and 𝑅𝑅 lie on the sides 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵, 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
and 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴, respectively, such that the length 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 is 𝑥𝑥 and 𝑄𝑄𝑄𝑄 is parallel to 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶. Show that

�√3 cot 𝜙𝜙 + 1��√3 cot 𝜃𝜃 + 1�𝑥𝑥 = 4(𝑎𝑎 − 𝑥𝑥),

where 𝜃𝜃 = ∠𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 and 𝜙𝜙 = ∠𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵.
A horizontal triangular frame with sides of length 𝑎𝑎 and vertices 𝐴𝐴, 𝐵𝐵 and 𝐶𝐶 is fixed on a
smooth horizontal table. A small ball is placed at a point 𝑃𝑃 inside the frame, in contact with side
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 at a distance 𝑥𝑥 from 𝐵𝐵. It is struck so that it moves round the triangle 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 described above,
bouncing off the frame at 𝑄𝑄 and then 𝑅𝑅 before returning to point 𝑃𝑃. The frame is smooth and
the coefficient of restitution between the ball and the frame is 𝑒𝑒.
Show that
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑥𝑥 = .
1 + 𝑒𝑒
Show further that if the ball continues to move round 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 after returning to 𝑃𝑃, then 𝑒𝑒 = 1.

[STEP 3, 2021Q10]
The origin 𝑂𝑂 of coordinates lies on a smooth horizontal table and the 𝑥𝑥- and 𝑦𝑦-axes lie in the
plane of the table. A cylinder of radius a is fixed to the table with its axis perpendicular to2021
the
𝑥𝑥-𝑦𝑦 plane and passing through 𝑂𝑂, and with its lower circular end lying on the table. One end, 𝑃𝑃,
[Link]

8
of a light inextensible string 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 of length 𝑏𝑏 is attached to the bottom edge of the cylinder at
(𝑎𝑎, 0). The other end, 𝑄𝑄, is attached to a particle of mass 𝑚𝑚, which rests on the table.
Initially 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 is straight and perpendicular to the radius of the cylinder at 𝑃𝑃, so that 𝑄𝑄 is at (𝑎𝑎, 𝑏𝑏).
The particle is then given a horizontal impulse parallel to the 𝑥𝑥 -axis so that the string
immediately begins to wrap around the cylinder. At time 𝑡𝑡, the part of the string that is still
straight has rotated through an angle 𝜃𝜃, where 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 < 𝑏𝑏.
(i) Obtain the Cartesian coordinates of the particle at this time.
Find also an expression for the speed of the particle in terms of 𝜃𝜃, 𝜃𝜃̇, 𝑎𝑎 and 𝑏𝑏.
(ii) Show that
𝜃𝜃̇ (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 𝑢𝑢,
where 𝑢𝑢 is the initial speed of the particle.
(iii) Show further that the tension in the string at time 𝑡𝑡 is
𝑚𝑚𝑢𝑢2
.
√𝑏𝑏 2 − 2𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎

8 STEP 3 Past Paper 2021

｜STEP 3 Past Paper Collection (1987-2021)

Section C: Probability and Statistics

[STEP 3, 2021Q11]
The continuous random variable 𝑋𝑋 has probability density function
−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆
𝑓𝑓(𝑥𝑥) = �𝜆𝜆e , for 𝑥𝑥 ≥ 0,
0, otherwise,
where 𝜆𝜆 is a positive constant.
The random variable 𝑌𝑌 is the greatest integer less than or equal to 𝑋𝑋, and 𝑍𝑍 = 𝑋𝑋 − 𝑌𝑌.
(i) Show that, for any non-negative integer 𝑛𝑛,
P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑛𝑛) = �1 − e−𝜆𝜆 �e−𝑛𝑛𝜆𝜆 .
(ii) Show that
1 − e−𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆
P(𝑍𝑍 < 𝑧𝑧) = for 0 ≤ 𝑧𝑧 ≤ 1.
1 − e−𝜆𝜆
(iii) Evaluate E(𝑍𝑍).
(iv) Obtain an expression for
P(𝑌𝑌 = 𝑛𝑛 and 𝑧𝑧1 < 𝑍𝑍 < 𝑧𝑧2 ),
where 0 ≤ 𝑧𝑧1 < 𝑧𝑧2 ≤ 1 and 𝑛𝑛 is a non-negativeinteger.
Determine whether 𝑌𝑌 and 𝑍𝑍 are independent.
2021
[Link]

STEP 3 Past Paper 2021 9

｜STEP 3 历年真题集 (1987-2021)

[STEP 3, 2021Q12]
(i) In a game, each member of a team of 𝑛𝑛 players rolls a fair six-sided die.
The total score of the team is the number of pairs of players rolling the same number. For
example, if 7 players roll 3, 3, 3, 3, 6, 6, 2 the total score is 7, as six different pairs of players
both score 3 and one pair of players both score 6.
Let 𝑋𝑋𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 , for 1 ≤ 𝑖𝑖 < 𝑗𝑗 ≤ 𝑛𝑛, be the random variable that takes the value 1 if players 𝑖𝑖 and 𝑗𝑗
roll the same number and the value 0 otherwise.
Show that 𝑋𝑋12 is independent of 𝑋𝑋23 .
Hence find the mean and variance of the team’s total score.
(ii) Show that, if 𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 , for 1 ≤ 𝑖𝑖 ≤ 𝑚𝑚, are random variables with mean zero, then
𝑚𝑚 𝑚𝑚−1 𝑚𝑚

Var(𝑌𝑌1 + 𝑌𝑌2 + ⋯ + 𝑌𝑌𝑚𝑚 ) = � E�𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖2 � + 2 � � E�𝑌𝑌𝑖𝑖 𝑌𝑌𝑗𝑗 �.

𝑖𝑖=1 𝑖𝑖=1 𝑗𝑗=𝑖𝑖+1

(iii) In a different game, each member of a team of 𝑛𝑛 players rolls a fair six-sided die.
The total score of the team is the number of pairs of players rolling the same even number
minus the number of pairs of players rolling the same odd number. For example, if 7
players roll 3, 3, 3, 3, 6, 6,2 the total score is −5.
Let 𝑍𝑍𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 , for 1 ≤ 𝑖𝑖 < 𝑗𝑗 ≤ 𝑛𝑛, be the random variable that takes the value 1 if players 𝑖𝑖 and 𝑗𝑗
roll the same even number, the value −1 if players 𝑖𝑖 and 𝑗𝑗 roll the same odd number and
the value 0 otherwise. 2021
[Link]

Show that 𝑍𝑍12 is not independent of 𝑍𝑍23 . 10

Find the mean of the team’s total score and show that the variance of the team’s total score
1
is 𝑛𝑛(𝑛𝑛2 − 1).
36

10 STEP 3 Past Paper 2021

Common questions